Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutBuilding Permits 13. 0702 0869 0966 if O CX 0 C7110 COO 0� z0 58 k o§ K o k u 0 z m 2 m o § 0 ¥ ■ ■■ s RI 7.c■z- RI § © 0 k r m K_ § ■ > � o §� % t q -4 m 0 � k 10 �. » ■ () n z 0 Z ■ K 0 a • % § . 0 � z m b 0 r ¢ % . RIP 73 2 % m 2 0§ 000000 . N X { ..m m -0 ® � E § 0 n c 2 -40S ? _ mz v 0 ■ / z ( o • 2 � G 0 > 0 0 0 - 0 C -. m % 1/ z r "n22 ■ ri . 0 0 0 m A "o-o P b N.1 11 / 0 s. k 0 to cl \ . 000000 . t > 0 > 273§ K v © ... 10 41 i r ;§ en z a ■ m § XP . � 2 .4 z m �r- 0 { �r • S' O O 0 OOO OO X o a -n k 0 0 ■ -n s7 11§ 0 a $ § n 0 . k §2 m ■ m % rr- - �k C § ■ m Kam\ - 0k Z -� § t -4 2 a 5 1 @ f K _ @ � 0 o " k 7 D ow z , o f $ �� o - m 2 ) § 7 X 13 - 0 1 k z X k k 000000 / \ rn r� *m / �m q m 'z■ , n $ 0) 7 • m a, 5:3 2 2 2 7 z m I z ,, g 0 0 So 2 - • c m § o g co > cc z R q r Tr - o P 0 a o § m n b. 133 1 . a 000000 ,3 � � n§ p K < � 13 "013 c.) m 4 k . � mm\ § 7 0 qm r 2 • - 0 m � • 0 � 22 k 5 k 585 0 / 7 . 2 gc �k m -9-^ k A x 3 r ■z4 2 ■■ �� tn r m m E ■a■ g ■ B11 t a / ip� co o o z■ '2 t � § q k § xi pa co *' § 0 x m % 0 a -. 2 L r 0 - J m 0 2 2 73 II . 000000 m q m m 313 / z x mm m 2 .� n $ 2 ƒ q ƒ >0 0 g z t m k, 0 r m o z z \■ ��� r / A. X 73 0 m 0 n . k 2 . 000000 1 " % ti E. § ¢ _- § s..j _......pl N > 0 (Anima ` i K g N 0 » m m \ 2 m 73 1 1 M § r E 0�0 N — 0 000 00 'a 0 ) � 0 n 0/ ® 0 ` O ■ s s - 0 0 § 0 0 0 ..� ^ \ a A' f c0 m in \� IL al I o > 9 ■ 2 ^ 0 0 0 . r- 2 2 § 0§ 0 • 4 S 0 0 21 o Pei i / q o § \ E. $ , 2 t • ■ g z � °E O / 2 + rn ■ r o 3 -n -o $ �- / . � , k z 7a\ \ %� / � 0 � 000 m . �m m ■ �■ 0 ■ ■ »m x m m r r § �� i \g ■ §z _ E m 0 0 ` co § 2 E\ k �~ zZmxZ § z m �. � � _ 2 2 2 z c § 2 Si r v 17 - ` 0 k o � �, i c _ ti. 6 m c k w - l $ . 000000 _ m z �� [ a o , K > k . ' �rn2o m k , s m � A > q 0 �2m % ® qmm P § -4r 0 Er O O y. 0 000000 . 0 A $q n 0 0 . 0 g �0 k � § z § z m0 23 � § m � �k k C7 k z � co 3 t § z k 2 $ ■ o 0 0 � § 0 /� 2 \ �� r o 3 0 z 73 kk I 00004( *n m q 2m ir 1D®s � 17 § © ° 0C 2 -4 § K m t i )c I: m 0 0 • 0 0 0 i §kk § k 5J 0 z l k c� c 0 2 m � � � 2 h 2 � a 0 m tq 2 0 ill F i . 000000 z L. » K maims ® hi 0 > m C ;M k -4 i § n n S 73 Xi 7 S i (�3 r= rC M 2$ m>3 N 6" . m �n 1 rn �z z Z til r z ` ° - CO Ii r � nn ` Z m p 0'D-�O Z � i0 ;� y e\ V. z 7.-, Q P, � '� T. O n \ z - � n m � -+ m r ° - Z m m m 3 rN gE 31 0 m m m C y� ym , 04 '� N ° ° 1, = m 1; O h °�� ° m C m t m - , • zzzzaE z z 0. z m • n n p + .. r „ g 0 a 4 e Tri toi z ' m y c c Z C QS a m N F z m o -- c m 0 M ❑❑❑ ❑00 `a • z M N n�1 ' ? < t J r bn n am0 • M 53 „a ”' F ; m r • o * Pitt CITY OF PRIOR LAKE BUILDING PERMIT, Date Rec'd A. A TEMPORARY CERTIFICATE OF ZONING COMPLIANCE Q x AND UTILITY CONNECTION PERMIT IV 5 / 2 :6/ 3 -_____J r . +I1VNESO0' I. White File PERMIT NO . 2. Pink City /3 h P. 7 Z...., 3 Yellow Applicant i- V Please or print and sign at bottom) ADDRESS ZONING . .office use) 1 '1 1 L I 1 F iii- tei in LEGAL DESCRIPTION (office use only) LOT BLOCK ADDITION PID OWNER • (Name) _ 1'Y7 (A I sJ r•p An (Phone) q S Z - / G,7 - e z- (Address) ( 7 7 ( 1f � ' L (Ere,4-1 4U „_ - BUILDER. L (Company Name) C- . L. r 3 J* e�7a e-, It (Phone) grZ %' — Via) (Contact Name) CA' lr-J At wst. -, (Phone) /5 Z - - 6 13- (Address) CA ei 5-/ 1 /9c)'`' S g,, 4 frli, 1 TYPE OF WORK ❑ New Construe ion ['Deck ❑Porch ❑Re- Roofing ❑Re- Siding o ltower Level Finish ❑ Fireplace DAddition ^Iteration ['Utility Connection CODE: DI.R.C. 4LB.C. 0 Misc. n Type of Construction: I II III IV V B PROJECT COST /VALUE $ 7OO Occupancy Group: A B E F HI MR S U (excluding land) Division: 1 42 3 4 5 1 hereby certify t I have furnished information on this application which is to the best of my knowledge true and correct. 1 also certify that I am the owner or authorized agent for the above -memo eopeiry and all construction will conform to all existing state and local laws and will proceed in accordance with submitted plans. I am aware that the building official can vok this it cause- Furthermore, I hereby agree that the city official or a designee may enter upon the property to perform needed mspectiuns- X ■ ■ � (5 /® 5 - Z-f- - 1 - 5 Signature Contractor's License No Date Permit Valuation Park Support Fee # $ Permit Fee $ 9eZ cl° SAC # $ Plan Check Fee $ Co ,° 3 Water Meter Size 5/8 "; I"; $ State Surcharge $ 4-c v r Pressure Reducer $ Penalty $ Sewer /Water Connection Fee # $ Plumbing Permit Fee $ Water Tower Fee # $ Mechanical Permit Fee $ Builder's Deposit $ Sewer & Water Permit Fee $ Other $ I Gas Fireplace Permit Fee $ TOTAL DUE ( " '� Z [ 3 $ C 6 C t,s o 13 V This Ap it .. Becomes ■our Building Permit Wh A oved Paid Recei. t . , ' 7 '1 3 Date ; / 1.3 By 411 7t + uildinit i ftlliii Date This is to certify that tie equest in the above application and accompanying documents i• in a cordance with the City Zoning Ordinance and may proceed as requested. This document when signed e • it Planner constitutes a temporary Certificate of Zoning compliam . an allows construction to commence. Before occupancy, a Certificate of Occupancy must be issued 4 \ ) -1 1 r r 3 ing Dire . . . - 46... ,r .ate Special Conditions, if any 24 hour notice for all inspections (952) 447 - 9850, fax (952) 4474245 4646 Dakota Street Prior Lake, MN 55372 O /� P 11 � 11 9 (01 I �CITY OF PRIOR LAKE BUILDING PERMIT, Date Rec d TEMPORARY CERTIFICATE OF ZONING COMPLIANCE ` I AND UTILITY CONNECTION PERMIT r �� `ll/- f'// - 7C Z 1. Pi to File city 2. PERMIT NO . /3 Pi 3. Yellow Applicant (Please a or print and sign at bottom) ADDRESS ZONING (office use) f -7 I-I I Fo,;ir taw n A . LEGAL DESCRIPTION (office use only) LOT BLOCK ADDITION PID OWNER r I kev `.n (Name) !` r e r Ski .p C Y1 V r c (Phone) (Z - — 768 (Address) Sa AA.e BUILDER. i ` f - (Company Name) ( - \ 1�-f'� �,�c aft.: c a(. CG (Phone) 952 - 32i 0 (Contact Name) G' rest o y J D.4. , (Vla-r.i (Phone) 9 S Z - 89 3 -- z « P3 Lf (Address) (415/ J W . `7(0 St E r� i tt a iv j S zi TYPE OF WORK ❑ New Construction ['Deck ❑Porch ❑Re- Roofing ❑Re- Siding ❑Lower Level Finish ❑ Fireplace ['Addition NtAlteration ['Utility Connection CODE: ❑ I.R.C. ❑I.B.C. .Mist: AddA 3 .Pre spri'Akie.rS 0+ laSeAv Type of Construction: I II III IV V A B Occupancy Group: A B E F HI MR S U PROJECT COST /VALUE $ 600 .0 0 Division: 1 2 3 4 5 (excluding land) I hereby certify that I have furnished information on this application which is to the best of my knowledge true and correct. I also certify that I am the owner or authorized agent for the above - mentioned property and that all construction will conform to all existing state and local laws and will proceed in accordance with submitted plans. I am aware that the building official can revoke this permit for just cause. Furthermore, I hereby agree that the city official or a designee may enter upon the property to perform needed inspections. X ( «41 Q a.,,� CCIid 7- Z7 - Zai3 Signature Contractor's License No. Date Permit Valuation (�i l _, Park Support Fee # $ Permit Fee $ _ 4.6,t / 6 / SAC # $ Plan Check Fee $ I 3 7, to Water Meter Size 5/8 "; 1 "; $ State Surcharge $ 57) Pressure Reducer $ Penalty $ Sewer /Water Connection Fee # $ Plumbing Permit Fee $ Water Tower Fee # $ Mechanical Permit Fee $ Builder's Deposit $ Sewer & Water Permit Fee $ Other $ Gas Fireplace Permit Fee $ TOTAL DUE $ y.7 , l This Appl' Ai i : ecomes Your B h lding Permit Whe Ap oved Paid 7 - c R i No. < d �� / Date ®, Z. (7 B B 1. : •ffici., Date This is to certify that the request in the above application and accompanying documents is in accordance with the City Zoning Ordinance and may proceed as requested. This document when signed by the City Planner constitutes a temporary Certificate of Zoning compliance and allows construction to commence. Before occupancy, a Certificate of Occupancy must be issued. Planning Director Date Special Conditions, if any 24 hour notice for all inspections (952) 447 -9850, fax (952) 447 -4245 4646 Dakota Street S.E., Prior Lake, Minnesota 55372 iiii, Date Rec'd , , CITY OF PRIOR LAKE PLUMBING PERMIT _t dfr /° " 7 ©Z- l. Blue P PERMIT NO. /3 �!� 2. Y C ity / '� Y�A� 3. Yellow Applicant O v (Please type or print and sign at bottom) ADDRESS ZONING (office use) 17741 Fairlawn Ave. LEGAL DESCRIPTION (office use only) LOT BLOCK ADDITION PID ZS; //O , 01e. v OWNER Friendship Church 952 447 - 8282 (Name) (Phone) (Address) (Namo A nit a Ht & PI dba Clearwater PI & Ht (Phone) 952- 440 -3779 {Namr� 9 g 9 9 (Address) 19260 Mushtown Road Prior Lake 55372 (Address) (City) (Zip Code) (Contact Person) Susan Schlink/ , 952 440 - 3779 '/ � {Phone} APPLICANT SIGNATURE .% L I � op DATE 7/18/13 APPLICANT PLEASE COMPLETE BELOW Quantity Type of Fixture Quantity Type of Fixture _ Bath Tub with or without shower Rough -ins Dishwasher _ Water Heater Floor Drain Water Softener 2 Lavatory (Bathroom Sink) j Stand Pipe (Washing Machine) - ;i Laundry Tray (1 or 2 compartment sink Sewage Ejector Shower Stall Backflow Assembly 1 Sinks _ Backflow Assembly Test Bar Sink Lawn Sprinkler L Water Closet (Toilet) Other FEE SCHEDULE Industrial, Commercial & Multi - family 1% of job cost with a $49.50 minimum Residential, New One & Two - Family $149.50 Residential, Additions & Alterations $49.50 The Minnesota Statutes $ 32613.148 " hst $ 4,814 Building Permit # "SURCHARGE" has been changed for one year effective PLUMBING PERMIT FEE $ July i, 2010, until June 30, 2011. STATE SURCHARGE $ .50 The minimum surcharge for a "fixed fee" permit TOTAL PERMIT FEE $ is IS beginning July 1, 2010 Thly A 1 / ; n : omen Your Building Permi h Approved Paid 3 - ) Rece. , No. G 9 , --- r rr tiosi■- fo S Date / B Building • „. I ate / 24 hour notice for all inspections (952) 447 -9850, fax (952) 447 -4245 4646 Dakota Street S.E., Prior Lake, Minnesota 55372 i 1 >•• CC 4 I-- CI, ET) got- 423 \ *4" \' ba 8 CD = CC :3 C 4 ZS C I . " 2 s ',Z.-% 1 "C: lai 75. as = Ct. ,j - - ..34 "---`1. a, ....t • 1:; .c 7 (2:.°,4 -,- --a # ...., I ki ..... .;. . A ,.. -..# .71— `N. tkco ' I-- 0 -- . ' 4 , ' Z1 . 0 12...i = C. .52, . „,,-' Se - C.3 CCS -cy ‘ = , ›. '''''''' ' 1 ...- .... - ...,.. ....e,*,-- ..), ■ / j ......._ .- 1'', a- et.... le M... 4 73 1 .- ..e.:1 ,r. 4 1 -.... Li. ' Lu ,.'• a) a) n c = *1.) 'c'''' *r. ...., ..- U. ‘ C*3 ) (ti*Ip ) * : ' 1...... •.t.- C - 1 = d cp C c .....= Tr: ) -51 kij Q jp co -001 V i Z . C75 <r) •0 E ''',...., ---- .... ..= 4.... '••■■ kRA t M . C:1 Ir.. 0 Clow • •'' II 'T .. .' 1 0 4 V. 1. ‘ —A #,„0 v: -. ) 1 117ig , ix. i -xi _ 1 -4 c, r• i,.... Ka. L ' . ' ----- ''.-)... —A. ig F I fa fe 0 , ‘ - ,6 I 4 , i 2. on r 1 4., a , Cti ...) —r 4). 4.1 E 0 I E 11 1 E 43- ,,, 6 r, 1 1 1 i .....4... , , v. .., . .. ,.., 2 , x 1 if 8 14 *I al p — . . li -1.• ° TT ) ' 1, IlrY , s. ''''' ...c *.---) ...• ' . rY cal --:‘ i# -- --- — -- 4 ,„.#. # 4 1 ” 11 111 1 . - CI O \ DD .. ,,,, _ ' `- .c- ,....„---, : .... --:. .... ....._ vi . , .. . y., r....4 . ---.. # V c ....... --... - ...., r . , 9.1 \ ) -- - „•,. \-z. S.. .......-. ---r- ,..W 4 i ......" .. ..-- , t,.. CS ■-.1 V C3..._ \ ... _ _ " .__-- 1--1- --.... ......_... 1 , e 4 4 2 V^ 7 CI •-••-• ',I V C , I 11.41 11 1- ,c 1 1. 5 1 1i / 114i loan__ - N ' ..,, , \ , .. ...,. '41 x , cc 43 — =4 , . a cr. , • m a) 3 0- 0 .. al, 4n ..€ a) 4-• • ..... cri ,.- --- cp 0 0 CZ Cr) -r 0 Lu a CO ay 76 Id . *". E a v 0 — a z rtvi ,., rt, -I- \,..... 11'4 ....„... t 1 1.■ " 1 ,. . -- -C 4 - ,-.••:',.' ..... ....... ...............,. \ , • - ... 0___ , ',-, - k. ..„ • N \ ( ,:i ki V" • 1 -4- -,..„,. 0 N \ 14- D --- 0 I-- IN- \ LL >•- CC I— cr) \ \s4 1 = ca. as a) LI– a) crg • ■ A CO = CD Lk...H . ....":... A 4 ....... -- i E 3 ( > 0 ci ) = - . - - . c LL1 CD .00 -CD = ". • — .p.„, L 1() fli A v ,.., , .. F, Q- (i (- 6 . v) (--. 110--0- r \ 6 * 2- • ) .... ... r 46 1 .„:1:4) r :-.. l• • — 1 ....,. : - 1,... 443 Lafayette Road N. DEPARTMENT OF (651) 284 -5005 1-800-DIAL-DLI vrww.dli.mn.gov T 1 Y St. Paul, Minnesota 55155 LA B OR TTY: (651) 297-4198 irk c;+-,1-4 J T)s' ^t ? / i� Division of Construction Codes and Licensing P°- /v s wr w 1t REPORT ON PLANS Plans and specification on plumbing: Friendship Baptist Church Remodel, 17741 Fairlawn Avenue, Prior Lake, Scott County, Minnesota, Plan No. PLB 1308 -00025 OWNERSHIP: Friendship Baptist Church, 17741 Fairlawn Avenue, Prior Lake, MN 55372 SL BMITTER(S): Clearwater Plumbing and Heating, 19260 Mushtown Road, Prior Lake, MN 55372 Plans Dated: Date Received: August 28, 2013, August 26, 2013, August 5, 2013 Date Reviewed: August 28, 2013 SCOPE: This review is limited to the design of this particular project only insofar as the provisions of the Minnesota Plumbing Code, as amended, apply, and does not cover the water supply or sewerage system to which this plumbing system is connected. The review is based upon the supposition that the data on which the design is based are correct, and that necessary legal authority has been obtained to construct the project. The responsibility for the design of structural features and the efficiency of equipment must be taken by the project designer. Approval is contingent upon satisfactory disposition of any requirements included in this report. Special care should be taken to insure that the material and installation of the plumbing system are in accordance with the pro visions of the Minnesota Plumbing Code. A copy of the approved plans, specifications, and this Report on Plans must be retained at the project location for future reference. INSPECTIONS: All plumbing installations must be tested and inspected in accordance with the requirements of the Minnesota Plumbing Code. As specified in Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2830, no plumbing work may be covered prior to completing the required tests and inspections. Provisions must be made for applying an air test at the time of the roughing -in inspection as outlined in Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2820, subpart 2, of the code. A manometer test, as specified in Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2820, subpart 3, is required at the time of the finished plumbing inspection. It is the responsibility of the contractor /installer to notify the Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry when an installation for a state contract job, Minnesota Department of Health licensed healthcare facility, or project in an area where there is no local administrative authority is ready for an inspection and test. To schedule inspections, contact the state plumbing standards representative for your region. For your regional inspector's contact information, visit our website at http: / /www.dli .mn.gov /CCLD /CCLDContactus.asp REQUIREMENT(S): 1. All plumbing shall be installed in accordance with the Minnesota Plumbing Code (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.0320). 2. Verify that the existing water supply and waste systems are sized to accommodate the added fixtures (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.3800 and part 4715.2310). 3. Changes in direction in drainage piping must be made by appropriate use of wyes and bends. Sanitary tees are not allowed where the direction of flow changes from either vertical to horizontal or horizontal to horizontal (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2410). This information can be provided to you in altemative formats (Braille, large print or audio). An Equal Opportunity Employer Friendship Baptist Church Remodel Plumbing Plan No. PLB1308 -00025 Page 2 August 28, 2013 4. Verify that every sanitary building sewer is provided with a full -size vent stack (3 -inch minimum) that is continuous in size from its base to its terminal (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2520, subpart 1). 5. The plans indicate that the lavatory and the laundry tub will be common vented with connections at different elevations in the vertical drain. A common vent may serve two fixtures on the same floor connecting at different levels in the vertical drain, provided the vertical drain is one size larger than the upper fixture drain, but not smaller than the lower fixture drain, whichever is larger (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2580, subpart 2). 6. Verify that the developed length between the trap of the water closet and its vent does not exceed four feet (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2620). 7. The water closet is located in a public restroom and it must have an elongated bowl with an open -front seat (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.1420). The maximum water volume per flush of a floor - mounted water closet shall be 1.6 gallons. Water closets shall comply with ANSI/ASME Standard A112.19.2 (see Minnesota Statutes, Section 326B.43, subd. 4). 8. Valves shall be installed permitting the water supply to each room or individual fixture /equipment to be shut off without disrupting any other room or portion of the building (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.1800, subpart 6). 9. Faucets with hose thread outlets must be provided with approved backflow preventers (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2110, DD). This includes the laundry tub faucet. Field- installed vacuum breakers must meet ASSE 1052. 10. The water supply line to the automatic clothes washer must be protected against backflow by the use of an air gap or approved vacuum breaker (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.1230). 11. The horizontal distance between cleanouts may not exceed 50 feet for pipe 3 inches or less in size, and not over 100 feet for pipe 4 inches and greater in size (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.1010). 12. It is recommended that a cleanout be provided where new waste and vent piping connects with existing plumbing to facilitate required testing of the new installation. 13. A cleanout shall be provided on a common vertical fixture drain or common vent serving two fixture traps that connect to a vertical drain at the same level. The cleanout shall be the same nominal pipe size as the drain serving the fixtures. Where the vertical fixture drain is accessible through the trap opening, the cleanout may be eliminated (see Minnesota Rules, part 4715.1000). 14. Cross -link polyethylene (PEX) tubing must meet Minnesota Rules, part 4715.0520: a. The tubing system must comply with ASTM F877 and F876. b. When installed as a system in accordance with ASTM F877, the system tubing and fittings must be of the same manufacturer and be marked as required. c. When not installed as a system, the fittings must be marked with ASTM F1807, F1960, F2080, F2098 -01, or F2159. The tubing must list the fitting and tubing standard. d. Installers must be factory trained and possess a card documenting completion of training. Fri endship Baptist Church Remodel Plumbing Plan No. PLB1308 -00025 Page 3 August 28, 2013 15.. Plastic pipe must be installed in accordance with Minnesota Rules, part 4715.0570 through part 4715.0600. Above -grade horizontal runs cannot exceed 35 feet in total length. Stacks may exceed 35 feet in total height with an approved expansion joint. 16. The water distribution system shall be disinfected per Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2250. 17. The plumbing system shall be tested in accordance with Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2820. NOTES: 1. The scope of this project consists of a church remodel. The plumbing includes a water closet, a lavatory, a clothes washer, a laundry tub, and a coffee sink. The fixtures connect to the existing sanitary sewer and to the existing water distribution system. 2. This facility is served by an existing septic system and an existing well. 3. The submitted plans show that this facility will be served by an existing individual sewage treatment system. Please review the sewage treatment system plans with the appropriate local jurisdiction to ensure that the existing system is sized to accommodate the added fixtures and verify compliance with Minnesota Rules, Chapter 7080. 4. The plans and specifications were prepared by a licensed plumber. Only the plumber who has prepared the plans may use the plans for construction. If another plumber is contracted to install the plumbing, they must submit their own plans and specifications for the project. Authorization for construction in accordance with the approved plans may be withdrawn if construction is not undertaken within a period of two years. The fact that the plans have been approved does not necessarily mean that recommendations or requirements for change will not be made at some later time when changed conditions, additional information, or advanced knowledge make improvements necessary. Approved: Scott Sawyer, P.E. Public Health Engineer Plumbing Plan Review and Inspections Unit 651/284 -5803 cc: Clearwater Plumbing and Heating (via email) Friendship Baptist Church City of Prior Lake Building Official 1 File Bob Hutchins From: Bob Hutchins Sent: Monday, June 24, 2013 2:35 PM To: 'ewinter @station19.com' Subject: Friendship Church plan review. Eric The :Following are plan review comments for the Friendship Church project: J1. Two exits required from rooms 008 and 007. International Building Code (IBC) 1005.1 states "Multiple means of egress shall be sized such that the loss of any one means of egress shall not reduce the available capacity to less than 50% of the required capacity." Assign an egress width to a second exit in each room. p. Indicate the lower level is sprinklered. 'i3. Indicate panic hardware where latched doors are provided in new rooms. 15 Slit. A2 note #6: Provide specifications of intumescent paint. . Is future coffee counter sink accessible to the general public or is it a private station? If for the general public, sink must be ADA compliant. 6. Mechanical: Sht M10: prove O.A.. provide by FC -4 and FC -5 provide 5cfm per occupant in two new rooms. See ASHRAE Addendum n to 62 -2001. Plan review based on plans dated April 18, 2013. Please call with any questions. 0 r +r" i ` Robert D. Hutchins Building Official City of Prior Lake 4646 Dakota Street SE Prior Lake, MN 55372 952.447.9851 Fax 952.440.4263 City Email Updates. Sign up now. r - -a r- -�� ,�i .T= i ce' = '�� u 1 Bob Hutchins From: Schmitt, Pete <PSchmitt @co.scott.mn.us> Sent: Wednesday, May 29, 2013 3:20 PM To: Bob Hutchins Subject: Friendship Baptist Church Hi Bob, Conrad Anderson came in today with some plans for the church. Since there was not going to be any horizontal expansion, the only issue was an increase in occupancy (and potential water usage). The plans showed changes in two rooms, with the occupancy increasing by 49 total (one room from 79 to 83, the other from 79 to 124). He said for the kitchen, they usually just heat things up, and there is not much cooking going on. Ditto for grease, but did have some sink device to collect grease. In my notes I wrote we would not require a compliance inspection "because they are well under 1500 occupants which the septic was designed for, no horizontal expansion, limited kitchen usage, plus plans for major renovation in 3 -4 years at which time a CI likely would be required, and possible requirement to connect to city sewer. " Based on that information, the County would not require a compliance inspection. If you hear something different, please let me know. Pete Peter M. 'chmitt Scott County Community Services Environri rental Health & Inspections Dept 200 4th Ave W Shakopee MN 55379 (952) 496 -3352 direct (952) 496 -8496 fax pschmittPco.scott. mn.us ENGINEERING, INC. 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, MN 55429 763 -585 -6742 main 763 - 585 -6757 fax Email: Steen @steeneng.com June 27, 2013 REQUEST NO. 1 TO PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR: FRIENDSHIP CHURCH PRIOR LAKE, MN STEEN #SNA201301 The following additions, deletions, corrections or clarifications are hereby made to the original plans and specifications, issued April 18, 2013 and become part of these Construction Documents. Items herein take precedence over items in the plans and specifications, which they modify or supplement. DRAWINGS M5 — Issued (attached). 1. Added transfer grilles as shown on M5 (attached). M6 — Issued (attached). 1. Added specific note 14 as shown on M6 (attached). M10 — Issued (attached). 1. Revised Fan Coil Unit schedule as shown on MW (attached). END OF REQUEST NO. 1 Designing Sensible Cost Fective Solutions LsTrE4-- Rce„ c6. L 9‘,9 64„, 5 . ._ _ ...... - • , ' . . _ . .., . '' . .. , . . .. ,. -. - , , .„ „ . . . ,._ . . , . . ...... , .., ... _ _ . .. .. _, , , .. . . . . - - . . , . . , - , - . -. - _ - . . , .- . . . . ., ; ', , , . . '' . .,.. - „ -_. , , _ . . .... _,..„-, , - .... - - „ . , . . . . ,„ ' . ... , - „_. . . „ ., _ ... . _-_, . -, . . . . . . , . . .,,„ . , , , , .. „. . , . , , . , , , • ' ' ' ' .. - . - - „ .... . -.. . . .- _ ' ' ' ' ' ' " " ' ' "' , ., _ . „ , . , .„ . , . ,.... _ , .., . . . . _ . .... . - , .. , , . - -. , . ... - . .-. -... . . . , . - ., . . , .._ . , . .. ,. _ . , , . - , . -..„ . .. . ...,-. . .. . . „. .. . , ,--- „ . _, , , . . . . - . - • „ . . . . , , . , . . . , „ . . „ , . . . . - . . _ . -„, _ - , _ . . - . - . ._ . . - . „ . . . ,. . ' '' . " ' ' . ._, . . . . , , . . _ , . . . ,. , . . . . -- _ . , , . . . . _ . . .. _ - _ . . . . . . . , . - . . _ , . . . - . , __. .. . , , .. . . .._ ., _... ._ .. „ . , ._ , '' _ • ' -'' . _ WA 49Plit ____.th,__r-(' .4.1 .64.„----47' . 1I irii' ' t -T" cTs-8w ',O A a «s - 1 i,>' Aa ` r _ , : - 06' 171-(A-M" r"/** _ /5 ,U- ucwe-72. se) A61-. >> 20 EP A, // Av /0©5 f(� Spa E - F>,ar� /_: A ,,� SONY fro,..._ /s Drtz� ,�. 1 . 0 "1-1.-c- AAA- ( 1 .( . 1 - r i..V , , 4 ,/,7 , _ , _ . , _ / 1 41' IA- ©7 7 (-11 -c-Z- S - Pa 6 ' z-4- 4-z, ---_- ter f = Zz_ k-2 4 • / / r , & ' r 5 . 5 4 4 - 4 - - - r = zq(73 1f 9 = f ©© 3? ( 4 • 8 ' - 31.11,-&" �. Li A ,..,e- %s►'!i / _ ( a l,,90 H oc p - o 5/p5,040,0/404K-6t- 6 t`444-4 Ae/C I (6 eq () ok,ua--__ q • kcA _ AS3 4ir mo LiZ /(( sow . - - 1 74 G o S1 2® Z ^ 2- - 40, Z5p, 3P1P ( 26 6 `r o s Are lzge. I -s' Cc9c ©,q-. )6•1\ O • 0. • • • 6 . . • • • STATION NINETEEN isf ARCHITECTS, INC. 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE S.E. SUITE 100 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55414 612.623.1800 FAX 612.623.0012 REQUEST # 1 - CITY REVISION DATE: JUNE 27, 2013 PROJECT: FRIENDSHIP CHURCH FROM: STATION 19 ARCHITECTS, INC. PROJ. #: 4428 SEND TO: VIA: CITY 1. CITY OF PRIOR LAKE X EMAIL 4646 DAKOTA STREET SE PRIOR LAKE, MN 55372 Contact: Robert Hutchins MAIL GENERAL 2. CLA CONSTRUCTION X EMAIL CONTRACTOR 6451 E 190 ST PRIOR LAKE, MN 55372 Contact: Conrad Anderson MAIL This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. ASI The work shall be carried out in accordance with the following Supplemental Instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgement that there will be no change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. X PR Please submit an itemized Proposal for Changes in the Contract Sum and Contract Time for the proposed modifications to the Contract Documents described herein. This is not a Change Order, Change Directive, or a Direction to Proceed with the work described in the proposed modification. CCD You are hereby directed to make the following change(s) in this Contract. Signature by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement with the proposed adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time set forth in this Construction Change Directive. When signed by the Owner and Architect and received by the Contractor, this document becomes effective IMMEDIATELY as a Construction Change Directive (CCD), and the Contractor shall proceed with the change(s) described below. DESCRIPTION: Corrected egress numbers, added notation that lower level is sprinklered, noted panic hardware on existing doors, coffee counter sink made ADA compliant, specification for intumescent paint, mechanical equipment including transfer grilles. Attached: A2 - LOWER LEVEL CODE & FLOOR PLAN A3 - MAIN LEVEL CODE & FLOOR PLAN A6 — BUILDING SECTIONS & WALL TYPES A10 — MILLWORK DETAILS SECTION 07 8123 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING STEEN ENGINEERING REQUEST #1 - END REQUEST — The following is based on information provided by the Contractor. CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM OF: CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME OF: To expedite work, you may sign and date this document below. By signing, you are agreeing to the pricing and other terms as described in this document. This document will serve as a written change ISSUED BY: STATION 19 ARCHITECTS, INC. ACCEPTED BY: CLA CONSTRUCTION ARCHITECT'S REPRESENTATIVE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE DATE AUTHORIZED BY: FRIENDSHIP CHURCH OWNER'S DATE RI:= PRESENTATIVE Issue 6.26.13 SECTION 07 8123 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thin -film intumescent fire - resistive coatings for exposed structural steel. B. Protective and /or decorative topcoats. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field- applied paints matching intumescent fireproofing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -- Durometer Hardness; 2005 (Reapproved 2010). B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. C. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2012. D. SSPC -PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Performancecharacteristics and test results. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. C. Test Reports: Published fire - resistive designs for structural elements of the types required for the project, indicating hourly ratings of each assembly. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company that specializes in manufacturing the type of products specified, with minimum of 10 years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Approved, certified, or supervised by manufacturerof intumescent fireproofing, with not less than 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with identification labels and testing agency markings intact and legible. B. Store products in manufacturer'sunopened packaging until ready for installation. 1. Store at temperatures not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) in dry, protected area. 2. Protect from freezing, and do not store in direct sunlight. 3. Dispose of any materials that have come into contact with contaminants of any kind prior to application. C. Dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS PXX / 4428 Friendship Church 07 8123 - 1 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING Issue 6.26.13 A. Protect areas of application from windblown dust and rain. B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommendedby manufacturerfor optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer'sabsolute limits. 1. Provide temporary enclosures as required to control environmental conditions. 2. Do not apply intumescent fireproofing when ambient temperatures are below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) without specific approval from manufacturer. 3. Maintain relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent in areas of application. 4. Maintain ventilation in enclosed spaces during application and for not less than 72 hours afterward. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Intumescent Fireproofing: 1. Albi Manufacturing Division of StanChem Inc: www.albi.com. 2. Carboline Company; : www.carboline.com. 3. Isolatek International; : www.isolatek.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Fireproofing: Provide intumescent thin -film fire - resistive coating systems tested by an independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM E119 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide assemblies listed by UL or FM. B. Structural Steel Columns: Fire resistance rating of 1 hour. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Fire - Resistive Coating System: Thin film intumescent coating system for the fire protection of structural steel. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84: a. Flame Spread Index: 25, maximum. b. Smoke Developed Index: 50, maximum. 2. For Interior Use: a. Use only water -based products. b. Hardness: _65_, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240, Type D durometer. B. Sealers and Primer: As required by tested and listed assemblies, and as recommendedby fireproofing manufacturerto suit specific substrate conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to receive intumescent fireproofing. Verify that they are clean and free of oil, grease, incompatible primers, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond to fireproofing system. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughlyclean surfaces to receive fireproofing. PXX / 4428 Friendship Church 07 8123 - 2 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING • Issue 6.26.13 B. Repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness of fireproofing system. Remove minor projections and fill voids that could telegraph through the finished work. C. Cover or otherwise protect other work that might be damaged by fallout or overspray of fireproofing system. Provide temporary enclosures as necessary to confine operations and maintain required environmental conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Complywith manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. B. Apply manufacturer's recommendedprimer to required coating thickness. C. Apply fireproofing to full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Apply coats at manufacturer's recommendedrate to achieve dry film thickness required for fire resistance ratings designated for each condition. D. Apply intumescent fireproofing by spraying to maximum extent possible. If necessary, complete coverage by roller application or other method acceptable to manufacturer. E. Achieve uniform finished appearancecomplying with approved mock -up. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. 1. Arrange for testing of installed intumescent fireproofing by an independent testing laboratory using magnetic thickness gage, in accordance with SSPC -PA2. 2. Submit test reports promptly to Contractor and Architect. B. Repair or replace fireproofing at locations where test results indicate fireproofing does not meet specified requirements. 3.05 CLEANING A. Immediately after installation of fireproofing in each area, remove overspray and fallout from other surfaces and clean soiled areas. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed intumescent fireproofing from damage due to subsequent construction activities, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION PXX / 4428 Friendship Church 07 8123 - 3 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 26 00 20 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SECTION 26 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 26 05 10 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SECTION 26 05 19.10 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 05 33.10 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS SECTION 26 05 33.11 OUTLET BOXES SECTION 26 05 33.12 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES SECTION 26 05 35 RACEWAY SYSTEMS SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROLS SECTION 26 27 23 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES SECTION 26 51 00 LIGHTING SECTION 26 51 10 LIGHTING REBATES • 081612 SNA201301 CD ELECTRICAL INDEX - 1 04/18/13 SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Electrical Division. B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Electrical Division work. No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits. C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers. D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the Architect/Engineer. E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Electrical Division and prior to final close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100% complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at final inspection shall be immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer. F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be directly credited to the Owner. 1.2 ELECTRICAL PLANS A. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the electrical work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other. Any item shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be considered as shown and specified on both. B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to the Engineer's attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and operational electrical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these Specifications. C. Drawings: 1. Contractor shall familiarize themselves with Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred spaces, suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc. 2. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all conduit and wire within soffits provided by the General Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically approved by the Architect and Engineer. 3. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate location only. Placement of electrical equipment and devices shall not interfere with locations or clearances of other trades' materials or equipment. 4. Contractor shall verify locations with architectural elevations. 5. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in the field. 6. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit within the available space. 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 1 04/18/13 7. Notify the Architect or Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical, Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. 8. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before installing any electrical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with other trades work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows: 1. Contractor: Shall mean Electrical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Electrical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with Contract Documents and deliver to site in a new, undamaged condition. 4. Connect: Shall mean to bring electrical service and/or control wiring to equipment, make all fmal connections, provide all necessary miscellaneous materials required and do fmal check out to ensure proper equipment connections. 5. Install: Shall mean to store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, connect, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating condition. 6. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install. E. CAD and Drawing Files: 1. Electrical CAD drawings prepared by Steen Engineering, Inc. for this Project are instruments of Steen Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this Project. During the course of the implementation of the Project, and with Steen Engineering, Inc. approval, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the preparation of Shop Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other projects, for additions to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others. Any revisions, additions and/or deletions to these CAD drawings, either intentional or unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of the person(s) making such revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s) shall hold harmless and indemnify Steen Engineering, Inc. of any and all responsibilities and liabilities. 2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be requested directly from the Architect. 13 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS A. For typical or repetetive HVAC unit installations, Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with Mechanical Contractor to schedule an inspection with local and/or state AHJ to review a complete mock -up example installation and receive approval prior to proceeding with additional installations. Installation shall meet all code and manufacturer's service clearance requirements. Contractor shall coordinate installation and subsequent inspection with general contractor and any related trades. B. Contractor shall submit '/ -inch scale drawing to the Engineer indicating placement of all mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. Indicate proposed locations of all major equipment and materials, including but not limited to service equipment, exterior wall and foundation penetrations, fire-rated wall and floor penetrations, sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases, and mechanical/electrical equipment room layouts. This effort will require each trade to closely work together to produce a % -inch set of coordination drawings for each area of the building. C. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work. D. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials: 1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein. 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 2 04/18/13 2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail. 3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the complete electrical installation. 4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, Contractor shall provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade practice. 5. Supply materials and equipment to the site m original packages, containers or crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule deliveries with other Contractors and the Engineer. 6. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage and protection from the elements for all materials and equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by Contractor as required by Engineer. 7. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior to final inspection and contract close out. 8. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type of material. Equipment shall be UL listed and labeled as an entire assembly or system. B. Prior Approvals: 1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details of the Specifications. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the use of substituted products and equipment, including additional labor and materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Within fifteen days after the award of the Contract, the Electrical Contractor shall submit shop drawings on all major electrical equipment to the Architect for approval. Shop Drawings shall be submitted by the Electrical Contractor, not their Subcontractors. These shop drawings shall cover such items as lighting fixtures, lamps, disconnects, fuses, starters, MCC sections, switchgear, devices, plates, panels, contactors, etc. The Contractor shall thoroughly review each item for compliance with these Specifications making any necessary corrections prior to submittal. Each shop drawing set shall be stamped, signed and dated indicating Contractor review. If the Contractor fails to properly review shop drawings, the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer for all additional reviews on a time and material basis. No equipment shall be released for shipment or installed prior to final approval by the Engineer. B. The Engineer will review all Shop Drawings submitted and will retain one copy for record file. C. Approval Stamp: This review is to verify general conformance with the design concept of the Project and substantial compliance with the information provided in the Contract Documents. This review does not in any way relieve the Contractor or their suppliers of their responsibility to provide all materials and equipment as specified, in quantities, quality and dimensions required. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 3 04/18/13 1. "No Exception Taken" indicates that the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. 2. "Make Noted Corrections" indicates that the Submittal, after noted corrections are made, appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without and increase in Contract Sum or Time. 3. "Revised and Resubmit" indicates that the noted revisions are such that a corrected copy of the Submittal is required for review to confirm that the noted revisions have been understood and made. The Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation after submitting a corrected copy and verifying with the reviewer that the corrected copy is acceptable, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in the Contract Sum or Time. 4. "Rejected" indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, a resubmission is required and fabrication or procurement is not authorized. D. If the Engineer rejects (Revised and Resubmit or Rejected) the same section two times the engineer shall be compensated for additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and will be deducted from the Contractor's application for payment. Contractor is responsible for all delays caused by the resubmittal process. E. Provide samples of materials or equipment proposed to be furnished, if requested. Samples shall become the . property of the Architect/Engineer and will be returned only when accompanied by a written request to do so. F. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain an "As Built" set of bluelines on site, neatly notating routing, location or other field changes to the Contract Documents. Upon Project completion and prior to fmal close out, turn the "As Built" drawings over to the Owner. Provide a detailed transmittal indicating each sheet and other information turned over to the Owner and acquire their representative's signature. This information shall be included at the project close out. 1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality workmanship will be accepted. B. The Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all Contractor generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner any interruptions necessary to existing systems prior shut down. D. Coordination: 1. Contractor shall give careful consideration to work of other Contractors on the Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor's ''A" coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other trades. 2. The Electrical Contractor shall thoroughly review installation manuals for each piece of equipment requiring power control connections. Obtain instruction manuals from the Mechanical Contractor, Plumbing Contractor or Owner prior to roughing in any feeders or control wiring. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies between the electrical plans and specifications and the equipment installation manuals prior to any installation. If for any reason this Contractor fails to do so, any and all costs necessary to correct discrepancies will be borne by the Electrical Contractor. 3. Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications that apply for correlating information. 4. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation. 5. Should the Electrical Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that interferes with work of other Contractors, the Electrical Contractor shall make all necessary changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or conflict at the Electrical Contractor's expense. 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 4 04/18/13 E. Protection of Equipment: 1. Until final acceptance of the work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for the safety, good condition, and protection from damage of all materials and equipment installed. 2. If, during shipment or installation, the fmish of equipment becomes chipped or scratched, the Contractor shall touch up or refmish surfaces to match original finish. 3. Switchboards, panelboards, transformers, bus ducts, motor starters and other electrical components stored or installed on -site shall be covered with plywood and polyethylene or an equivalent to protect them from any damage due to site conditions or from work by other trades. F. The Contractor shall complete all safety forms required by General Contractor. G. Live Work: All electrical equipment shall be de- energized prior to any work being performed. If it is necessary to work on any equipment live due to job conditions, precautions shall be taken to protect authorized personnel from accidentally coming in contact with live parts. Contractor shall have adequate personnel on site along with a back up plan to recover from an unscheduled outage. 1.7 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State where the project is being constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required for each type of work covered under these drawings and specifications. B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for the permanent services. C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national, state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. Following is a partial list of governing codes and/or standards: 1. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 3. State and Local Building Codes 4. State Board of Health 5. State Industrial Commission 6. State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations 7. National Electric Code 8. State and Local Electrical Installation Codes 9. Local Power Company Regulations and Requirements D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Electrical Contractor to meet all state and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of fmal inspection and approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O &M) manuals to the Owner prior to fmal close out. O &M manuals shall consist of approved shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment. O &M manuals shall be neatly bound in a 3 -ring binders, contain an index and section tabs and be labeled with the Project name. B. Name, address, and telephone number of each Contractor installing equipment and systems, local representative for each item of equipment and each system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications with the Section tab sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation and maintenance instructions. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in appropriate section. 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 5 04/18/13 1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of electrical equipment prior to final close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense to Owner, services of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, operation, and maintenance of all electrical systems provided by this Contractor to Owner's permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to Owner for regular operation. B. The Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of five days instruction period for Owner's personnel. . C. Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill - timed operation or testing shall be repaired, at Contractor's expense, before fmal inspection and acceptance. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of defects that may develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of fmal completion of the Project or for as long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are in effect from the date of Owner acceptance of the Project, whichever is later. B. During the warranty period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone conversation of a problem with any electrical system, shall cause the Contractor to respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. • C. The Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency. 1.11 TEMPORARY POWER A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary power and lighting to allow other Contractors and Subcontractors to perform their work. Prior to submitting a bid for this Project, contact the General Contractor to determine the type of equipment to be used in the performance of the work. The Electrical Bid shall include all labor and materials required to provide and maintain a complete temporary power and lighting system throughout the course of the project. Part 2. - PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION N/A END OF SECTION 081512 SNA201301 CD 260010 -6 04/18/13 SECTION 26 00 20 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all existing electrical systems and related equipment under this contract are in proper working order, and notify Owner and Engineer of any problems before beginning any new work. B. Contractor shall verify the condition and functionality of existing systems to which connections will be made, make the connections, and test. Coordinate with the General Contractor for any repairing, fmishing and patching work required to complete the new systems. Contractor shall leave the electrical system being disconnected in such condition as to allow for an easy, fast and clean reconnection of any new electrical systems. C. Equipment and materials being removed shall remain the property of the Owner. The Owner shall indicate which items, if any, are to be retained. Items to be salvaged and retained shall be removed, salvaged, cleaned and placed in a storage area designated by the Owner. All other material and equipment not wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly. D. Accomplish all demolition using only electricians skilled in the trade. If necessary, subcontract the work to meet this standard. If subcontracting is required, schedule the work to avoid delays or interruptions. E. Schedule work in cooperation with the Owner's representatives to avoid disturbance or interruptions of the Owner's services and functions. Provide off -hours work or phasing of the project to meet this requirement. F. The Engineer has performed a field survey to ascertain existing site conditions. This survey was visual only and no attempt was made to verify exact conduit routing above ceilings or in walls. The Contractor shall thoroughly review demolition and construction Drawings and Specifications and be fully aware of design intent. Additional work required due to deviations found after ceilings and walls are opened up shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Contractor shall notify Engineer immediately upon discovering any electrical equipment not shown on the Drawings that result in site conflicts. H. Telephone, television and fire alarm systems, etc. shall remain in full operating condition during the entire construction period. Should any portion of any system require relocation or demolition, this Contractor shall schedule the work with the Owner and system representative 48 hours prior to performing the actual work. I. Existing wiring and equipment: 1. All existing wiring, fixtures and equipment shall remain as is, except where removal is called for on the Drawings and/or in the Specifications or made necessary by the alterations to the building as part of this contract. 2. All conduit and wiring uncovered by other contractors within the existing building walls, floors or structure shall be replaced or rerouted as necessary to complete the remodeling (i.e., where the General Contractor removes a wall or floor, or cuts an opening into a wall or floor, any conduit uncovered shall be rerouted by the Electrical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner). Wherever it is necessary to withdraw conductors from existing raceways, new conductors shall be installed. 3. All existing work altered during the course of remodeling shall be placed in safe operating condition, shall remain in service unless otherwise noted, and shall be restored to satisfactory operating condition. Part 2. — PRODUCTS N/A 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 00 20 - 1 04/18/13 Part 3. — EXECUTION 3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Carefully handle all fixtures and devices being removed. Properly store items scheduled for reinstallation. If the Contractor fails to properly protect items scheduled for reuse, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish new items, equal to the existing, at no cost to the Owner. B. Contractor shall properly dispose of all lamps and all fixture ballasts not reused in new construction. Remove all lamps and ballasts from the site and dispose with a state certified disposal facility. C. Where branch circuit or feeder conduits are stubbed out of a column or slab and will not be reused, cut back to a point below the finished surface and patch to match existing. D. Daily clean all work areas to minimize dirt and dust in the facility. E. Wherever an existing device is removed, Contractor shall provide conduit and wiring as required to maintain service to all remaining devices. F. Wherever switches, receptacles, lighting fixtures and other electrical components are removed from boxes that remain in walls or ceilings, provide blank coverplates as required. Where clocks or speakers are removed, provide coverplates as required to cover entire opening. G. Wherever existing panels are modified, provide revised typed directories, identifying all circuits with clear plastic cover mounted in card holder. Room numbers or names used for circuit identification shall correspond to nameplates installed on room doors by General Contractor or as selected by Owner. If panel does not have a panel identification, provide a label per Section 26 24 16.10. END OF SECTION 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 00 20 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 26 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless noted otherwise in this Specification or on the Drawings, all materials shall be new and in their original packages. All materials shall comply with this Specification and at a minimum all applicable codes and standards as listed in Section 26 00 10. B. Nameplates shall identify equipment by name and source of power. They shall be a minimum of 1 1/4" x 3 ", or larger if necessary for wording. Lettering shall be a minimum of 3/16" in height. C. Any cutting and patching required in walls, floors, ceilings or partitions for the installation of electrical systems shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor. All cutting and patching shall be done with the prior approval of the Architect/ Engineer. Patching to match existing fmishes shall be performed by the proper trades such as concrete fmishers, sheetrockers, tapers, painters etc. at the expense of the Electrical Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying locations of such things as piping, ductwork, equipment, door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, etc., prior to the installation of all electrical equipment. Installed electrical work that interferes with the work of other trades shall be relocated by the Electrical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Contractor shall paint all exposed electrical equipment, such as conduit/raceway, meter sockets and panels, to match adjacent finishes. Refer to Architectural Specifications for method to be used. F. Switched receptacles, where shown, shall be modified and connected so that only the upper portion is switched. G. Receptacles and outlets located on opposite sides of a common wall shall not be mounted in the same stud space. At least one stud shall separate devices. Where this requirement is not practical, such as in back to back floor plans where devices must be back to back, the use of 3M MPP -4S moldable Puddy Pad shall be used in sufficient thickness to match the hour rating of the wall. H. All switches, receptacles and outlets installed within rated assemblies shall be firestopped to maintain rating of assemblies. I. Circuit numbers shown are for reference only within noted panel. Contractor shall neatly identify correct circuit numbers on the as-built drawings. J. Where required, the Contractor shall provide GFI devices or GFI breakers per the NEC. Part 2. - PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Identify all pull and junction boxes with circuit or feeder numbers and source of power using black magic marker. B. Each panelboard shall be provided with a typed circuit directory. Clearly describe loads and areas served. Room names or Owner's room numbers shall be used. Handwritten directories will not be accepted. 120911 SNA201301 CD 26 00 50 - 1 04/18/13 C. The Contractor shall perform saw cutting, trenching, backfilling, compaction and patching required for underground raceway systems shown or specified. D. Contractor shall verify the location of all fixtures and devices with the Architect prior to installation. E. Provide access panels where j -boxes or pull boxes are installed in inaccessible locations. All access panels shall be approved by the Engineer and Architect prior to installation. F. All receptacles and outlets located in block walls shall be mounted so that only one block is cut. G. Contractor shall submit all fire stopping methods to the local authorities for approval. Provide copies of all approved fire stopping methods to the Engineer. All fire stopping shall be reviewed and approved by Local Authorities prior to installation. H. Seal all penetrations and sleeves through floors and fire walls with a high temperature, fire rated sealant. Fire stop material shall be Chase Technology CTCPR -855 fire stop, 3M brand Fire Barrier Penetration System or Nelson Flameseal System. END OF SECTION 120911 SNA201301 CD 260050 -2 04/18113 SECTION 26 05 10 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide circuits, including final connections unless noted otherwise, to each item of electrically powered equipment wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS N/A 13 CONNECTIONS A. Connect all equipment per instruction manuals provided by the Mechanical Contractor, Plumbing Contractor or Owner as specified in Section 26 00 10. B. Connect all equipment as indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule and as specified in Section 26 24 19. C. Do not scale Electrical Drawings for rough -in dimensions. Part 2. - PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION N/A END OF SECTION 092712 SNA201301 CD 26 05 10 - 1 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 19.10 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide and connect 600 volt and below wire and cable. B. Wiring Sizing: Wire sizes indicated on Drawings are for copper conductors. Conductor sizes are specified by American Wire Gage (AWG) numbers, except where conductor cross sections in MCM is indicated. Unless noted otherwise conductors smaller than 12 AWG shall not be used for branch circuits. C. In Conduit: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, electric system conductors shall be installed in conduit. Conduit fill requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) shall not be exceeded. D. MC Cable: MC Cable may be used where permitted by Code. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): Devices shall be in accordance with Section 26 00 10. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 00 10. 1.4 CONDUCTORS FOR COMMUNICATION AND OTHER SYSTEMS A. General Requirements: Refer to specific communication system Sections for conductor requirements. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All wire and cable and accessories shall be as follows: 1. Building Wire /Cable: Recognized manufactures of electrical building wire. 2. Plastic Tape: AMP, Eagle or 3M. 3. Spring Wire Connectors: Heyco, Ideal, 3M or T &B. 4. Split -Bolt Connectors: Burndy, O- Z/Gedney, Square D, or T &B. 5. Solderless Crimp Pressure Connectors: Burndy, Ideal T &B or 3M. 6. Twist -on Wire Connectors: Buchanan, Ideal or 3M. 7. Vinyl Electric Insulation Tape: Permacel, Tomic or 3M. 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Copper Conductors: Conductors shall be soft, annealed 98% copper, electrically continuous and free from short circuits or grounds. B. Aluminum Conductors: Aluminum conductors shall not be used on this Project. 2.3 SOLID AND STRANDED A. General Requirements: 120511 SNA201301 CD 26 05 19.10 - 1 04/18/13 1. Wires shall be solid or stranded for sizes 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Wires shall be stranded for sizes 8 AWG and larger. 2.4 INSULATION A. Voltage Class: Insulation, unless otherwise noted, shall be 600 volt. B. Insulation Type: Conductor insulation shall be as follows: 1. Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuit Conductors: Type THHN/THWN with a temperature rating of 75 C. 2. Direct Burial Conductors: As noted on Drawings. Type USE or OF cross - linked polyethylene. C. Color Code: Wire and cable color shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. On larger cables, where factory color coding is not available, marking tape shall be used to identify each phase and neutral conductors. A minimum length of six inches shall be color coded at each end. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall match existing wiring systems. 2.5 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS A. Conductors 8 AWG and Smaller. Use solderless crimp or indent type pressure connectors with insulating • covers for copper wire splices and taps for 8 AWG. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps. Strictly comply with the number, size and combination of conductors as listed on manufacturer's packaging. B. Conductors 6 AWG and Larger. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape. 2.6 CONTROL WIRING A. General Requirements: 1. Control conductors shall be 14 AWG or larger. • 2. Conductors shall be sized large enough so that voltage drop under in -rush conditions will not adversely affect operation of the controls. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide 12 AWG or larger conductors for power and lighting circuits and no wire smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. 2. Provide 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit runs longer than 75 feet and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit runs longer than 150 feet. 3. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable. 4. Conductors shall be tested to be continuous and free from shorts and grounds. 5. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. 6. Conductor lengths for parallel circuits shall be equal. 7. Provide a minimum of twelve inches of slack conductor at each outlet. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. General Requirements: 120511 SNA201301 CD 26 05 19.10 - 2 04/18/13 1. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wires. 2. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3. Control and communication conductors shall be installed in separate, dedicated raceway systems. 3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. General Requirements: 1. Splices shall only occur in accessible junction boxes. Splices in conductors installed below grade are not permitted. 2. Wires shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to installing lugs and connectors. 3. Splices, taps and terminations shall be made to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. 4. Spare conductors shall be terminated with electrical tape. END OF SECTION 120511 SNA201301 CD 26 05 19.10 - 3 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 33.10 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide conduits wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 0010. • Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Conduit and Fittings: Galvanized steel by recognized manufacturers of conduit systems of type and sizes required. B. Non - Metallic Conduit: High impact PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) heavy wall, Schedule 40 rated for 90° C wire, Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed in accordance with Article 347 of the National Electric Code (NEC) for underground and exposed use. PVC conduit shall be Schedule 80 for under roadway or vehicle crossing area. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: All conduit shall be of one manufacturer as follows: 1. Alfex 2. Allied 3. Carlon 4. Republic 5. Sealtight 6. Triangle 7. VAW of America 8. Youngstown D. Acceptable Manufacturers: All conduit shall be of one manufacturer as follows: 1. Appleton 2. CH 3. Kellems 4. OZ Red Dot 5. T&B 2.2 CONDUITS A. Minimum Size: Conduit shall be sized according to the Drawings, with no conduit smaller than ' ',cinch trade size. If not sized on the Drawings, the NEC shall be used to determine the size based on the number and size of conductors required. The Engineer shall approve all calculated conduit sizes and method of installation prior to installation. B. Type: Conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel. In lieu of rigid galvanized steel the following conduits may be used only as specified herein: 1. Intermediate Steel Conduit may be used in all locations. 2. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): May be used in dry locations for wiring below 600 volts in all 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 1 04/18/13 interior spaces not in direct contact with earth or where exposed to weather using steel watertight compression fittings and backstraps. EMT shall not be installed in the following areas: a. Concrete slabs on grade or in soil. b. Unprotected within five feet of finished floor. c. Conduit drops in shop areas. d. Conduit stub -ups to equipment or machinery. e. Hazardous areas. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be permitted only in the following locations: a. Flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to equipment such as motors, fixed equipment, electric heating equipment, ect. Trade sizes 'A -inch through 1 '/ -inch shall be used in lengths no longer than twenty -four inches, 2- inches through 3- inches no longer than thirty-six inches, 3 ' /cinch through 4 -inch no longer than forty-eight inches. b. Fittings shall be steel set screw type for smaller sizes and steel clamp type for larger sizes. c. For light fixture connections, where conduit is concealed above ceilings, lengths shall not exceed six inches (318 -inch diameter size may be used above concealed ceilings to connect light fixtures). d. Concealed within equipment cabinets if approved by Architect/Engineer. 4. Rigid Non - Metallic Conduit: May be used only where run in soil or in concrete slabs on grade unless otherwise noted on Drawings or specified herein. a. Conduit entries into pole bases or concrete pads shall be rigid galvanized steel. Conduits emerging out of floor slab -on -grade shall be rigid galvanized steel. b. All non - metallic conduits shall have a grounding conductor sized in accordance with Table 250-95 of the NEC. Contractor shall increase conduit size to accommodate the grounding conductor. 5. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: May be used in lieu of rigid galvanized steel with approval of Engineer. 2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit: 1. Couplings, locknuts and bushings shall be threaded type. Threadless couplings shall not be used without prior approval of Engineer. 2. Locknuts shall be of the conduit type. 3. Bushings shall consist of an insulating insert molded or locked into metallic body fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or non - metallic material are not permitted. 4. Where conduit is installed in concrete, Erickson -type and set -screw couplings may be used to complete a conduit run. Set -screw fittings shall be approved for concrete installation and shall be case - hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly set in conduit wall for positive ground. 5. Threaded cast iron type sealing fittings shall be used. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be continuous drain type. Fittings in concealed work shall be installed in a flush steel box with blank coverplate having the same fmish as that of other electrical plates in room. B. EMT: 1. For conduit 2 -inch and smaller, fittings shall be concrete tight compression gland type only, with threaded outer nut or set -screw type. Fittings shall be malleable steel type, not cast. 2. For conduit over 2 -inch, connectors shall be set -screw type with two screws each and couplings shall be set -screw type with four screws each. Set - screws shall be case - hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly set in wall of conduit for positive ground. 3. Indent type connectors shall not be permitted. 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 2 04/18/13 4. Fittings made of pot metal Die cast or pressure -cast zinc alloy shall not be permitted. C. Flexible Metal: Multiple point type threading into internal wall of conduit convolutions or set -screw type. Material shall be only steel or malleable iron. D. Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal: Type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats. Material shall be only steel or malleable iron. E. Direct Burial Rigid Non - Metallic Conduit: Fittings as recommended by conduit manufacturer for bonding with solvent cement. Provide PVC -40 in all landscape areas and PVC -80 under all covered areas where vehicles travel. F. Expansion Fittings: Use expansion fittings in conduits installed in concrete slabs or in soil under slabs at the point where conduits cross expansion joints. Verify expansion joint locations with concrete installer. Expansion fittings shall be O.Z. Type AX for rigid conduit, O.Z. Gedney Type TX for EMT conduit and Carlon Type E945 for rigid non - metallic conduit. All rigid non - metallic conduits installed at a temperature of 25° F above or below the final conduit temperature, as well as all rigid non - metallic conduits installed in temperatures below 50° F, shall require expansion fittings. Where temperature conditions require the use of rigid non - metallic expansion fittings, provide one expansion fitting for each conduit run up to one - hundred feet long. Runs over one- hundred feet in length require one expansion fitting for each one - hundred feet or portion thereof. 2.4 FIRE STOPS A. General Requirements: Conduits and conduit sleeves that penetrate fire rated walls or partitions shall be sealed with Hevi- Duty/Nelson, Type CLK, non - sagging adhesive sealant. Basis of design is Hevi- Duty/Nelson, Type CLK. Additional approved manufactures are 3M and Specified Technologies Inc. All firestopping products shall be installed by experienced workers, familiar with the proper application and installation of appropriate U.L fire stopping design rating systems. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit fire stopping manufacturer's appropriate conduit and conduit sleeve penetration system design criteria and UL approved number for each type of UL fire stopping design rating system used on the project. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT A. General Requirements: 1. Conduits shall be concealed within floor, ceiling or wall building construction, unless specifically noted or otherwise specified. Conduits shall only be installed exposed in boiler rooms, mechanical rooms and electric rooms and for connections at motors and surface cabinets. 2. Conduit systems shall be complete with fittings and accessories to make system complete and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and to cabinets and junction boxes. Conduits shall form a neat appearing, mechanically firm assembly, adhering to NECA standards of installation and good electrical practice. Conduit ends shall be reamed before installation and shall be capped during construction period. Route exposed conduits and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping with elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. 3. Conduits shall not obstruct head room, walkways or doorways. 4. Conduits shall be secured to cabinets, junctions boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes by bonding type locknuts. Rigid and IMC conduit installations shall have a locknut on outside of enclosure and locknut and bushing on inside of enclosure. EMT installations may have a single locknut on inside of enclosure, wrench tight. Conduit connections shall not be made to junction box covers. 5. Provide a pull wire in empty conduits, consisting of one No. 12 steel or copper wire or heavy duty nylon cord for small conduits and nylon rope for large conduits. 6. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Conduit shall be 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 3 04/18/13 fastened using straps or clamps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers or bolted split galvanized hangers secured to structure with machine screws, expansion sleeves or lead anchors. Spring steel type supports or fasteners shall be permitted for concealed 1/2 -inch EMT only. Chain, wire or perforated straps shall not be used to support or fasten conduit. 7. Conduit support spacing shall be provided as required by the NEC, but in no case shall the maximum spacing of supports exceed six feet for conduits smaller than 1 -inch trade size and 10 feet for conduits f- inch trade size and larger. 8. Group conduits in parallel runs where practical using conduit racks constructed of steel channel with conduit straps /clamps or trapeze hangers with U -bolts or other approved fasteners. 9. Conduits that are direct buried in the same trench shall be group in parallel nuns where practical. The conduits shall be installed using racks or supports to maintain air separation between all conduits as per NEC at a minimum. 10. Fasteners shall be sized and designed for intended use. Fasteners, in solid masonry or concrete, shall be steel or malleable iron concrete inserts, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter steel expansion anchors embedded not less than 1 1/8- inches or 1/4 -inch minimum diameter power set fasteners with depth of penetration at least three inches. Hollow masonry anchors shall be toggle bolts, hollow wall fasteners, or concrete block anchors. Sheetmetal screws shall be used on metal studs and wood screws used on wood construction. Attachment by wood plugs or wood blocking is not permitted. 11. Support vertical conduit runs at each floor slab with approved hangers. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: All conduits shall be installed in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation: 1. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter, de -burr cut ends. 2. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. 3. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheetmetal boxes in damp or wet locations. 4. Install no more than equivalent of four 90- degree bends between boxes for power circuits and two 90- degree bends for low voltage and communications circuits. 5. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. Outdoor conduits shall be graded a minimum of six inches per one - hundred feet with no traps and shall be pitched to drain into manholes, pull boxes or suitable located drain tees. 6. Coordinate all conduits with other trades. Consult with Mechanical Contractor before installing conduits for electrical feeders so that conflicts between locations of conduit runs, piping, and ductwork will be adjusted prior to installation. In general, large pipe mains and air ducts shall be given priority in available space. Conduit runs shall be installed so as to maintain, wherever practical, a minimum separation of three inches from water and waste piping and six inches from steam piping. 7. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations. B. Conduits in Soil or Slabs on Grade: Metallic conduit shall have a factory coating of 20 mil bonded PVC or shall be field coated on outside with asphaltum before installation. Couplings and damaged areas of coating shall be completely coated after installation. Conduits shall be at least eight inches below bottom of slabs on grade. C. Conduits in Slabs Not On Grade: Conduits shall occupy the middle third when practical and have at least 1 1/4- inch concrete cover. Consult with the General Contractor to determine minimum allowable horizontal spacing between conduits to maintain structural integrity of floor slab. Conduits shall be tied to reinforcing rods to prevent movement or sagging during pour. D. Conduits in Concrete Joists and Columns: No conduits shall be run in steel reinforced concrete joists, beams or columns without approval of Architect/Engineer, except for conduit runs to switches and receptacles specifically shown in columns. E. Conduits in New Masonry Walls: Conduits shall be installed during wall construction or "fished in ". No conduit shall be channeled in without special permission of Architect. 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 4 04/18/13 F. Horizontal Runs in Walls: No conduit shall nm horizontally in concrete block or brick walls without approval of Architect/Engineer. Horizontal runs shall be made in floor or ceiling construction. G. Conduits on Equipment: Conduits shall not be mounted on ductwork, boilers, ventilation units or other such mechanical equipment, except where necessary to make connections to electrical devices that are part of or mounted on such equipment. Where conduits must be run on equipment, care shall be taken not to cover access doors, controls, removable panels, etc., or otherwise hinder the normal maintenance and repair of the equipment. H. Conduits Under Boilers: No conduit shall be run under boiler. I. Conduit Through Roofs: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket. J. Expansion Fittings: Install expansion fittings where conduits in concrete slabs or in soil under slabs cross building expansion joints. Conduits installed in suspended ceiling spaces shall have offsets or bends adjacent to building expansion joints. K. Conduits in Demountable Partitions: Conduit shall enter partitions from ceiling to facilitate future partition removal. No conduits shall enter from floors. A junction box shall be provided above ceiling at the point where conduit enters partition. L. Conduits Through Exterior Walls: Where conduit systems pass through exterior walls or footings below grade, entrance shall be made watertight by providing pipe sleeves in wall with 1/2 -inch minimum clearance around conduit and caulking with oakum or an approved non - hardening type caulking compound. Alternate acceptable method is by means of a conduit entrance seal, O.Z. /Gedney Company, Type "FSK" or as approved by Engineer. Seal conduit stubs as described above. In addition, inside of conduit shall be sealed watertight with an approved non - hardening low to no VOC emitting type caulking compound packed around wires. M. Conduits Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings: Branch circuit conduits and conduits feeding ceiling lighting shall not be supported by suspended ceiling lighting fixtures, mechanical piping or air conditioning ducts. Branch circuit conduits may be fastened to ceiling support members with fasteners designed for that purpose. N. Conduit Sleeves: Same material as conduits required in the area. Both ends of sleeves shall have bushings. 33 GROUTING AND FIRE STOPS A. General Requirements: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for grouting airtight any openings adjacent to conduits and other openings to seal against passage of air, smoke or vapors. Openings around conduits through floors shall be sealed watertight. 2. Contractor shall seal around each conduit or conduit sleeve penetrating fire rated walls or partitions with sealant specified. Interior conduit sleeves in walls or partitions shall be sealed to provide a complete fire rated installation in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3. All firestopping products shall be installed by experienced workers, familiar with the proper application and installation of appropriate UL fire stopping design rating systems. Contractor shall submit fire stopping manufacturer's appropriate conduit and conduit sleeve penetration system design criteria and UL approved number for each type of UL fire stopping design rating system used on the project prior to installation. 3.4 CONDUIT STUB -UPS A. Stubbed Up Through Floor Slabs: Where conduit is called to be stubbed up at an exposed location, a rigid conduit threaded coupling shall be installed flush with finish floor. Provide a recessed pipe plug, flush with floor, in each stub - up. 3.5 EMPTY CONDUITS 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 5 04/18/13 A. Identification: Empty conduits installed for future use or for use by others shall have markers and identification at terminations. Empty boxes shall be marked with the system named in a visible place on the exposed coverplate. END OF SECTION 061507 SNA201301 CD 260533.10 -6 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 33.11 OUTLET BOXES Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide outlet boxes of heavy gauge galvanized steel, of knockout type, wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Recognized Manufacturers of electric outlet boxes, manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code (NEC) and industry standards. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Ceiling Boxes: 4 -inch octagonal ceiling boxes shall be used, except as otherwise specified. For additional wire space 4 11/16 —inch square boxes may be used. Outlet boxes for fixtures shall be complete with fixture studs. B. Wall Boxes: 4 -inch square wall boxes shall be used with one or two device raised cover. Raised covers or tile rings shall be flush with fmished walls. 1. Boxes in plastered walls shall be standard 4 inch square boxes with appropriate plaster rings. 2. Boxes in brick, exposed concrete block, glazed tile and wood paneled walls shall be 4 -inch square having a raised cover with straight sides not less than 1 -inch. 4 11/16 - inch square box may be used for additional wire space. Where thickness of masonry or more than two gangs are required 3 % -inch high masonry boxes may be used. 3. Switch boxes in door frames shall be Raco No. 426 with Sierra narrow plates. 4. Boxes that are surface mounted shall be 4 -inch square with pressed steel plates. Where mounted within six inches of a floor, box type shall be "FS" or "FD ". 5. Straight through and sectional switch boxes shall not be used. 6. Flanged airtight boxes shall be NuTek Airtight #FWSW series. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. • General Requirements: 1. Boxes shall not be recessed back -to -back on opposite sides of wall, offset a minimum of six inches. Through wall boxes shall not be used. 2. Boxes shall be roughed -in to provide a neat appearance. Centerlines of boxes shall be aligned vertically and horizontally. Boxes shall be symmetrically located with the major architectural features when they occur between doors and windows and in wood panels. 3. Adjust horizontal position of boxes such that bottom of box is located on top of masonry coarse and vertical centerline is either on a masonry course or centered on a masonry unit. Contractor shall coordinate with other trades so boxes are installed with no unsightly joints around them. 4. Boxes shall be installed such that the front of box is flush with finished wall, boxes more than '/ inch back from finished wall shall not be acceptable. 5. Boxes used for narrow fluorescent fixtures shall have openings of such a size that they will be completely covered by fixtures. 6. Boxes in finished ceiling construction shall be supported by structural building members or when necessary 111709 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.11 - 1 04/18/13 7. Provide flanged airtight boxes in the interior side of exterior walls. 8. Contractor shall coordinate height and location of boxes with Architectural elevations and other trades so as not to conflict with other work or equipment. Boxes shall not interfere with door trim. It shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to move boxes that conflict with others at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION • 1111709 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.11 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 33.12 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide pull boxes as required to facilitate the pulling of wires or when more than four quarter bends occur in any conduit nun. No attempt has been made to show all necessary boxes on Drawings. Part2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Type: 1. Pull and junction boxes shall be sized and installed to meet requirements of Article 314 of the latest edition National Electric Code (NEC). 2. Provide galvanized code -gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Pull and junction boxes shall be located to be accessible after building is finished. Pull and junction boxes shall not be placed in any finished spaces without prior approval of Architect/Engineer. No boxes shall be installed above plaster ceilings without prior approval of Architect/Engineer. 1. Pull boxes installed above lay -in ceiling tiles shall be within twenty-four inches of ceiling for accessibility and shall not conflict with removal of ceiling tiles. 2. Pull boxes shall be within twenty-four inches where installed above access panels. 3.2 CONDUCTORS IN PULL BOXES A. General Requirements: Conductors shall be of sufficient length within pull boxes to neatly train conductors without excess. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Pull Boxes: Pull boxes shall be identified as to type of system in box as follows: 1. Stencil coverplate with 1/2 -inch black letters in non - finished areas. 2. Identify with a tag inside of box in finished areas. 3. Paint boxes red and stencil "FIRE ALARM" for all boxes used for fire alarm and detection systems. B. Conductors: Identify in a permanent neat and legible manner all conductors or cables within box by means of tags, pressure sensitive tape or cable ties. END OF SECTION 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.12 - 1 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 35 RACEWAY SYSTEMS Part I. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Unless specifically noted or specified otherwise, install all electrical wiring in an enclosed raceway system. Raceway materials shall be as specified in Section 26 05 33.10. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Raceway Size: Raceways should be sized to meet the minimum requiueiuents of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and all state and local codes and ordinances. Where raceway sizes are indicated, provide raceways shown. B. Conduit Fill: Conduit fill shall be based on THWN conductors, at 75° C, as listed in the latest edition of the NEC. Derating shall be considered when sizing conduits. Provide increased conduit size where required. Part 2. - PRODUCTS • N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Concealed: Raceways shall be installed concealed, unless specifically noted or otherwise specified. Generally, raceways shall be installed exposed only on walls and ceilings of unfinished rooms, equipment rooms or where indicated on Drawings. B. Continuous System: Raceway systems shall be complete from outlet to outlet and from cabinets and junction boxes. Raceway systems shall enter-and be secured to boxes and cabinets in such a manner that the system shall be electrically continuous from point of origin to outlets. C. Mounting: Raceways shall not be mounted on boiler, ventilation units or other such mechanical equipment, except where necessary to make connections to electrical devices that are part of or mounted on such equipment. D. Interference: Coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor prior to installing conduit or pull boxes for electrical feeders to avoid conflicts with locations of raceway runs and mechanical equipment. Revisions to the raceway system made to avoid conflicts shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 35 - 1 04/18/13 SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROLS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. In general, all motors indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule or as shown on the Drawings are furnished, set in place and mounted by others. Motor locations and mounting heights are approximate and shall be verified with the motor installer. 2. Provide a feeder from a panelboard through a disconnecting switch and starter to each motor. Provide final connections to each motor and check each motor for proper rotation. 3. Provide all disconnects and starters indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule, unless specifically noted as "Furnished by Others ", in which case install disconnects and starters as required for a complete system. 4. Refer to the Electrical Equipment Schedule Notes for control requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 00 10. Part 2. - PRODUCTS • 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All motor control devices shall be of the same manufacturer as follows (Square D catalog numbers are used to specify required type): 1. Allen - Bradley 2. Cutler - Hammer/Eaton 3. Furnas 4. General Electric 5. Siemens 6. Square D 2.2 COMBINATION UNITS A. General Requirements: Provide combination devices where a disconnect switch is indicated at the same location as a magnetic starter. 2.3 DISCONNECTING MEANS A. General Requirements: Provide all disconnect switches indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule, except where specifically noted as "Furnished By Others ", in which case install switches as required for a complete system. B. Type: Disconnect switches shall be as follows: 1. Heavy duty type, fusible, unless otherwise indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule. 2. NEMA 1 enclosure, except NEMA 3R where installed outside or on roof. 3. Motor rated for proper horsepower. 4. Proper voltage rating. 011911 SNA201301 CD 26 24 19 - 1 04/18/13 5. Fuses shall be sized as specified in Section 26 28 13. 6. Electrical interlock to disconnect all separately derived control circuits or interlock wiring. 7. Terminals suitable for both 60 °C and 75 °C conductors. 2.4 MAGNETIC STARTERS A. General Requirements: Provide all magnetic starters indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule, except where specifically noted as "Furnished By Others ", in which case install magnetic starters as required for a complete system. B. Type: Magnetic starters shall be non - reversing type (Square D, Class 8536). Each starters shall be complete with all of the following features: 1. Full voltage, across- the -line, horsepower rated. Terminals suitable for both 60 °C and 75 °C conductors. 2. Surface mounted NEMA 1 enclosures, except NEMA 3R where installed outside or on roof. 3. Motor running over - current protection in each ungrounded conductor. Electrical Contractor shall verify actual name plate current ratings of each motor prior to installation over - current protection. 4. Low voltage release. 5. Holding coil of proper voltage. 6. Control Transformer: Provide a transformer of the same voltage as the holding coil, within each magnetic starter. Transformer shall be complete with both primary and secondary fusing. 7. Hand - Off -Auto Selector Switch: Switch shall be mounted on starter cover and connected in circuit such that protective devices remain in circuit in both auto and hand positions ((Square D, Class 9999). 8. Pilot Light: Pilot light shall be mounted on starter cover and shall be complete with red lens and lamp (Square D, Class 9999). 9. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide a minimum of four auxiliary contacts per starter. 2.5 MANUAL STARTERS A. General Requirements: Provide all manual starters indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule, except where specifically noted as "Furnished By Others ", in which case install manual starters as required for a complete system. B. Type: Manual starters shall be as follows: 1. Full voltage, across -the -line, horsepower rated. 2. One motor running over - current protector in each ungrounded conductor. 3. In finished areas, all manual starters shall be flush mounted in plates to match device plates sized to fit standard outlet boxes (Square D, Class 2510). Manufacturer's direction plate for resetting overloads shall be installed on flush plates. Plates shall be engraved as noted in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule. 4. Where exposed conduit is permitted, manual starters (Square D, Class 2510) shall be in surface boxes. 5. Pilot lights with manual starters shall be red neon jewel type. Pilot lights shall be connected to conductors at actual motor location in order to indicate that motor is running. 2.6 CONTROL STATIONS A. General Requirements: Provide all control devices as noted in the Mechanical and Electrical Schedule, In finished areas, all control stations shall be flush mounted in plates to match device plates and of a size to fit standard outlet boxes. B. Type: Control stations shall be as follows: 1. Start -Stop Maintained Stations:, Maintained contact type for 2 -wire control of magnetic starters. Actuator buttons shall be engraved start -stop (Square D, Class 9001). 2. Start-Stop Momentary Stations: For 3 -wire control of magnetic starters or relays. Engrave actuator 011911 SNA201301 CD 26 24 19 - 2 04/18/13 3. Toggle Switch Stations: Provide standard toggle switches as specified under Section 26 27 23. 4. Pilot Lights: Pilot lights at start-stop stations shall be incandescent type with red lens. Pilot lights at the toggle switches shall be neon type mounted in separate gangs of device plates. Pilot lights shall be connected to conductors on load side of disconnect at motor in order to indicate that motor is running. 5. Float Switches, Pressure Switches, P.E. Switches, and E.P. Switches: Device shall be furnished and installed by others, but connected by Electrical Contractor. Verify location of such equipment with the installer. 6. Special Key Switches: Each key switch, including special wall outlet boxes and engraved plates shall be furnished by others but installed by Electrical Contractor. 7. Limit Switches: Switches shall be furnished and set in place by others, but installed by Electrical Contractor. The number of limit switches and function shall be coordinated with equipment suppliers' Shop Drawings. 8. Snap Switch: Control motor with switch on the Drawings. 9. Duct Heat or Smoke Fire Detectors: Refer to Section 26 90 00.10 or Section 26 90 00.11. 10. Engraving: Provide engraving of remote motor control stations to properly identify station. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DISCONNECTS AND STARTERS A. General Requirements: Provide disconnecting switches and starters indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule noted as "Furnished By Others ", in which case install disconnect switches and starters as required for a complete system. B. Starters and Disconnect Locations: Locations shown on Drawings are approximate and shall be coordinated on site to clear other equipment, provide proper accessibility and provide ease of maintenance. Starters and disconnects shall be installed with clearances as required by the NEC. Starters and disconnects shall be installed in locations that do not provide required clearances only with the prior approval of both the Electrical Inspector and Architect/Engineer. In general, starters and disconnects shall be located near the motors, wall mounted not more than 6 feet above the floor or mounted on equipment where readily accessible from the floors and shall not be mounted over live or moving parts. When indicated to be installed above finished ceilings, starters and disconnects shall be located within 24 inches of ceiling for ease of maintenance and accessibility. C. Elevator. Shunt -trip circuit breaker(s) (STB) or fused disconnects shall be located in elevator equipment room immediately next to knob side of equipment room entrance door. Coordinate exact location with elevator inspector. D. Starter Overloads: Provide running current protection in each starter based on actual motor nameplate readings and overload manufacturer's selection tables. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONTROLS A. General Requirements: Provide all control wiring indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule. Provide adequate auxiliary contacts and relays to accomplish interlocks and subsidiary control connections. Coordinate all work with Mechanical and Temperature Control Contractors, such that operation of mechanical equipment will be as described in Mechanical Specifications. B. Hand - Off -Auto Operation: Where equipment does not have automatic control, connect the hand - off-auto selector switch for manual operation with automatic position available for future use. Connections to selector switch shall be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices will be bypassed when switch is in manual position; safety control devices, such as low- or high- pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in motor - control circuit in both manual and automatic positions of the selector switch. 3.3 MOTOR CONNECTIONS 011911 SNA201301 CD 26 24 19 - 3 04/18/13 A. General Requirements: Provide feeders from panelboards, through disconnecting switches and starters, to all motors. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to motors and shall not be less than 12 inches nor more than 24 inches in length. Flexible metal conduit in boiler rooms, kitchens and mechanical rooms shall be liquid tight type. Provide a separate grounding conductor within flexible conduit, bonded to conduit system, for motors. B. Connections to Roof Mounted Motors: Provide weatherproof connections to all roof mounted motors. C. Connections to Wall Hung Water Coolers: Install in accordance with cooler manufacturer's requirements. Conceal receptacle behind cooler enclosure at all devices where possible. 3.4 LABELING AND ENGRAVING A. Labeling: Provide labels inscribed with both the motor name and number attached to each motor disconnect and to each motor starter or combination switch - starter. Each motor name shall be as indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule. On projects where no Equipment Schedule is provided, motor names shall be as directed by Engineer. Labels shall be black micarta plastic laminate plates with 1/4 -inch high white cut letters. B. Engraving: Provide identification on remote motor control pushbutton stations, momentary contact stations and hand- off-auto stations. Flush plates shall be engraved with Sierra permanent type filled letters. Surface mounted control stations shall have 1/4 -inch high white cut letters on black micarta plates. END OF SECTION 011911 SNA201301 CD 262419 -4 04/18/13 SECTION 26 27 23 WIRING DEVICES Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide all labor, materials and accessories as required to install and connect wiring devices wherever required by Drawings and Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 00 10. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All wiring devices shall be of the same manufacturer as follows (Leviton and Hubbell catalog numbers are used to specify required type and quality): 1. Cooper 2. General Electric 3. Hubbell 4. Leviton 5. Pass & Seymour 6. Slater 7. Sierra B. Acceptable Manufacturers: All wiring devices shall be of the same manufacturer as follows: 1. Cooper 2. Leviton 3. Sierra 4. Slater 2.2 DEVICE COLOR A. General Requirements: Unless noted otherwise, all wiring devices and wall plates shall be coordinated with the Architect. Submit samples to Architect for review and approval. 23 SWITCHES A. General Requirements: Switches for lighting loads shall be 15 amp or 20 amp, 120 volt, quiet toggle type and side wired. B. Switches shall be the following: 1. 15 amp, 120/277 volt, single pole Leviton #1201 -2X 2. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, single pole Leviton #1221 -2X 3. 15 amp, 120/277 volt, 3 -way Leviton #1203 -2X 4. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 3 -way Leviton #1223 -2X 5. 15 amp, 120/277 volt, 4 -way Leviton #1204-2X 6. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 4 -way Leviton # 1224 -2X 7. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 2 -pole Leviton #1222 -2X 022813 SNA201301 CD 26 27 23 - 1 04/18/13 C. Door frame switches shall be Pass & Seymour No. ACD -201 or ACD -203 as required, complete with mounting straps and stainless steel plates. D. Timer switches shall be Leviton LTB30 -1L, electronic with four presets, up to 30 minutes, rated for 1000 watts /lhp motor. 2.4 CONVENIENCE OUTLETS A. General Requirements: Duplex receptacles shall be 15 amp or 20 amp, 125 volt, 3 -wire, grounding type, quickwire push -in and side or back and side wired. Install 20 amp rated duplex receptacles in all common areas. All receptacles shall be installed with the ground slot down. Provide GFI receptacles where shown or required by the National Electrical Code (NEC) and install with ground slot down. B. Receptacles shall be the following: 1. 15 amp, 125 volt Leviton #BR15 -X 2. 15 amp, 125 volt, GFI Leviton #7599 -X 3. 20 amp, 125 volt Leviton #BR20 -X 4. 20 amp, 125 volt, GFI Leviton #7899 -X C. Special receptacles shall be the following: 1. 20 amp, 250 volt Leviton #5821 -X 2. 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 -pole, 4 -wire, grounding Leviton #278 3. 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 -pole, 4 -wire, grounding Leviton #279 D. Exterior receptacles shall be low profile, recessed, weatherproof (WP) with cord openings and solid cover. Arlington IN BOX. 2.5 DIMMERS A. General Requirements: Provide all dimmers as shown on the Drawings. B. Dimmers shall be as follows: 1. 600 watt, 120 volt, incandescent Lutron #NT -600 2. 1000 watt, 120 volt, incandescent Lutron #NT -1000 3. 1,500 watt, 120 volt, incandescent Lutron #NT -1500 4. 16 or 8 amp, 120/277 volt, fluorescent Lutron #NTF Series 2.6 DEVICE PLATES A. General Requirements: Device plates shall be provided for all devices shown on the Drawings or called for in the specifications. Device plates in finished and unfinished areas shall be plastic, unless noted otherwise. Multiple device plates shall be constructed of a single plate. No sectional plates will be accepted. B. Special Screws: Where so indicated, device plates shall be complete with special tamperproof spanner oval head screw. Furnish Owner with three special screw drivers for the spanner head screws. C. Engraved Plates: Engraved plates shall have letters as required, 1/8 -inch minimum letter height and black filling. Printed tape or glued on plates are not acceptable. The following plates shall be engraved: 1. Wall plates so indicated on Drawings. 2. Switch wall plates controlling any lights which are out of sight of switches. 3. Switch wall plates controlling motors. D. Commercial Kitchen Device Coverplates: Provide 302 stainless steel plates for all devices indicated. 022 813 SNA201301 CD 26 27 23 - 2 04/18/13 Part 3. — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DEVICES A. General Requirements: Device height shall be as follows, except where noted otherwise on the Drawings: 1. Switches, receptacles and outlets shall be mounted at the following heights, measured from device center to floor, unless noted otherwise. a. Receptacle 18" b. Telephone outlet 18" c. Telephone outlet, wall 46" d. TV outlet 18" e. Switch 46" top of device f. Devices above counter without backsplash 8" above counter g. Devices above counter with backsplash 4" above backsplash B. The Contractor shall coordinate the mounting height of all special receptacles with the Architect, Owner, Mechanical Contractor and equipment suppliers. C. Where locations shown or mounting heights specified for devices conflict with other trades or building finishers, the Contractor shall coordinate exact requirements prior to installation and install only after the approval of all involved. D. Provide spacers as required between outlet boxes and devices so that each device is flush with the fmished wall. Plate screws shall not be used to stabilize device. E. Location: 1. Receptacles along side of switches in janitor closets, storage rooms and mechanical spaces shall be in 2 -gang boxes, with switch in first gang and receptacle in second gang. 2. Switches near doors shall be located on side opposite the hinges (verify door swings with Architectural Drawings before installation) and close to door trim. Edge of switch plate shall be within four inches of door frame. 3. Devices located at counters shall be mounted eight inches from device center to top of counter, unless noted otherwise. 4. Switches controlling range hood fan and lights, garbage disposals, undercabinet lighting, etc., in handicapped units shall be installed in the cabinet front. Coordinate the exact available location with the Architect. F. Provide dedicated neutral and ground wire to each dimmer or timer switch. 3.2 MOVING DEVICES A. The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, reserves the right to move any device a distance of ten feet in any direction from the location shown on the Drawings without an increase in Contract amount. This requirement shall only apply to devices before installation. B. In the event that an outlet shown on the Drawings will not be able to serve the specified piece of equipment, the outlet shall be relocated as required, with no increase in contract amount. END OF SECTION 022813 SNA201301 CD 26 27 23 - 3 04/18/13 SECTION 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide safety switches wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. 1. Every effort has been expended to provide an accurate list of equipment, however, the Contractor shall verify motor nameplate on site before installing switches or selecting fuses. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 00 10. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All safety switches shall be of one manufacturer as follows. 1. Cutler- Hammer 2. General Electric 3. I.T.E. (Siemens) 4. Square D 2.2 MATERIALS A. Type: 1. Safety switches shall be fused. Non - fusible switches may be used in lieu of fusible where allowed by the National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Safety switches shall be NEMA HD (heavy duty) type, horsepower rated, and of ampere sizes shown on Drawings or as required by the NEC. Safety switches shall have NEMA 1 enclosures, except in wet locations or where indicated as weatherproof, in which case a NEMA 3R enclosure shall be used. Locations on roof or outside shall be considered wet locations. 3. Fusible safety switches shall contain Class R fuse provisions to reject fuses, except Class R type. 4. Safety switches shall contain padlocking provisions and defeater screw mechanisms. Provide interlock contacts where so specified. 5. Safety switches shall be rated 240 volts where used on 120/208 volt or 120/240 volt systems. 6. Safety switches shall be rated 600 volts where used on 277/480 volt systems. 7. Switches rated 30 amperes through 100 amperes shall have lugs listed for 60 C or 75 C conductors. Switches rated over 100 amperes shall have lugs listed for 75 C. 2.3 ARC FLASH WARNING LABEL A. Provide arc flash warning label per Code. B. Label shall include calculated are fault current. C. Labeling and calculated values shall be included with shop drawing submittals. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 SUMMARY 010913 SNA201301 CD 26 28 16- 1 04/18/13 A. This contractor shall review all Mechanical Equipment Schedule and plans and provide disconnects and fuses as required by Code. END OF SECTION 010913 SNA201301 CD 26 28 16- 2 04/18/13 SECTION 26 51 00 LIGHTING Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide fixtures shown on Drawings complete with lamps as indicated in Light Fixture Schedule. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 16010. Shop Drawings submitted for approval shall contain the following minimum information: 1. Manufacturer and type of ballast for fluorescent and HID fixtures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): Devices shall be in accordance with Section 16010. • 1. Exterior fixtures shall bear the UL label for wet or damp locations as required for the use intended. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. General Requirements: Metal parts shall be steel, with end plates connected to body with fasteners or by welding, with all essential components required for a complete installation. 2.2 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent, Electronic: Wherever noted in the Light Fixture Schedule, fluorescent ballasts shall be as follows: 1. High frequency, premium grade, class "P" rated, instant start. Provide program start when controlled by occupancy sensors. 2. 60 Hz rated for the voltage noted. 3. Voltage regulation and light regulation of +/- 10 %. 4. 90 percent or higher ballast- factor for two -lamp and three -lamp ballasts, greater than 85% for four - lamp ballasts. 5. "A" or better sound rating. 6. • Meet FCC rules for EMI and RFI interference. 7. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less. 8. Lamp Crest Factor of less than 1.7. 9. Interior mounted fixture ballasts shall have a 50° F minimum starting temperature and exterior mounted fixture ballasts shall have a -20° F minimum starting temperature. 10. Each ballast to have 3 -year warranty with a minimum $10.00 labor reimbursement. 11. Power factor of 90% minimum. 12. Acceptable manufacturers: All electronic fluorescent ballasts shall be as follows: a. Magnetek b. Motorola c. Osram/Sylvania B. Compact Lamp: All compact lamp ballasts shall be as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. 120612 SNA201301 CD 26 51 00 -1 04/18/13 1. Compact fluorescent ballasts shall contain an end -of -life shut off circuit. C. High Intensity Discharge (HID): All high intensity discharge lamp ballasts shall be as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. 2.3 EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT A. General Requirements: Wherever noted in the Light Fixture Schedule or Drawings emergency lighting units shall be as follows: 1. A self - contained storage battery used as a second source of power. 2. Shall supply and maintain the total output for a period of 11/2 hours minimum, without the voltage applied to the load failing below 871/2% of normal light output. 2.4 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES A. General Requirements: Lamps shall be 130 volt unless noted otherwise. 2.5 LENSES A. General Requirements: Provide pure virgin acrylic 0.125 plastic lenses unless noted otherwise. 2.6 RECESSED FIXTURES A. General Requirements: 1. Provide recessed fixtures with frames appropriate for the type of ceiling mounting. 2. Provide suitable plaster frames where installed in plaster ceilings. 3. Provide fixtures that have wiring, ballasts and relamping access from below the ceiling unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide UL listed and labeled enclosure for all fixtures that penetrate rated fire assemblies or that penetrate into unheated areas, such as soffits and attics. Install enclosure, seal all openings with caulking and duct tape and provide plastic cover over enclosure (also caulked and taped) to restrict air infiltration prior to installation of insulation. UL listed enclosure shall be E.Z. Barrier (612 -436- 0606). If enclosure will not maintain proper clearances around fixture per manufacturer's recommendations, provide sheetrock boxout. 5. Incandescent and HID fixtures shall be UL listed and labeled for thermal protection. 2.7 FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. General Requirements: 1. Manufacturer's catalog number indicates type, quality and style, but may not cover ballast, lamp or special details required. Contractor shall provide the lighting fixtures with special features noted. 2. Provide fixtures complete with lamps. 3. Coordinate light fixtures with latest Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans prior to release of fixture order. 4. Adjust mounting to match ceiling type at no additional cost to Owner. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: All incandescent fluorescent, LED and HID lamps shall be: 1. General Electric 2. Osram/Sylvania 3. Phillips Part 3. - EXECUTION 120612 SNA201301 CD 26 51 00 -2 04/18/13 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: 1. Remove manufacturer's labels from exterior of fixtures. 2. Install fixtures when the work of other trades in the area is substantially complete, to avoid damage or defacement after installation. Fixtures shall not be installed on ceilings until ceiling finishes are complete, except fixtures may be installed on exposed T -bar ceilings after T -bars are installed and before tile installation. 3. Coordinate fixture locations with the ceiling installation and install fixtures in a uniform pattern to tiles or exposed grids. Fixtures shall be symmetrically spaced with rows in alignment and parallel with the building features. Measurements shall be taken from the Architectural Drawings. 4. Install 2x2 fixtures and compact fluorescent downlights with lamps perpendicular to corridor. 5. Where floodlighting has been indicated, provide for adjusting during evening hours to Engineer's satisfaction. 6. Directional fixtures shall be properly aimed and aligned as directed by the Owner's representative. 7. Provide concrete bases for all exterior pole mounted fixtures. Refer to the Drawings for base detail. 3.2 FIXTURE MOUNTING A. General Requirements: 1. Surface fixtures, other than fluorescent type, shall be securely fastened to outlet box. 2. Recessed fixtures, except those installed within an exposed grid type ceiling, shall be supported from building structural members or from concealed steel framing channels 1 -1/2 inches or larger. No recessed fixtures shall be supported from ceiling tiles. 3. Individually mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be supported within 12 inches of each end of fixture. 4. Continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall be supported within 12 inches of end of each row and at intervals not to exceed 48 inches along entire row. 5. Chain hung fixtures shall be permitted only where specifically noted. Chains shall be spaced the same as supports described under this Section. Chains shall be heavy duty, nickel or cadmium plated, suitable for weight of specific fixture. Jack chain shall not be used. Unless otherwise indicated, chain hung fixtures shall be provided with a grounded receptacle and grounded portable cords and plugs to feed individual units or continuous rows as required. Chain hung fixtures shall be located on site to clear mechanical . ducts and equipment. 33 SUPPORTS AND FASTENING A. For Fixtures Not In Exposed T -Bar Grid Ceilings: Fixture supports, or outlet boxes used to support fixtures, shall be securely fastened to building structural members or to concealed steel ceiling framing channels 1- 1/2 inches or larger. Fixture hanging rods shall be of adequate dimensions to support fixture and shall be not less than 3/8 inch diameter. Fixture supports shall be fastened to structure as follows: 1. To concrete with steel or lead expandable concrete anchors set into a minimum of 1 -1/2 inches of concrete or with 3/8 inch minimum diameter toggle bolts through concrete. 2. To wood with lag screws a minimum 1/4 inch diameter entering wood structural members a minimum of 2 inches. 3. To 16 gauge steel channels where used to span building bar joists, structural members or ceiling 1 -1/2 inch minimum framing channels. Provide Steel City, No. 6029 steel channels or Thomas & Betts. B. For Fixtures in Exposed T -Bar Grid Ceilings: Fixtures shall be supported as follows: 1. Recessed fixtures designed expressly for lay -in mounting and under 50 lbs. shall be installed in that manner. Grid system shall be supported from structure as required by ceiling system installer. 2. Recessed fixtures not designed for lay -in mounting or over 50 lbs. shall be installed per the manufacturer's requirements. Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware required. Contractor shall also coordinate with the ceiling system installer and the Architect. 120612 SNA201301 CD 26 51 00 -3 04/18/13 3. Provide flexible metal conduit connections for all recessed type fixtures in lay -in ceilings permitting fixture to be lifted out. Maximum flexible conduit shall not exceed six feet. One to four fixtures may be served by a single common outlet box, securely fastened to structure or ceiling support members and within 30 inches of ceiling tile. 4. Provide fixture retainers or clips for each fixture installed in exposed grid suspended ceilings in accordance with UBC and state building codes. 5. Recessed fixtures, not designed to lay -in directly on grids, shall be centered on ceiling tiles and shall be supported with 16 gauge steel channels used to span over T -bar grids. No fixture shall be supported by ceiling tiles. 6. Surface mounted fixtures to be centered directly on a T -bar grid shall be secured to that grid with hanger clamps, clips or other approved fasteners designed for the purpose.. Unless otherwise noted, ceiling T -bar grid system shall be supported from structure by ceiling system installer. 7. Surface mounted fixtures to be centered between T -bar grids shall be secured to a 16 gauge steel channel installed by this Contractor to span over top of main T -bar grids. Steel channels shall be Steel City, No. 6029 or Thomas & Betts. Non -main T -bar grids shall not be used to support steel channels. Unless otherwise noted, ceiling T -bar grid system shall be supported from structure by ceiling system installer. 3.4 SPECIAL FIXTURE COORDINATION A. Storage and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms: Contractor shall verify actual fixture locations with Architect. Fixture locations shall be revised as required to clear all equipment, ducts, and piping. END OF SECTION 120612 SNA201301 CD 26 51 00 -4 04/18/13 SECTION 26 51 10 LIGHTING REBATES Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide one copy of quantity invoices required by the local power company to allow Owner to receive Energy Rebates for the use of energy saving ballasts and/or energy saving lamps. Part 2. — PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall coordinate with the local power company and the Owner as required to obtain all applicable lamp and/or ballast rebates. B. All rebates shall be made directly to Owner. C. Retain samples of existing lamps and/or ballasts for proof of energy savings when required by the local power company. END OF SECTION 100405 SNA201301 CD 26 51 10 - 1 04/18/13 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX FIRE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 21 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 21 10 00 FIRE SPRINKLER (PERFORMANCE BASED) PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 22 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 22 00 20 DEMOLITION SECTION 22 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 22 05 00 TESTING AND BALANCING SECITON 22 07 00 INSULATION SECTION 22 10 00 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES HVAC SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 23 00 20 DEMOLITION SECTION 23 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 23 05 00 TESTING AND BALANCING SECTION 23 07 00 INSULATION SECTION 23 08 00 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 23 09 00 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 23 20 00 HYDRONICS SECTION 23 30 00 DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 23 80 00 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 070212 SNA201301 CD MECHANICAL INDEX -1 04/18/13 SECTION 21 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Mechanical Division. B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Mechanical Division work. No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits. C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers. D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the Architect/Engineer. E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Mechanical Division and prior to fmal close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100% complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at fmal inspection shall be immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer. F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be directly credited to the Owner. 1.2 MECHANICAL PLANS A. The Mechanical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the mechanical work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other. Any item shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be considered as shown and specified on both. B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to the Engineer's attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and operational mechanical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these Specifications. • C. Drawings: 1. Contractor shall familiarize themselves with Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred spaces, suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc. 2. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all piping and ductwork within soffits provided by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically approved by the Architect and Engineer. 3. Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate location only. Placement of mechanical equipment and devices shall not interfere with locations or clearances of other trades' materials or equipment. 4. Contractor shall verify locations with architectural elevations. 5. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in the field. 6. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit within the available space. 081512 SNA201301 CD • 21 00 10 - 1 04/18/13 7. Notify the Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical, Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. 8. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before installing any mechanical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with other trade's work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows: 1. Contractor: Shall mean Mechanical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Mechanical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with Contract Documents and deliver to site in new, undamaged condition. 4. Connect: Shall mean to bring mechanical service and/or control wiring to equipment, make all fmal connections, provide all necessary miscellaneous materials required and do final check out to ensure proper equipment connections. 5. Install: Shall mean to store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, connect, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating condition. 6. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install. E. CAD and Drawing Files: 1. Mechanical CAD drawings prepared by Steen Engineering, Inc. for this Project are instruments of Steen Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this Project. During the course of the implementation of the Project, and with Steen Engineering, Inc. approval, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the preparation of Shop Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other projects, for additions to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others. Any revisions, additions and/or deletions to these CAD drawings, either intentional or unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of the person(s) making such revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s) shall hold harmless and indemnify Steen Engineering, Inc. of any and all responsibilities and liabilities. 2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be requested directly from the Architect. 13 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS A. For typical or repetitive unit installations, contractor shall schedule an inspection with local and/or state AHJ to review a complete mock -up example installation and receive approval prior to proceeding with additional installations. Installation shall meet all code and manufacturer's service clearance requirements. Contractor shall coordinate installation and subsequent inspection with general contractor and any related trades. B. Contractor shall submit a '/o -inch scale drawing to the Engineer indicating placement of all mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. Indicate proposed locations of all major equipment and materials, including but not limited to service equipment, exterior wall and foundation penetrations, fire -rated wall and floor penetrations, sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases, and mechanical/electrical equipment room layouts. This effort will require each trade to closely work together to produce a''% -inch set of coordination drawings for each area of the building. C. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work. D. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials: 1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein. 08 1512 SNA201301 CD 21 00 10 - 2 04/18/13 2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail. 3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the complete mechanical installation. 4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, the Contractor shall provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade practice. 5. Supply materials and equipment to the site in original packages, containers or crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule deliveries in accordance with the overall Project schedule. The Contractor shall closely coordinate all deliveries with other Contractors and the Engineer. 6. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage, and protection from the elements for all materials and equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by Contractor as required by the Engineer. 7. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior to fmal inspection and contract close out. 8. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type of material. Equipment shall be UL listed as an entire assembly or system. B. Prior Approvals: 1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details of the Specifications. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the use of substituted products or equipment, including all additional labor and materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Within fifteen days after the award of the Contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall submit shop drawings on all major mechanical equipment to the Architect .for approval. Shop Drawings shall be submitted by the Mechanical Contractor, not their Subcontractors. These shop drawings shall cover such items as pumps, fittings, valves, fire protection, etc. The Contractor shall thoroughly review each item for compliance with these Specifications making any necessary corrections prior to submittal. Each shop drawing set shall be stamped, signed and dated indicating Contractor review. If the Contractor fails to properly review shop drawings, the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer for all additional reviews on a time and material basis. No equipment shall be released for shipment or installed prior to fmal approval by the Engineer. B. The Engineer will review all Shop Drawings submitted and will retain one copy for record file. C. If the Engineer rejects (Revised and Resubmit or Rejected) the same section two times the engineer shall be compensated for additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and will be deducted from the Contractor's application for payment. Contractor is responsible for all delays caused by the resubmittal process. D. Provide samples of materials or equipment proposed to be furnished, if requested. Samples shall become the property of the Architect/Engineer and will be returned only when accompanied by a written request to do so. 081512 SNA201301 CD 21 00 10 - 3 04/18/13 E. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain an "As Built" set of bluelines on site, neatly notating routing, location or other field changes to the Contract Documents. Upon Project completion and prior to final close out, turn the "As Built" drawings over to the Owner. Provide a detailed transmittal indicating each sheet and other information turned over to the Owner and acquire their representative's signature. This information shall be included at the project close out. 1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality workmanship will be accepted. B. The Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all Contractor generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner any interruptions necessary to existing systems prior to shut down. D. Coordination: 1. Contractor shall give careful consideration to work of other Contractors on the Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor's ''A" coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other trades. 2. This Contractor shall provide a complete installation manual to the Electrical Contractor for each piece of equipment requiring electrical power /control connections scheduled to be performed by the Electrical contractor. This shall be done prior to any rough -ins by the Electrical Contractor to insure proper power /control wiring has been provided. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies between the installation manuals, the electrical plans and the mechanical specifications for each piece of equipment. 3. Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and Specifications that apply for correlating information. 4. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation. 5. Should the Mechanical Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that interferes with work of other Contractors, the Mechanical Contractor shall make all necessary changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or conflict at the Mechanical Contractor's expense. E. Protection of Equipment: 1. Until fmal acceptance of the work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for the safety, good condition, and protection from damage of all materials and equipment installed. 2. If, during shipment or installation, the finish of equipment becomes chipped or scratched, the Contractor shall touch up or refinish surfaces to match original finish. F. The Contractor shall complete all safety forms required by General Contractor. 1.7 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State where the project is being constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required for each type of work covered under these Drawings and Specifications. B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for the permanent services. C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national, state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. 081512 SNA201301 CD 21 00 10 - 4 04/18/13 D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Mechanical Contractor to meet all state and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of final inspection and approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O &M) manuals to the Owner prior to final close out. O &M manuals shall consist of approved shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment. O &M manuals shall be neatly bound in 3 -ring binders, contain an index and section tabs and be labeled with the Project name. B. Name, address, and telephone number of each Contractor installing equipment and systems, local representative for each item of equipment and each system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications with the Section tab sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation and maintenance instructions. 1. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in appropriate section. 2. A maintenance and lubrication schedule shall include each motor, function, control location, fuse location, belt sizes type of lubricant, and rate of lubrication in accordance with manufacturer. 3. A filter maintenance schedule shall include filter size and quantity for each unit, located by room number. 1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of mechanical equipment prior to fmal close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense to Owner, services of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems provided by this Contractor to Owner's permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to Owner for regular operation. B. The Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of five days instruction period for Owner's personnel. C. Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill - timed operation or testing shall be repaired, at Contractor's expense, before fmal inspection and acceptance. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of defects that may develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of fmal completion of the Project or for as long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are in effect from the date of fmal completion of the Project, whichever is later. B. During the guarantee period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone conversation of a problem with any mechanical system, shall cause the Contractor to respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. C. During the guarantee period, the Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency. Part 2. — PRODUCTS N/A 081512 SNA201301 CD 21 00 10 - 5 04/18/13 Part 3. - EXECUTION N/A END OF SECTION 081512 SNA201301 CD 21 00 10 - 6 04/18/13 SECTION 21 10 00 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED) Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contract for the fire protection installation must be a qualified Fire Protection Contractor regularly engaged in the installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems. Provide a fire protection technician certified with the National Institute of Certified Engineering Technicians (NICET level IV), to certify direct and supervise the work or if required by governing authorities, a registered professional engineer. B. Codes and Standards: 1. NFPA compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with the latest edition of the NFPA. Verify with Local Inspector. 2. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with pre approval guide UL standards; provide UL label on each product. 3. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with local and/or state regulations of fire department or fire marshal. 4. Latest applicable State and Local Codes. 5. City Water Department Compliance: The water service connection and sprinlder system valve assembly shall comply with all City Water Department Requirements. Contractor shall coordinate with the Civil Engineer and the local utility to provide any post indicating valves required on site or on the building. 6. Obtain all required approvals and permits. Permits shall be obtained from the city or municipality in which the system will be installed. If permits are not issued by the city or municipality, a permit shall be obtained from the State Fire Marshal. C. Description of Work: 1. The sprinkler contractor is responsible for verifying and complying with State, City and Local municipalities any and all code requirements related to the fire sprinlder system. 2. Verify need if applicable to provide fire sprinlder protection in wood construction ceiling space with local inspectors. It is the sole responsibility of the sprinkler contractor to review all construction documents and verify with local inspectors the need for any special coverage, dry fire sprinkler protection for unheated spaces, pressure and flow requirements prior to submitting a bid. 3. If applicable include work for remodeled area. Refer to Demolition Specification Section 22 00 20. 4. Provide all labor and materials and perform all operations required in connection with the installation of the fire extinguishing systems. 5. For system notification, coordinate with Electrical Contractor for connection of signaling devices to • Fire Alarm and Detection System, provided by electrical. 6. Modify existing fire sprinkler system serving the basement level and a small portion on the main level as required to accommodate the remodel areas. D. Submittal and Approvals: 1. Prepare drawings of fire protection systems indicating pipe sizes, pipe locations, head layouts and type, fittings, shutoff values, equipment, fire department connections, etc. The design, hydraulic calculations and subsequent drawings shall reflect all modifications and extensions to existing piping equipment and head layout. Indicate elevations, slopes, floor and wall penetrations, drains, etc. 2. Submit to all Agencies having jurisdiction for approval. Submit to Owner insurance carrier for approval if required. AFTER THE DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY ALL REVIEWING AGENCIES, SUBMIT THE APPROVED COPIES BEARING STAMPS AND /OR SIGNATURES OF FIRE MARSHAL OR AGENCY HAVING JURISDICTION TO THE ARCHITECT FOR THEIR USE, BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH INSTALLATION. 012213 SNA201301 CD 21 10 00 - 1 04/18/13 Part 2. — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The following is a general guideline on types of sprinlder heads and their recommended usage. Final design will need to be approved by local inspector and coordinated with Architect and Owner. 1. All areas where piping will be exposed without finished ceilings: Exposed sprinklers, brass finish. Part 3. — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The design of the sprinlder system shall be dictated by the building construction and usage and as specified herein. Piping shall be concealed above suspended ceilings. 1. The design and method of installation of the fire protection work shall be in accordance with Uniform Fire Code, UBC, International Building Code Standards, National Fire Protection Association Standards and National Fire Protection Association Standards that contain reference to or supplementary material on sprinkler systems along with the requirements of the Owner's insurance authority, the State, and the Fire Department. 2. The sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically calculated. Calculations shall conform to NFPA and UBCS 9 -1. B. Coordination: 1. The successful contractor must coordinate with the existing conditions, all other, building components, all new construction, and make all necessary modifications to the pipe routing before submitting for approval. Provide hydraulic calculations for all areas of the building including supplemental hydraulic calculations for all modification. 2. Additional compensation will not be allowed for modifications to the bid documents for additional sprinklers, coordination, or for additional hydraulic calculations. 3. Sprinkler head locations and all pipe routing shall be coordinated with all mechanical and electrical equipment and all structural and architectural components to avoid obstructions. All head locations shall be coordinated with architectural reflective ceiling plan. 4. This contractor shall carefully review all of the bid documents from all disciplines (architectural, structural, kitchen equipment, electrical and mechanical) and design the sprinkler systems to properly protect all areas of the facility. 5. The sprinlder system shall be installed in a manner that is aesthetically unobtrusive, with all sprinkler heads symmetrically aligned and centered in lay -in ceiling tile. System shall not interfere with existing equipment and building components (clocks, speakers, lights, etc.), and is not to be subject to damage by the building occupants. 6. Prior to installing any mains or branches, the Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate routing with all other trades to avoid conflicts. Contractor coordination details and sections shall be signed -off on by all Contractors prior to installation. Any installation that hinders another Contractor from installing their conduits, piping, ductwork, etc., shall be immediately removed to allow for their installation at no additional cost to the Owner or other Contractors. 7. Contractor shall coordinate the routing of all sprinlder piping to maintain 12" minimum clearance from outside air ductwork and ducts or vents that communicate directly with the outdoors. 8. Prior to piping fabrication, the contractor shall submit to the architect, plans showing the routing of the sprinkler mains and branches. Approval of the architect must be obtained prior to fire sprinlder installation C. Existing Building Retrofit: 1. Contractor shall route fire sprinkler mains and branches in such manner as to conceal as much piping as possible. The use of new or existing soffits shall be utilized. Where piping has to be located below the fmished ceiling, prefabricated pipe enclosures shall be "SOFFISTEEL" or "DecoShield ". 012213 SNA201301 CD 21 10 00 - 2 04/18/13 2. Contractor shall route piping thru enclosed areas versus thru fmished ceiling exposed areas, even if it means longer piping routes. 3. Prior to piping fabrication, the contractor shall submit to the architect, plans showing the routing of the sprinlder mains and branches. Approval of the architect must be obtained prior to fire sprinkler installation. 4. Refer to Demolition Specification Section 21 00 20. END OF SECTION • 012213 SNA201301 CD 21 10 00 - 3 04/18/13 SECTION 22 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Mechanical Division. B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Mechanical Division work. No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits. C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers. D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the Architect/Engineer. E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Mechanical Division and prior to final close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100% complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at final inspection shall be immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer. F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be directly credited to the Owner. 1.2 MECHANICAL PLANS A. The Mechanical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the mechanical work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other. Any item shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be as shown and specified on both. B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to the Engineer's attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and operational mechanical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these Specifications. C. Drawings: 1. Contractor shall familiarize themselves with Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred spaces, suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc. 2. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all piping within soffits provided by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically approved by the Architect and Engineer. 3. Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate location only. Placement of mechanical equipment and devices shall not interfere with locations or clearances of other trades' materials or equipment. 4. Contractor shall verify locations with architectural elevations. 5. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in the field. 6. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit within the available space. 081512 SNA201301 CD 22 00 10 - 1 04/18/13 7. Notify the Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical, Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. 8. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before installing any mechanical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with other trade's work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows: 1. Contractor: Shall mean Mechanical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Mechanical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with Contract Documents and deliver to site in new, undamaged condition. 4. Connect: Shall mean to bring mechanical service and/or control wiring to equipment, make all fmal • connections, provide all necessary miscellaneous materials required and do fmal check out to ensure proper equipment connections. 5. Install: Shall mean to store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, connect, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating condition. 6. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install. E. CAD and Drawing Files: 1. Mechanical CAD drawings prepared by Steen Engineering, Inc. for this Project are instruments of Steen Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this Project. During the course of the implementation of the Project, and with Steen Engineering, Inc. approval, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the preparation of Shop Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other projects, for additions to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others. Any revisions, additions and/or deletions to these CAD drawings, either intentional or unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of the person(s) making such revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s) shall hold harmless and indemnify Steen Engineering, Inc. of any and all responsibilities and liabilities. 2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be requested directly from the Architect. 1.3 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS A. For typical or repetitive unit installations, contractor shall schedule an inspection with local and/or state AHJ to review a complete mock -up example installation and receive approval prior to proceeding with additional installations. Installation shall meet all code and manufacturer's service clearance requirements. Contractor shall coordinate installation and subsequent inspection with general contractor and any related trades. B. Contractor shall submit a '/ -inch scale drawing to the Engineer indicating placement of all mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. Indicate proposed locations of all major equipment and materials, including but not limited to service equipment, exterior wall and foundation penetrations, fire -rated wall and floor penetrations, sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases, and mechanical/electrical equipment room layouts. This effort will require each trade to closely work together to produce a'/ -inch set of coordination drawings for each area of the building. C. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work. D. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials: 1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein. 081512 SNA201301 CD 22 00 10 - 2 04/18/13 2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail. 3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the complete mechanical installation. 4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, the Contractor shall provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade practice. 5. Supply materials and equipment to the site in original packages, containers or crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule deliveries in accordance with the overall Project schedule. The Contractor shall closely coordinate all deliveries with other Contractors and the Engineer. 6. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage, and protection from the elements for all materials and equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by Contractor as required by the Engineer. 7. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior to fmal inspection and contract close out. 8. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type of material. Equipment shall be UL listed as an entire assembly or system. B. Prior Approvals: 1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details of the Specifications. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the use of substituted products or equipment, including all additional labor and materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Within fifteen days after the award of the Contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall submit shop drawings on all major mechanical equipment to the Architect for approval. Shop Drawings shall be submitted by the Mechanical Contractor, not their Subcontractors. These shop drawings shall cover such items as boilers, pumps, fittings, valves, plumbing fixtures, water heaters, water softeners, etc. The Contractor shall thoroughly review each item for compliance with these Specifications making any necessary corrections prior to submittal. Each shop drawing set shall be stamped, signed and dated indicating Contractor review. If the Contractor fails to properly review shop drawings, the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer for all additional reviews on a time and material basis. No equipment shall be released for shipment or installed prior to final approval by the Engineer. B. The Engineer will review all Shop Drawings submitted and will retain one copy for record file. C. Approval Stamp: This review is to verify general conformance with the design concept of the Project and substantial compliance with the information provided in the Contract Documents. This review does not in any way relieve the Contractor or their suppliers of their responsibility to provide all materials and equipment as specified, in quantities, quality and dimensions required. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: 08' 1512 SNA201301 CD 22 00 10 - 3 04/18/13 1. "No Exception Taken" indicates that the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. 2. "Make Noted Corrections" indicates that the Submittal, after noted corrections are made, appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. 3. "Revised and Resubmit" indicates that the noted revisions are such that a corrected copy of the Submittal is required for review to confirm that the noted revisions have been understood and made. The Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation after submitting a corrected copy and verifying with the reviewer that the corrected copy is acceptable, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in the Contract Sum or Time. 4. "Rejected" indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, a resubmission is required and fabrication or procurement is not authorized. D. If the Engineer rejects (Revised and Resubmit or Rejected) the same section two times the engineer shall be compensated for additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and will be deducted from the Contractor's application for payment. Contractor is responsible for all delays caused by the resubmittal process. E. Provide samples of materials or equipment proposed to be furnished, if requested. Samples shall become the property of the Architect/Engineer and will be returned only when accompanied by a written request to do so. F. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain an "As Built" set of bluelines on site, neatly notating routing, location or other field changes to the Contract Documents. Upon Project completion and prior to fmal close out, turn the "As Built" drawings over to the Owner. Provide a detailed transmittal indicating each sheet and other information turned over to the Owner and acquire their representative's signature. This information shall be included at the project close out. 1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality workmanship will be accepted. B. The Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all Contractor generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner any interruptions necessary to existing systems prior to shut down. D. Coordination: 1. Contractor shall give careful consideration to work of other Contractors on the Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor's ''4" coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other trades. 2. This Contractor shall provide a complete installation manual to the Electrical Contractor for each piece of equipment requiring electrical power /control connections scheduled to be performed by the Electrical Contractor. This shall be done prior to any rough -ins by the Electrical Contractor to insure proper power /control wiring has been provided. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies between the installation manuals, the electrical plans and the mechanical specifications for each piece of equipment. 3. Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and Specifications that apply for correlating information. 4. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation. 5. Should the Mechanical Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that interferes with work of other Contractors, the Mechanical Contractor shall make all necessary changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or conflict at the Mechanical Contractor's expense. E. Protection of Equipment: 081512 SNA201301 CD 220010 -4 04/18/13 1. Until fmal acceptance of the work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for the safety, good condition, and protection from damage of all materials and equipment installed. 2. If, during shipment or installation, the finish of equipment becomes chipped or scratched, the Contractor shall touch up or refinish surfaces to match original fmish. F. The Contractor shall complete all safety forms required by General Contractor. 1.7 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State where the project is being constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required for each type of work covered under these Drawings and Specifications. B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for the permanent services. C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national, state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Mechanical Contractor to meet all state and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of fmal inspection and approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O &M) manuals to the Owner prior to fmal close out. O &M manuals shall consist of approved shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment. O &M manuals shall be neatly bound in 3 -ring binders, contain an index and section tabs and be labeled with the Project name. B. Name, address, and telephone number of each Contractor installing equipment and systems, local representative for each item of equipment and each system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications with the Section tab sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation and maintenance instructions. 1. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in appropriate section. 2. A maintenance and lubrication schedule shall include each motor, function, control location, fuse location, belt sizes type of lubricant, and rate of lubrication in accordance with manufacturer. 3. A filter maintenance schedule shall include filter size and quantity for each unit, located by room number. 1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of mechanical equipment prior to fmal close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense to Owner, services of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems provided by this Contractor to Owner's permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to Owner for regular operation. B. The Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of five days instruction period for Owner's personnel. 081512 SNA201301 CD 22 00 10 - 5 04/18/13 C. Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill - timed operation or testing shall be repaired, at Contractor's expense, before final inspection and acceptance. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of defects that may develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of final completion of the Project or for as long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are in effect from the date of final completion of the Project, whichever is later. B. During the guarantee period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone conversation of a problem with any mechanical system, shall cause the Contractor to respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. C. During the guarantee period, the Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency. Part 2. — PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION N/A END OF SECTION 081512 SNA201301 CD 22 00 10 - 6 04/18/13 SECTION 22 00 20 DEMOLITION Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all existing mechanical systems and related equipment under this contract are in proper working order, and notify Owner and Engineer of any problems before beginning any new work. B. Contractor shall verify that the condition and functionality of existing systems to which connections will be made, make the connections, and test. Coordinate with the General Contractor for any repairing, finishing and patching work required to complete the new systems. Contractor shall leave the mechanical system being disconnected in such condition as to allow for an easy, fast and clean reconnection of any new mechanical systems. C. Equipment and materials being removed shall remain the property of the Owner. The Owner shall indicate which items, if any, are to be retained. Items to be salvaged and retained shall be removed, salvaged, cleaned and placed in a storage area designated by the Owner. All other material and equipment not wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly. • D. Accomplish all demolition using only mechanics skilled in the trade. If necessary, subcontract the work to meet this standard. If subcontracting is required, schedule the work to avoid delays or interruptions. E. During construction and remodeling, coordinate with the local fire chief and building officials for the correct procedures during the shut -down or modification of the fire sprinkler systems. Sprinkler system and alarms to remain functional. F. Schedule work in cooperation with the Owner's representatives to avoid disturbance or interruptions of the Owner's services and functions. Provide off -hours work or phasing of the project to meet this requirement. G. The Engineer has performed a field survey to ascertain existing site conditions. This survey was visual only and no attempt was made to verify exact conduit routing above ceilings or in walls. The Contractor shall thoroughly review demolition and construction Drawings and Specifications and be fully aware of design intent. Additional work required due to deviations found after ceilings and walls are opened up shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. H. Where insulation or fire proofmg on existing piping, equipment or structure is affected by the work shown or specified in theses documents, the Contractor shall not proceed until all materials have been verified not to contain asbestos. I. Contractor shall notify Engineer immediately upon discovering any mechanical equipment not shown on the Drawings that result in site conflicts. Part 2. — PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall disconnect and remove all mechanical items as required to allow for new construction as indicated on these plans and specifications. Mechanical items not reused shall be removed back to the mains and capped. Contractor shall perform all work required including concrete floor & wall saw cutting and excavating to gain access to mechanical systems serving or connected to the equipment being removed. Perform any work regarding the modification of the existing systems as required to complete the demolition. 101711 SNA201301 CD 22 00 20 - 1 04/18/13 All miscellaneous piping and accessories associated with equipment being removed, but not specifically noted on the drawings, shall also be removed. Contractor shall carefully remove all equipment scheduled for reinstallation. B. Where existing walls, floors or other portions of the building require patching or repair after removal of mechanical material or equipment, the work shall be the responsibility of this contractor. This contractor shall be responsible for notifying and coordinating with the General Contractor for all such work. C. In areas of removal, demolition, cutting, rigging or similar work, contractor shall exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the integrity of the structure and the safety of personnel. D. Provide all required temporary bracing, shoring, and support protective coverings and enclosures to prevent damage to existing facilities or danger to existing property or personnel during the work. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent damage from the elements or excessive heat loss. Provide dust -proof temporary enclosures (including above ceilings) to separate areas under demolition or construction from the remainder of the building. Provide temporary hinged doors on enclosures as necessary. Seal temporary and permanent doors between the work area and the rest of the building with tape or other suitable material during demolition and welding and until dust has settled. Provide temporary air filters for all air handlers that serve spaces in or adjacent to the work area. Provide new, clean filters at the completion of the work. E. Provide new plumbing clean-outs, tee and wye fittings to allow testing of new plumbing systems that are being connected to existing systems. F. Where demolition of mechanical systems creates an opening in a fire - resistive assembly scheduled to remain after new construction provide all required firestopping or sealing in accordance with IBC Chapter 7. END OF SECTION 101711 SNA201301 CD 22 00 20 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 22 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included under this Division shall consist of furnishing labor and materials necessary for the installation of the work called for under the Mechanical, Fire Sprinkler Protection, Temperature Control and Mechanical Test & Balance contracts as listed in the Instruction to Bidders, as specified, and as shown on Drawings to provide a complete, operable and approved system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The following is a partial list of related standards: 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE). 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 6. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 7. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI). 8. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.). 9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NEPA). 11. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI). 12. Steel Tank Institute (STI). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where equipment is specified by manufacturer, brand name or catalog number, this shall establish the standard of quality and style of the product to be provided under the Contract. B. Where two or more units of the same kind of equipment are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. Mixing and matching of various manufacturers' like or similar components shall not be permitted. C. The Contractor shall field verify and inspect existing buildings for connections to existing systems, equipment, and materials designated, on Drawings or in Specifications, to be used. D. The Contractor shall have full responsibility of component parts of the mechanical system to ensure that new equipment, integrated with existing equipment and systems, will perform and operate in accordance with requirements of the Specifications without excessive or unusual service or maintenance requirements. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying locations of such things as piping, ductwork, equipment, door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, etc., prior to the installation of any mechanical equipment. Installed mechanical work that interferes with the work of other trades shall be relocated by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Contractors shall coordinate with all other trades and install their systems in the space provided/coordinated within the structure. Install systems and materials for ease of maintenance. Equipment arrangements shall provide at least the minimum clearances as recommended by equipment manufacturer to facilitate proper maintenance and servicing of system. Deviations in minimum clearance requirements shall be permitted only upon prior written authorization from the Architect/Engineer. 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 00 50 -1 04/18/13 G. For project sites higher than 2000 feet or more above sea level, gas fired equipment shall be modified as required to maintain specified output. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS: A. Approved Manufacturers: 3M, Transco Products, Nelson Flameseal Systems, Tremco, Inc. B. Firestopping materials shall conform to local building code requirements and shall be tested according to UL 1479 and ASTME -814 for through- penetration firestop systems. C. Firestopping materials shall be fumished by a supplier who specializes in the selection and furnishing of firestopping materials for building systems. D. Submit shop drawings including a penetration protection schedule which lists each fire resistive construction type for this project, its fire rating, item penetrating and insulation (if any) UL through - penetration firestop systems number, manufacturer and model numbers. Include installation diagrams and product data sheet. E. Contractor shall submit all fire stopping methods to Local Authorities for approval. Provide copies of all approved fire stopping methods to the Engineer. Seal all penetrations and sleeves through floors and fire walls with high temperature, fire rated sealant. Fire stop material shall be 3M brand Fire Barrier Penetration System. In lieu of type system described above, modular component system shall be ProSet System Inc. may be utilized. Install the appropriate concrete or wood penetration system as required by code. 2.2 WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING OPENINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for exact sizes and locations of chases and openings required for mechanical work. B. Chases and Openings: 1. General Contractor shall leave chases and openings in walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions where shown on Drawings or otherwise necessary to receive mechanical work. It is this contractor's responsibility to coordinate sizes and locations prior to framing, pouring or setting of precast. 2.3 SLEEVES A. General Requirements: 1. Provide sleeves in conjunction with water tight piping passing through concrete or masonry walls, partitions, and slabs. Provide sleeves in mechanical equipment rooms and chases to prevent water flooding from floor to floor in addition to separating piping from building structure. 2. Sleeves shall extend 3" beyond the full thickness of walls and slabs and shall be at least 2 pipe diameters larger than or 2" larger than ducts piping passing through. Where piping with covering is installed, a minimum of 1" shall be provided between outside of pipe covering and inside surface of the sleeve. B. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Exterior Walls: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Install sleeves in exterior walls and floors below grade with approved caulking between sleeves and piping to make it waterproof. Plastic sleeves shall not be used. 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 00 50 -2 04/18/13 2. Floors: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Vertical pipe sleeves through floors shall have space between pipe and sleeve packed with an approved fire stop material flush with top of sleeve to make a watertight and fire rated joint. 3. Interior Sleeves: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Piping through walls of adjacent rooms shall have soundproof packing in non -rated walls and an approved fire stop material in fire rated walls. 4. Fire Rated Wall and Floor Openings: Piping passing through fire rated walls and floors shall be provided with an Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. listed pipe and pipe sleeve assembly. Pipe and pipe sleeve assembly shall meet or exceed fire rating of wall and floor which the pipe passes through. 5. Contractor shall provide all sleeves required through footings, foundation walls and floors. Underground water services as indicated on plans shall be sleeved with schedule 40 PVC sleeving. Sleeve to be (1) size larger than the pipe it serves. Extend sleeves 0' -3" beyond penetration. Coordinate with Structural Engineer. 2.4 ACCESS PANELS A. The Contractor shall provide means of access for all equipment valves and fittings specified. Furnish wall and ceiling access panels as required to the General Contractor for installation. Access doors and panels required within rated separations shall carry the appropriate rating. Conform to Division 8 access panel specifications. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. On -Site Review: Contractor shall visit site to become thoroughly acquainted with existing conditions of site and services. 2. Existing Active Services: When encountered during construction, Contractor shall protect, brace or support pneumatic tubing, existing active sewers, water, gas, ductwork, or other services, where required, for proper execution of Work 3. Inactive Services: If encountered during construction, Contractor, as appropriate, shall cap or plug inactive pipes, ducts, and temperature control tubing or wiring at no additional cost to Owner. 4. Responsibility: Liability for repairs or replacement of damaged or defective materials, including, but not limited to, property damage resulting from negligence or other causes, shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility until work has been accepted by Architect/ Engineer and Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: After delivery, and before and after installation, equipment shall be protected against theft or damage. 1. Contractor shall protect plumbing fixtures, metal heating enclosures and other equipment and all baked enamel or glazed surfaces from damage by covering or coating as recommended in Bulletin, "Handling and Care of Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures ", issued by Plumbing Fixture Manufacturers Association or by other methods approved by Architect/Engineer. 2. Coat polished or plate metal parts with vaseline immediately after installation. Protect equipment outlets, pipe and conduit openings with temporary plugs, caps or burlap as required to prevent fulling with construction dirt. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching shall be held to practical minimum consistent with good construction practice by properly locating and leaving sleeves and boxes, or notifying General Contractor of openings, where required, as construction progresses. All cutting and patching shall be done with the prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 00 50 -3 04/18/13 1. Necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions and ceilings, as required for the proper installation of work under this Contract, shall be the sole responsibility of this Contractor. Perform cutting and patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and to return the part affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Cutting and patching shall be performed by men experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. B. Pavements and Concrete: Cutting shall be accomplished by saw cutting a minimum of 1 '/ -inch deep prior to jack hammering. Contractor shall bore below the surface where indicated on Drawings or where required by Architect/Engineer. C. Repair. Patch pavements and concrete to match existing conditions. All labor and materials required to replace and repair sections cut or damaged shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Connection to Equipment Specified: Provide material and labor required to connect to the mechanical system of fixtures and equipment having mechanical connections and which are specified in other Sections or Divisions of the Specifications or furnished by Owner. 1. Provide piping supply connections with shut -off valves. 2. Drainage connections shall be properly trapped and vented. B. Mechanical Contractor shall provide angle iron stands for all gas fired equipment located on the same level or below any enclosed parking garage floor where the mechanical room opens to that same level. Stands shall elevate burners above 18" or as required by Local Code. This includes all water heaters, boilers, etc. Verify exact requirements with the Local Inspector prior to performing any fabrication. C. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: 1. Where uncovered exposed pipes pass through floors, walls or ceilings in finished rooms and inside casework, fit with approved type chrome plated metal plate. 2. Plastic escutcheon plates shall not be permitted. D. Chlorination of Domestic Water Lines: Contractor shall clean entire domestic water system in building, shall disinfect system in strict accordance with governing codes and State Health Department Requirements, and shall flush entire system clean with potable water. 1. The piping system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until no dirty water appears at the points of outlet. 2. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water - chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours. 3. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water - chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours. 4. Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable water until no chlorine remains in the water coming from the system. 5. Contractor shall provide written certification to Architect/Engineer that chlorination and flushing of domestic water system has been completed. E. Filtration: At time of substantial completion, and prior to turning equipment over to Owner, Contractor shall install a complete set of unused, clean filters in each type of unit supplying filtered air to the building. 3.5 CLEANING A. Housekeeping, Cleaning and Storage: Remove from the building and site, scrap material, temporary building, packaging material, miscellaneous debris, and dirt on a regular schedule, or as required, and in accordance with 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 00 50 -4 04/18/13 Architect/Engineer's direction, to maintain building in a reasonably clean, workable condition during construction. 1. Cutting oil and steel shavings shall be caught in a suitable container to ensure fmal finish material in building will not be marred or damaged. 2. Upon completion of work and before final inspection, Contractor shall remove plaster, paint, rust, stickers, and shipping tags from installed equipment. 3. Clean foreign matter from installed equipment and remove dirt and debris, in connection with work, from building. 3.6 PRE - OPERATIONAL SYSTEM CLEANOUT A. Pre- Cleaning Chemicals: New piping systems and appurtenances shall be cleaned with a one percent solution of Ferrosol 345, neutral pH cleaner, to remove any iron deposits, oil -based coatings, mill scale and construction residues. 1. Follow manufacturers' directions regarding equipment. END OF SECTION 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 00 50 -5 04/18/13 SECTION 22 05 00 TESTING AND BALANCING Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes testing, adjusting and balancing, plumbing and natural gas systems, measurement of final operating condition systems, sound measurement of equipment and vibration measurement of equipment during operating conditions. 1.2 REFERENCES • A. NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau). Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. B. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. C. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to fmal acceptance of Project. Provide fmal copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. D. Provide reports in bound manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. E. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and a copy of NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification prior to .commencing system balance. Part 2. - PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Domestic Water Systems: a. Pumps are rotating correctly. b. Proper strainers are clean and in place or in normal positions. c. Service and balance valves are open. B. Test and start-up all equipment supplied under this contract. 1. Provide all reports necessary to assure the Engineer and Owner that all functions of each piece of equipment have been thoroughly evaluated and deemed operable as designed. 2. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. 101711 SNA201301 CD 22 05 00 - 1 04/18/13 3. Permanently mark settings of valves and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. 4. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. 5. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 3.2 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Plumbing: 1. Defects: Contractor shall be responsible for defects which develop in the systems caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment and shall replace any such faulty workmanship, material or • equipment during a period of 1 year from date of final acceptance. Acceptance of the work shall not waive the guarantee. 2. Approval: Inspect and test plumbing work for approval by Architect/ Engineer or a designated representative. 3. Tests: Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer or a designated representative. Tests shall be made, at Contractor's expense, and a certification furnished to the Architect/Engineer stating that satisfactory tests have been made. 4. Piping: Tests of piping systems, except fmal test of complete systems, shall be made before piping is covered or connected to fixtures and equipment. Tests required shall not be less than as specified in the following paragraphs, unless designated otherwise in specific sections. a. Sanitary, waste and vent piping, inside the building shall be tested with air at 5 psi gauge pressure and shall hold this pressure for 15 minutes without addition of more air. b. Test Domestic water piping, tanks, valves and fittings with hydraulic pressure of 100 psig for a period of 24 hours. c. Test natural gas piping per 2003 International Fuel Gas Code, Chapter 4, Section 406. 1) Piping shall be tested at a pressure of 25 psig minimum for 30 minutes. 3.3 START - UP AND COMMISSIONING A. Following substantial completion, contractor shall return to the site on a quarterly basis including four (4) balancing/commissioning sessions. Commissioning shall consist of rebalancing both air and water side systems to the extent required to verify proper operation of all system components and controls. Balancing contractor shall coordinate with all trades including controls contractor to make required adjustments. END OF SECTION 101711 SNA201301 CD 22 05 00 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 22 07 00 INSULATION Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for plumbing piping and equipment. B. Definitions: 1. ASJ: All service jacket, white fmish facing or jacket. 2. Air conditioned space: Space directly supplied with heated or cooled air. 3. Cold: Equipment or piping handling media at design temperature of 60° F or below. 4. Concealed: Piping above ceilings and in chases and pipe spaces. 5. Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished areas or exposed to outdoor weather. 6. FSK: Foil- scrim - kraft facing. 7. Hot: Plumbing equipment or piping handling media above 105° F. 8. Density: Pcf - pounds per cubic foot. 9. Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials. 10. Flat surface: BTU per hour per square foot. 11. Pipe or Cylinder: BTU per hour per linear foot. 12. Thermal Conductivity (k): BTU per inch thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference. 13. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride vapor retarder jacketing, white. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUMMARY - A. Materials: 1. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, and/or facing and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation), fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM E -84, NFPA 225 and U /LI 723 not exceeding Flame Spread 25 and Smoke Developed 50. 2. Jacket and Facing Descriptions: a. All purpose vapor barrier jackets. b. VB vapor barrier, white kraft bonded to 1 mil aluminum foil, reinforced with glass yam. Water vapor permeability 0.02 perms. c. FSK reinforced foil and paper (Foil Scrim Kraft). Aluminum foil (minimum 0.75 mil thick) reinforced with fiberglass yard mesh and laminated to 40 lbs. chemically treated fire resistant Kraft UL rated. 3. Exterior Jacket: a. Venture Tape, Ventureclad 1557CW, (Alumaguard 60) 6 mil thickness, adhesive backed, aluminum fmish jacket otherwise with zero permeability, shall be capable of being applied down to -20 F. 2.2 PIPING A. Piping shall be insulated with Manville (IMCOA, Owens - Corning, Knauf) "FLAME SAFE" fiber glass insulation. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.22 BTU in. per sq. ft. per °F. hour at mean temperature of 75 °F. 082012 SNA201301 CD 22 07 00 - 1 04/18/13 B. Provide galvanized steel shields at all pipe hangers on insulated piping except hot water heating piping where pipes bear directly on the clevis. Shields shall be 16 gauge for pipes 4" and larger diameter and 20 gauge for smaller pipes. C. Exposed areas inside a building shall be furnished with factory applied "FLAME SAFE" A11- Purpose Vapor barrier jacket. D. All piping in concealed areas inside a building shall be provided with factory applied "FLAME SAFE" VB (Vapor Barrier Jacket or All- Purpose Jacket). E. All piping that is located outside and directly or indirectly exposed to the weather and is insulated, shall be totally enclosed and wrapped with a PVC pre - formed jacket. F. Fittings, valve bodies and flanges for pipe size 4" and smaller shall be provided with PVC jackets over fiberglass inserts. G. Armstrong (Rubatex, Halstead) Armaflex II flame retardant elastomeric thermal insulation, installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and as allowed by Local Codes, shall be suitable for pipe temperatures between -40° and 220 °. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL. A. All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry prior to the application of insulation. B. Provide continuous vapor barrier over all seams. 3.2 PIPING: A. On cold water piping all seam edges shall be additionally sealed with vapor barrier adhesive and ends wrapped with vapor barrier tape overlapped the adjacent jacket. B. Domestic Water, above 40 °F and Under 200 °F: 1. Apply fiberglass insulation to provide a K -value of 0.27. If the K -value of a product is less 0.22, then the thickness must be adjusted to have an equivalent R -value. Runout branches 2" in diameter and less (not exceed 12 feet length) to individual terminal units: 0.5 ". C. All fire sprinkler and domestic water piping within 15' of any exterior opening within the mechanical room shall be insulated with a minimum of 1" Fiberglass unless indicated otherwise in this specification section. D. On remodeling projects, all existing insulated piping that may have had its insulation removed as a result of new work shall be re- insulated to match existing. E. DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER PIPNG: 1. Domestic cold and hot water shall have fiberglass insulation in thickness as follows or per applicable State Energy Code, whichever is greater. 2. (0 °F - 130°F) a. 1/2" thru 2 " 1/2" b. No insulation required on 3/4" and smaller PEX piping. 3. (131 °F - 180° F): a. 1/2" thru 1 1/4" 1/2" 082012 SNA201301 CD 22 07 00 - 2 04/18/13 F. DOMESTIC RECIRCULATING HOT WATER: 1. (0 °F - 130°F) a. 1/2" thru 2 " 1/2" b. No insulation required on 3/4" and smaller PEX piping. 2. (131 °F - 180° F): a. 1/2" thru 1 1/4" 1/2" 3.3 JACKETS A. Foil and Paper Jackets: Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1 1/2" laps at longitudinal joints and 3 -inch -wide butt strips at end joints. 1. Seal openings, punctures and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with vapor barrier compound. 2. Install PVC fitting covers over insulated flanges, fittings and valves. B. Exterior Exposed Insulation: Install continuous PVC jackets and seal all joints and seams with waterproof sealant. C. Install the PVC jacket with 1" overlap at longitudinal and butt joints and seal with adhesive. • END OF SECTION 082012 SNA201301 CD 22 07 00 - 3 04/18/13 SECTION 22 10 00 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. All piping materials and methods of construction and workmanship shall be provided as per the requirements of local codes and regulations. 1. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 2. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability. B. Lead pipe, solders, flux, etc., are not allowed. C. The contractor is responsible for verifying all invert elevations with respect to building finished floor elevations and site provisions. Part 2. - PRODUCTS • 2.1. PIPING A. Below Grade Sanitary, Vent and Waste: 1. Bell and spigot (SV) cast iron piping and fittings conforming to ASTM A74 (latest edition), manufactured by either AB & I Foundry, Charlotte Pipe, New Age Costing or Tyler Pipe, bearing the raised trademark on the piping of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by N.S.F. International. For other Manufacturers, in addition to meeting the ASTM A74, they must also submit through the contractor the following records: (1) Radiation screening, (2) Chemical Testing Records for every 4 hours, (3) Mechanical Tensile testing for every 4 hours, (4) Dimensional Inspection records done every 12 hours and (5) Certification Letter from Manufacturer. The Contractor shall select 3 random dates for the afore mentioned tests. Provide Neoprene compression joints conforming to ASTM C564, latest revision. Pipe, fittings & gaskets to be installed per manufacturers recommendations. 2. Hubless cast iron pipe and fittings conforming to CISPI 301 and ASTM A888, (latest revision), manufactured by AB & I Foundry, Charlotte Pipe, or Tyler Pipe, New Age Costing, bearing the raised trademark on the piping of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by N.S. F. International. For other Manufacturers, in addition to meeting the ASTM A74, they must also submit through the contractor the following records: (1) Radiation screening, (2) Chemical Testing Records for every 4 hours, (3) Mechanical Tensile testing for every 4 hours, (4) Dimensional Inspection records done every 12 hours and (5) Certification Letter from Manufacturer. The Contractor shall select 3 random dates for the above mentioned tests. Provide Neoprene compression joints conforming to ASTM C564, latest revision. Pipe, fittings & gaskets to be installed per manufacturers recommendations. Contractor shall submit to engineer, pipe manufacturers the following records: (1) Radiation screening, (2) Chemical Testing Records for every 4 hours, (3) Mechanical Tensile testing for every 4 hours, (4) Dimensional Inspection records done every 12 hours and (5) Certification Letter from Manufacturer. The Contractor shall select 3 random dates for the afore mentioned tests. Provide Standard stainless steel couplings, manufactured by Husky, Anaco or Ideal conforming to ASTM C1277, latest revision, or with heavy duty stainless steel couplings (Husky /Anaco/Ideal) third party certifying to ASTM C 1540, latest revision. All cast iron pipe, fittings & couplings must be installed, supported & restrained using the installation procedures detailed in ASTM C 1277 or ASTM C 1540, whichever applies. 3. PVC Schedule 40, ASTM D2665 -04a with mechanical ring, or fusion or solvent cement. Piping shall be laid on a continuous granular bed and installed per ASTM D2321. B. Above Grade Sanitary, Vent and Waste: 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 1 04/18/13 1. Bell and spigot (SV) cast iron piping and fittings conforming to ASTM A74, (latest revision) bearing trademark of Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by N.S.F. International. For other Manufacturers, in addition to meeting the ASTM A74, they must also submit through the contractor the following records: (1) Radiation screening, (2) Chemical Testing Records for every 4 hours, (3) Mechanical Tensile testing for every 4 hours, (4) Dimensional Inspection records done every 12 hours and (5) Certification Letter from Manufacturer. The Contractor shall select 3 random dates for the afore mentioned tests. Provide Neoprene compression joints conforming to ASTM C564, latest revision. Pipe, fittings & gaskets to be installed per manufacturers recommendations with neoprene compression joints conforming to ASTM C564, latest revision. Pipe, fittings & gaskets to be installed per the manufacturers recommendations. 2. Hubless cast iron pipe and fittings conforming to CISPI 301 Standards and ASTM A888, (latest revision), bearing trademark of Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by N.S.F. International. For other Manufacturers, in addition to meeting the ASTM A74, they must also submit through the contractor the following records: (1) Radiation screening, (2) Chemical Testing Records for every 4 hours, (3) Mechanical Tensile testing for every 4 hours, (4) Dimensional Inspection records done every 12 hours and (5) Certification Letter from Manufacturer. The Contractor shall select 3 random dates for the afore mentioned tests. Provide Neoprene compression joints conforming to ASTM C564, latest revision. Pipe, fittings & gaskets to be installed per manufacturers recommendations with standard stainless steel couplings (Husky /Anaco), conforming to ASTM C1277, latest revision, or with heavy duty stainless steel couplings (Husky /Anaco), conforming to ASTM C1540, latest revision. All cast iron pipe, fittings & couplings must be installed, supported & restrained using the installation procedures detailed in ASTM C 1277 or ASTM C 1540, whichever applies. 3. PVC Schedule 40, ASTM D2665 -04c with mechanical ring, or fusion or solvent cement. 4. ABS Schedule 40, ASTM D2661 -02. Pipe and corresponding fitting installed per code limitations. 5. PVC Schedule 80 threaded, ASTM D2665. Pipe and corresponding fittings, installed per code limitations. 6. Plastic piping shall not be used in air plenum spaces. 7. Pressurized waste discharge (i.e. sump pumps, sewage ejectors, etc.) shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel. C. Above Grade Domestic Water Piping: 1. Type "L" seamless hard temper copper tubing with wrought copper fittings, using 95/5 solder or brazing. 2. Type "L" seamless grooved copper tube with copper -tube dimensioned grooved copper couplings and fittings. a. Fittings shall be ASME B 16.22 wrought copper or ASME B16.18 cast bronze, with copper -tube dimensioned grooved ends. Victaulic Copper - Connection. b. Couplings shall be installation -ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing segments cast with offsetting angle -pattern bolt pads, Grade EHP gasket rated to +250 F, and zinc electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Victaulic Style 607. c. System shall be manufactured to copper -tube dimensions. (Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted.) 3. Type "L" or "M" hard copper tube with Victaulic Permalynx fittings for 1 -1/2" and smaller fittngs and valves for domestic water services to 200 psig CWP. 4. Type "M" seamless copper hard and soft temper ANSI -H23.1 with wrought copper fittings using 95/5 solder or brazing. Type "M" shall not be used on domestic hot water circulating systems. 5. Viega Pro -Press system may be used on type L and M hard copper tubing, sizes 'h" to 4" and soft copper tubing in' h" to 1 ''4 ". System shall be approved for up to 200 psi operating pressure and 250 °F for joining copper tubing. Viega Pro -Press shall only be used on piping system containing fluids and gases as indicated in the manufacturers approved listing. All application shall include the proper factory standard or field installed specialty seals. 6. Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC): Manufactured from Type IV Grade I CPVC compound with a cell classification of per ASTM D1784 of 24448 for pipe materials and 23447 for fitting materials. CPVC pipe and fittings shall be certified by NSF International for use with potable water. 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 2 04/18/13 a. Pipe and fittings 2" and smaller: (1) Pipe and fittings shall be copper tube size (CTS) SDR 11 and shall meet or exceed ASTM D2846. (2) The maximum water design velocity shall be 8fl. /sec. (3) Pipe and fittings: FlowGuard Gold, Charlotte Pipe. b. All socket type joints shall be made with solvent cements and primers shall meet or exceed current ASTM standards. Solvent cement and primer shall be listed by NSF International for use with potable water and approved for use with pipe and fittings manufacturer. c. Provide smooth pipe supports and bracing to allow for expansion and contraction. Spaced per manufacturer's recommendations. d. Installation shall be by a factory trained installer per manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide Owner with minimum of 5 year manufacturer's warranty. e. Plastic piping shall not be used in air plenum spaces. 7. Cross Linked Polyethylene (PEX) (for branch run -outs only): Manufactured in the PEX -A Engel Method by Wirsbo, Uponor, Watts Water PEC, Nibco or Viega PEX Ultra. a. Contractor to formally submit product/installation package to local jurisdiction prior to bid, based on Minnesota Plumbing Code Section 4715.0330. b. Piping shall meet or exceed ASTM F876 -04 and ASTM F877 -02a and be certified by NSF International for use with potable water. Piping shall be rated at 100 psi at 130 F. c. Fittings shall be PEX -A cold expansion type manufactured to meet or exceed current ASTM standards and by certified by NSF International for use with potable water. Provide color coded rings. d. Manifolds shall be provided with appropriate sized fittings on manifold supply outlets. e. Provide angle stops, straight stops, bend supports, clips and/or pex rails as supplied by tubing manufacturer for supporting tubing. Support piping every 2' -8 ". f. Piping installed in plenum ceilings shall be maximum of 3 / <" size. Individual piping shall maintain an 18" minimum spacing. Bundled piping is not acceptable. g. Installation shall be by a factory trained installer per manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide Owner with 25 year manufacture's warranty. h. Shall not be used on systems exceeding 130°F. i. Pex piping shall not be in contact with any other uninsulated piping. j. Plastic piping shall not be used in air plenum spaces. D. Domestic Hot Water Circulation: 1. Type "L" seamless hard temper copper tubing with wrought copper fittings, using 95/5 solder or brazing. 2. Type "L" seamless grooved copper tube with grooved copper fittings and couplings. a. Fittings shall be ASME B 16.22 wrought copper or ASME B16.18 cast bronze, with copper -tube dimensioned grooved ends. Victaulic Copper - Connection. b. Couplings shall be installation- ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing segments cast with offsetting angle -pattern bolt pads, Grade EHP gasket rated to +250 F, and zinc electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Victaulic Style 607. c. System shall be manufactured to copper -tube dimensions. (Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted.) 3. Viega Pro -Press system may be used on type L and M hard copper tubing, sizes '/z" to 4" and soft copper tubing in' 'A" to 1 '/o ". System shall be approved for up to 200 psi operating pressure and 250 °F for joining copper tubing. Viega Pro -Press shall only be used on piping system containing fluids and gases as indicated in the manufacturers approved listing. All application shall include the proper factory standard or field installed specialty seals. 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 3 04/18/13 4. Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC): Manufactured from Type IV Grade I CPVC compound with a cell classification of per ASTM D1784 of 24448 for pipe materials and 23447 for fitting materials. CPVC pipe and fittings shall be certified by NSF International for use with potable water. a. Pipe and fittings 2" and smaller: (1) Pipe and fittings shall be copper tube size (CTS) SDR 11 and shall meet or exceed ASTM D2846. (2) The maximum water design velocity shall be 8ft. /sec. (3) Pipe and fittings: FlowGuard Gold, Charlotte Pipe. b. All socket type joints shall be made with solvent cements and primers shall meet or exceed current ASTM standards. Solvent cement and primer shall be listed by NSF International for use with potable water and approved for use with pipe and fittings manufacturer. c. Provide smooth pipe supports and bracing to allow for expansion and contraction. Spaced per manufacturer's recommendations. d. Installation shall be by a factory trained installer per manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide Owner with minimum of 5 year manufacturer's warranty. 5. Plastic piping shall not be used in air plenum spaces 6. Cross Linked Polyethylene (PEX): Manufactured in the PEX -A Engel Method by Wirsbo, Uponor, Watts Water PEX, Nibco or Viega PEX Ultra. a. Contractor to formally submit product/installation package to local jurisdiction prior to bid. b. Piping shall meet or exceed ASTM F876 -04 and ASTM F877 -02a and be certified by NSF International for use with potable water. Piping shall be rated at 100 psi at 160 °F. c. Fittings shall be PEX -A cold expansion type manufactured to meet or exceed ASTM F 1960 -04 and by certified by NSF International for use with potable water. d. Provide angle stops, straight stops, bend supports, clip and/or pex rails as supplied by tubing manufacturing for supporting tubing. Support piping every 2' -8 ". Bending piping is not acceptable. e. Installation shall be by a factory trained installer per manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide Owner with 25 year manufacture's warranty. f. Shall not be used on systems exceeding 160°F. g. Pex piping shall not be in contact with any other uninsulated piping. h. Plastic piping shall not be used in air plenum spaces. E. Rigid Natural Gas Piping: 1. Inside Building: a. Schedule 40 black steel with threaded fittings, ASTM A 53 /ASTM A 53M -04a. b. Type L seamless soft copper, ASTM B 88 -03 and copper fittings. Copper piping shall not be used if the gas contains more than an average of 0.3 grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100 standard cubic of gas. 2. In Ceiling Air Plenum: a. Schedule 40 black steel with standard weld butt fittings. b. Type L seamless soft copper and copper fittings. Copper piping shall not be used if the gas contains more than an average of 0.3 grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100 standard cubic of gas. c. All welded or brazed connections in air plenum ceilings and concealed spaces. Use no valves, threads, unions or connectors in these locations. Concealed gas piping in solid partitions shall be inside a Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeve capped at both ends and vented outside the building. 3. Inside Mechanical Room: Schedule 40 black steel with threaded fittings. 4. Exterior Underground (2 psig or less): 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 4 04/18/13 a. PE (polyethylene) plastic and shall be marked "gas" and "ASTM D 2513 -04a" and shall be used with factory assembled steel riser. b. Type L seamless soft copper, ASTM B 88 -03 shall be used with factory assembled steel riser. Copper piping shall not be used if the gas contains more than an average of 0.3 grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100 standard cubic of gas. 5. Exterior Aboveground: a. Schedule 40 steel, black, welded and seamless with threaded fittings, ASTM A 53. b. Schedule 40 steel, hot dipped zinc - coated (galvanized welded and seamless with threaded fittings, ASTM A 53. 2.2 VALVES A. Acceptable Valve Manufacturers: 1. Apollo, Titan FCI, Milwaukee, Victaulic, Nibco, Watts, Mueller, Hammond, Griswold, Gruvlok. B. Gate Valves — Domestic Water Piping: 1. 2 inches and Smaller: Milwaukee Figure 1152 or Hammond Figure IB 617, 125 pound bronze bodied valve with screwed end connections. The solid style disc and bonnet shall also be bronze, and the rising -type stem shall be copper - silicon alloy. C. Check Valves — Domestic Water Piping: 1. 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Milwaukee Figure 509/Hammond Figure IB 904, 150 pound bronze, screwed ends, bronze disc, swing check. 2. Non -Slam Check Valves - 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Clow Figure 329, 125 pound wafer type check valves with EPDM inserts. 3. Non -Slam Check Valves - 3 inches and Larger: Mueller Steam Specialty 105 MAPS, Titan FCI CJ50- DI-DBS, 125 pound globe style check valves with EPDM inserts. 4. Non -Slam Check Valves - 2 -1/2 through 12 inches: Victaulic Series 716, 300 psig spring - actuated check valve, with stainless steel spring and shaft, for horizontal or vertical installation. a. For sizes 14 through 24 inches, valves shall be Victaulic Series W715, rated to 230 psig, with stainless steel spring, shaft, and dual disc(s), and EPDM seat. D. Bali Valves — Domestic Water Piping: 1. 3" and smaller for domestic water: Milwaukee BA 475/485 two piece full port forged brass body 600 WOG chrome plated ball, blow out proof stem, reinforced PTFE seats and where necessary, extended stems for insulation conforming to NSF 61 for potable water. • a. In the Victaulic Permalynx system, valves shall be Victaulic PL -300, rated to 200 psig CWP. 2. Grooved End Ball Valves: 1 -1/2" and Larger, for heating and domestic water service with steel piping systems, Victaulic Series 726 two -piece ductile iron body with chrome- plated steel or stainless steel standard port ball, blow out proof stem, PTFE seats, and lever handle or gear operator as required. 2.3 FLOW FITTINGS/BALANCE VALVE A. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Bell & Gossett, Nibco, Mueller, Victaulic/TA Hydronics, Gruvlok. 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 5 04/18/13 B. Bell & Gossett "Circuit Setter" or Victaulic /TA Hydronics balance valve. All bronze/brass ball or copper - alloy /ductile iron globe type construction with memory stop and integral valved read -out ports. Provide metal identification tags indicating location, size, GPM and meter reading. 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Acceptable backflow preventer Manufacturers: 1. Watts, Conbraco, Febco, Ames, Lawler, Hersey, Wilkins, Apollo. B. Contractor shall verify the availability of testing agency for reduced pressure zone backflow preventers in project area. C. Carbonator for Beverage Dispensers and Coffee Machines - Watts #9BD- continuous pressure, low hazard and double check valve. 2.5 GAS VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Apollo, Siemens, Asco, Backmann, Milwaukee, Hammond, Velan, Homestead. • B. 2" and Smaller: Milwaukee B 475 threaded forged brass two piece ball valve with chrome plated ball, blowout, blowout proof stem and reinforced PTFE seats in accordance with UL -MHKZ (600 #) CSA 3371 - 08/CSA3371-88 (1/2 #), CSA 3371 -92 /CSA 3371 -12 (5 #), CSA 3371 -94 (125 #). Provide stem extensions where required. C. Provide a natural gas pressure regulator shall be Maxitrol to reduce gas pressure to an acceptable limit at gas fired equipment. See plans for gas company meter outlet pressure. See mechanical equipment schedule for required capacities and operational manuals for pressure limits. Provide with code approved pressure limiting device or pipe pressure regulating valve relief vent individually to the outside. Verify with the local code authorities. D. Gas Solenoid Valves: Asco #K3A415, approved UL rated automatic gas shutoff valves. Normally closed, 24 volt with manual reset, sized to match gas piping service to equipment. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES: A. Drain Valves- Domestic Water Piping: 1. Nibco #C56 -VB,4" male thread, tee handle and vacuum breaker. 2. Apollo Series 78 -100 ball valve, 600 pound, bronze body, chrome plated brass ball and blow -out proff brass stem, reinforced Teflon seals and seats and 3/4" hose thread outlet with cap. 3. Domestic water drains shall be equipped with vacuum breakers. 2.7 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Nibco, National Pipe Hangers, Empire Industries, L.C. Penner, U.S. Plastic. B. Hangers shall adequately support the piping system and shall be installed to allow for expansion and contraction. Insulation shall be continuous and jackets shall be sealed tight at hangers. Provide neoprene rubber or rubber coated pad where uninsulated pipes rest on hangers. C. Thoroughly and substantially support all piping from approved hangers. The design, selection, spacing and application of horizontal pipe hangers, supports, restraints, anchors and guides shall be in accordance with 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 6 04/18/13 applicable standards. The power Piping Code ANSI B31.1 shall take precedence over the MSS SP -69 Standard. D. Support horizontal piping with adjustable clevis hangers with locking nuts above and below the clevis. On insulated pipe where the hanger comes in contact with the piping, use a clevis hanger. Provide copper plated hangers to support copper piping where the hanger comes in contact with the piping. E. Support horizontal piping subject to expansion with adjustable roller hangers. F. All vertical pipes not specified to be supported on vibration isolation hangers shall be supported as follows: 1. Support vertical pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller at every floor level using riser clamps. If vertical pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller pass through slabs above fmished areas, encase them in a watertight riser sleeve, shall be Grinnell Figure 405. 2. Support vertical pipes 10 inches through 16 inches in diameter at every floor using six bolt riser clamps. 3. Support vertical pipes 18 inches in diameter and larger at every floor using structural steel channels and gussets welded to the pipe. Structural steel supports shall be provided under Division 15 and shall be designed by a registered structural engineer. G. Provide threaded steel hanger rods, sized and installed as recommended by the hanger manufacturer for the intended service. H. Support horizontal piping with maximum spacing between supports as noted. 1. Steel and Copper Nominal pipe Distance Between Rod Diameter Size (In.) Hanger (Ft.) (In.) 'h to l '/ 6 3/8 l to l 1/2 8 3/8 2 &2'h 10 1/2 3 & 4 12 5/8 2. Plastic pipe, 32 -inch intervals except where conveying waste from dishwashers or similar hot water wastes it shall be supported on continuous metal or wood strips for its entire length. I. Above grade horizontal plastic, waste and vent piping shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 2' -8 ". J. Provide additional supports for valves or other concentrated loads between the regularly spaced supports. K. Except where trapeze hangers are used to support piping, all piping and ductwork shall be individually supported. Do not support ducts or pipes from other pipes, ducts, equipment or conduit. L. Install hangers to provide a minimum of inch clear space between finished pipe insulation and any adjacent work. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. Use hangers which provide at least 1 '/2 inches of vertical adjustment after the piping is erected. M. Support horizontal soil pipe near each hub with no more than 5 feet of spacing between hangers. N. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical soil pipe at each floor and at each hub. O. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 7 04/18/13 P. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be large enough to encompass the insulation and the metal protection shields, except that hangers may be applied directly to the pipe for domestic hot water and rainwater piping systems. Q. Provide hanger spreaders on all hangers for pipes 4 inches in diameter and larger. R. Insulation Protection at Pipe Hangers. 1. On hot piping, where the hanger is specified to fit outside of the pipe insulation, provide a piece of calcium silicate insulation between the bottom half (180 °) of the piping and the hanger, with fiberglass insulation on the upper half. The calcium silicate section shall be 2 inches longer than the metal shield beneath it. 2. Provide a metal shield between the insulation and the hanger which is galvanized steel, 16 gauge for piping smaller than 4 inches, 14 gauge for piping 4 inches and larger. The metal shield shall span an arc of 180 °. The lengths of the shields shall be as follows: Pipe Size Shield Length Up to 6" 12" 8 " -12" 16" 3. On cold piping, install a wooden block between the piping and each hanger. The insulation jacketing shall be sealed continuously around these blocks, just as for the rest of the insulation system. S. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide Metraflex, Model HP axial expansion compensators rated for minimum 150psi working pressure. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexicraft, Hyspan, Duraflex, Microflex, Flexonics. 2. Provide additional expansion joints and offsets for excessive expansion in plastic piping. 3. Installation of piping and expansion products shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Part 3. - EXECUTION • 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide offsets and transitions to plumbing, hydronic and steam piping due to existing structure and trades work. B. Slope water piping 1" per 40' and arrange to drain at all low points. C. Provide all appropriate sanitary piping fittings, wyes and bends. No double -wye fittings for sanitary drainage in horizontal position shall be used. • D. Vent pipes passing through roofs shall terminate at least 12" above the roof line. E. Above grade plastic drain and vent piping horizontal and vertical runs cannot exceed 35 feet. Solvent welds shall be done with a contrasting primer to the color of the pipe and cement. Plastic piping shall not be installed in air plenum spaces including parking garage area. F. Provide shut -off valves as required by Code and good installation practice for the proper isolation of equipment. All branch take offs shall have isolation shut off valves. Provide extended stem valves where required for insulation. Except as otherwise specified or shown on plans, valves 2 -1/2 inch and smaller shall have screwed end connections and valves 3 inch and larger shall have grooved end or flange end construction. Install manual drain valves at every low point of each water piping system. G. Mechanical formed tees connections as created by T -Drill shall be formed in a continuous operation consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the surface to form a collar having a height of not less than three times the thickness of the tube wall. Branch tube shall not obstruct the flow in the main line tube. All 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 8 04/18/13 joints shall be brazed in accordance with the Copper Development Association. Soft soldered joints will not be permitted. Mechanical formed connections shall be listed by the National Standard Plumbing Code, B.O.C.A., LA.M.P.O., S.B.C.C., H.U.D., U.S. Army corps of Engineers, Underwriters Laboratory, ASME Code for Pressure Piping and shall be acceptable to governing authorities. H. All threaded nozzle fixtures to have atmospheric vacuum breakers. I. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. The grooved coupling manufacturer's factory trained representative shall provide on -site training for contractor's field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor's representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s). J. Installation of cross connection control devices and related valves shall maintain 1' -6" clear from wall or other obstructions, no more than 5' -0" above floor or closer than 2' -0" from floor. K. Provide escutcheon plates at all wall, floor, or ceiling piping penetrations. This includes all mechanical piping systems. Escutcheon plates shall match the finish of the surrounding area. L. Exposed PVC venting through roof shall be painted at the discretion of the Architect. M. Provide a dielectric coupling or waterway fitting at all connections of dissimilar metals. Provide adequate clearance for insulation and for access to valves. All piping shall be concealed and shall maintain proper • clearances for ceilings, ducts, walls, lighting, etc. except that piping may be exposed in mechanical areas. At all fixture and equipment connections where nipples are necessary between copper fixtures and tubing, such nipples shall be full size brass nipples with brass or copper adapters. N. Ream pipe ends to remove burrs. Make joints smooth and unobstructed inside. Remove any obstructions or debris inside piping, blowing it out with compressed air or otherwise cleaning it internally immediately prior to assembly. O. Provide shut -off valve for all gas fired equipment. Locate valve in an easily accessible location. P. Push -to- Connect Joints: Install Pennalynx joints in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. Prepare and mark tubing ends using a tool supplied by the manufacturer and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Q. Install Vic -Press 304TM in accordance with Victaulic recommendations. Pipe shall be certified for use with the Vic -Press 3�4TM system, square cut ( +1- 0.030 "), properly deburred, and cleaned. Pipe ends shall be - marked with a gauge supplied by Victaulic. Use a Victaulic `PFT' series tool with the proper sized jaw for pressing. R. Enclose the backwater valves in a tile pipe to allow access to the valve cover. Install suitable secured cover, flush with floor. S. Provide 1/2" ethafoam on all above grade vertical piping to all pipes and slab movement at wood floor penetrations. T. Contractor shall comply with the CISPI Guide Lines Manual when installing piping. U. Provide cleanouts where all sanitary and storm piping are connected to existing piping to facilitate testing as required. END OF SECTION 031813 SNA201301 CD 22 10 00 - 9 04/18/13 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to provide a complete plumbing and fuel system for all fixtures and equipment shown on drawings. Contractor shall rough -in and make final connections to all fixtures and appliances supplied by others. B. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer's installation instructions prior to installing any piece of equipment or its associated services, (domestic drains, water piping, etc.). Any conflicts between the manufacturer's installation instructions and the plans or specification shall be brought to the engineer at once for clarification. Contractor will not receive additional money for installations requiring modifications due to these conflicts. C. All plumbing systems and products shall meet State and Local codes as well as ASNI, ASME and ADA requirements regardless of information shown within the documents. D. This contractor shall provide a complete installation manual for each piece of equipment requiring electrical power /control connections scheduled to be performed by the Electrical contractor. This shall be done prior to any rough -ins by them to insure the proper power /control wiring has been provided. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies between the installation manuals and the electrical plans and specifications for each piece of equipment. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Miscellaneous Plumbing Equipment: 1. Carriers for wall hung water closets, urinals and lavatories: a. Provide commercial grade carrier of approved style. Verify with General Contractor for type of wall construction and space prior to ordering carriers. 2. Fittings, Trim and Accessories: a. Install stop and escutcheon for each supply pipe, trap and escutcheon for each waste pipe and vacuum breaker supplied with hose attachments or integral with flush valve, or where water connection is below spill line of fixture. 3. Water Closet Seats: a. Residences (Single Free Standing Home, Townhomes, Condo's): Church seat, round #300TC, residential grade solid plastic, closed front with cover and molded -in bumpers. b. Apartments (Senior Housing) (Hotel/Motels): Church seat, #135TT, elongated seat, solid plastic open front with [without] cover and molded -in bumpers. c. Public or Staff used Restrooms: Church seat, #295C elongated seat, solid plastic, open front, concealed stainless steel check hinges, molded -in bumpers and without cover. B. Fixtures: 1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: a. Electric water coolers: Elkay, Halsey Taylor, Oasis, Sunroc, Haws, Acom Aqua. b. Stainless Steel Counter Sinks: Elkay, Just, LaCrosse, Dayton, Moen, Sterling, Advance - Tabco, Franke. Kitchen Sinks 2. Kitchen Sink (P -4): Elkay #PSR -3321 20 gauge type 302 stainless steel, self-rimming sink. Size 33" x 21" x 7 1/2" deep with double compartment, sound deadening undercoat, chrome cup strainers. a. Trim: Delta 400 Series, single lever, solid brass chrome faucet with 8" swing spout, 2 gpm aerator, and separate spray attachment. Provide all required accessories. 040913 SNA201301 CD 22 40 00 - 1 04/18/13 b. Food Waste Disposer (D -1): As indicated on the mechanical equipment schedule. Provide all required accessories. c. 1 1/2" waste, 1 1/4" vent, 1/2" hot water and 1/2" cold water. Water Coolers 3. Water Cooler - single unit (P -7) (ADA): Elkay EZ -8, Gray Beige Vinyl Cabinet, wall mounted with all stainless steel top and spring retum front push bar water control, rated at 8.0 gpm, flexiguard safety bubbler. a. 1 1/2" waste, 1 1/4" vent and 1/2" cold water. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All exposed piping, supplies and stop valves shall be chrome plated brass unless indicated otherwise. No stops with internal supply lines and no plastic stop valves. Traps shall include chrome plated cast brass with clean-outs however, standard PVC traps for non -food service plumbing fixtures may be installed in non -rated walls. All water supplies to each fixture shall have chrome stop valves. Floor mounted water closets shall be connected using a cast iron floor flange and ring putty or gaskets. Wax gaskets are not acceptable for wall hung fixtures. Provide adequate supports and reinforcing for all wall hung fixtures, valves and shower heads. Install all fixtures rigid, plumb and true. B. Grout and caulk all fixtures with water and mildew resistant white epoxy shall be Hydroment or Dow Coming No. 786. Grout shall not exceed 1/4" width and shall be installed flush with finished wall or floor. C. All fixture installation dimensions shall be determined from the Architectural documents. Plumbing fixture colors to be selected by Architect. D. P -Traps and water supplies insulate per ADA, ANSI and Minnesota Accessibility. E. Controls for flushing water closets shall be mounted on the wide or most accessible side of the water closet. F. Provide locking style valves in any lines serving an emergency eyewash or shower. END OF SECTION 040913 SNA201301 CD 22 40 00 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Mechanical Division. B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Mechanical Division work. No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits. C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers. D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the Architect/Engineer. E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Mechanical Division and prior to final close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100% complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at final inspection shall be immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer. F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be directly credited to the Owner. 1.2 MECHANICAL PLANS A. The Mechanical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the mechanical work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other. Any item shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be considered as shown and specified on both. B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to the Engineer's attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and operational mechanical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these Specifications. C. Drawings: 1. Contractor shall familiarize themselves with Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred spaces, suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc. 2. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all piping and ductwork within soffits provided by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically approved by the Architect and Engineer. 3. Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate location only. Placement of mechanical equipment and devices shall not interfere with locations or clearances of other trades' materials or equipment. 4. Contractor shall verify locations with architectural elevations. 5. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in the field. 6. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit within the available space. 081512 SNA201301 CD 23 00 10 - 1 04/18/13 7. Notify the Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical, Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. 8. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before installing any mechanical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with other trade's work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows: 1. Contractor: Shall mean Mechanical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Mechanical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with Contract Documents and deliver to site in new, undamaged condition. 4. Connect: Shall mean to bring mechanical service and/or control wiring to equipment, make all final connections, provide all necessary miscellaneous materials required and do final check out to ensure proper equipment connections. 5. Install: Shall mean to store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, connect, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating condition. 6. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install. E. CAD and Drawing Files: 1. Mechanical CAD drawings prepared by Steen Engineering, Inc. for this Project are instruments of Steen Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this Project. During the course of the implementation of the Project, and with Steen Engineering, Inc. approval, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the preparation of Shop Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other projects, for additions to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others. Any revisions, • additions and/or deletions to these CAD drawings, either intentional or unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of the person(s) making such revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s) shall hold harmless and indemnify Steen Engineering, Inc. of any and all responsibilities and liabilities. 2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be requested directly from the Architect. 1.3 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS A. For typical or repetitive HVAC unit installations, contractor shall schedule an inspection with local and/or state AHJ to review a complete mock -up example installation and receive approval prior to proceeding with additional installations. Installation shall meet all code and manufacturer's service clearance requirements. Contractor shall coordinate installation and subsequent inspection with general contractor and any related trades. B. Contractor shall submit a '/ -inch scale drawing to the Engineer indicating placement of all mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. Indicate proposed locations of all major equipment and materials, including but not limited to service equipment, exterior wall and foundation penetrations, fire -rated wall and floor penetrations, sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases, and mechanical/electrical equipment room layouts. This effort will require each trade to closely work together to produce a '1/4-inch set of coordination drawings for each area of the building. C. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work. D. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials: 1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein. 081512 SNA201301 CD 23 00 10 - 2 04/18/13 2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail. 3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the complete mechanical installation. 4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, the Contractor shall provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade practice. 5. Supply materials and equipment to the site in original packages, containers or crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule deliveries in accordance with the overall Project schedule. The Contractor shall closely coordinate all deliveries with other Contractors and the Engineer. 6. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage, and protection from the elements for all materials and • equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by Contractor as required by the Engineer. 7. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior to fmal inspection and contract close out. 8. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type of material. Equipment shall be UL listed as an entire assembly or system. B. Prior Approvals: 1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details of the Specifications. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the use of substituted products or equipment, including all additional labor and materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Within fifteen days after the award of the Contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall submit shop drawings on all major mechanical equipment to the Architect for approval. Shop Drawings shall be submitted by the Mechanical Contractor, not their Subcontractors. These shop drawings shall cover such items as boilers, chillers, pumps, fittings, valves, plumbing fixtures, dampers, AHUs, fmtube, exhaust fans, MUAs, diffusers, water heaters, water softeners, fire protection, etc. The Contractor shall thoroughly review each item for compliance with these Specifications making any necessary corrections prior to submittal. Each shop drawing set shall be stamped, signed and dated indicating Contractor review. If the Contractor fails to properly review shop drawings, the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer for all additional reviews on a time and material basis. No equipment shall be released for shipment or installed prior to fmal approval by the Engineer. B. The Engineer will review all Shop Drawings submitted and will retain one copy for record file. C. Approval Stamp: This review is to verify general conformance with the design concept of the Project and substantial compliance with the information provided in the Contract Documents. This review does not in any way relieve the Contractor or their suppliers of their responsibility to provide all materials and equipment as specified, in quantities, quality and dimensions required. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: 081512 SNA201301 CD 23 00 10 - 3 04/18/13 1. "No Exception Taken" indicates that the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. 2. "Make Noted Corrections" indicates that the Submittal, after noted corrections are made, appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. 3. "Revised and Resubmit" indicates that the noted revisions are such that a corrected copy of the Submittal is required for review to confirm that the noted revisions have been understood and made. The Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation after submitting a corrected copy and verifying with the reviewer that the corrected copy is acceptable, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in the Contract Sum or Time. 4. "Rejected" indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, a resubmission is required and fabrication or procurement is not authorized. D. If the Engineer rejects (Revised and Resubmit or Rejected) the same section two times the engineer shall be compensated for additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and will be deducted from the Contractor's application for payment. Contractor is responsible for all delays caused by the resubmittal process. E. Provide samples of materials or equipment proposed to be furnished, if requested. Samples shall become the property of the Architect/Engineer and will be returned only when accompanied by a written request to do so. F. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain an "As Built" set of bluelines on site, neatly notating routing, location or other field changes to the Contract Documents. Upon Project completion and prior to final close out, turn the "As Built" drawings over to the Owner. Provide a detailed transmittal indicating each sheet and other information turned over to the Owner and acquire their representative's signature. This information shall be included at the project close out. 1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality workmanship will be accepted. B. The Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all Contractor generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner any interruptions necessary to existing systems prior to shut down. D. Coordination: 1. Contractor shall give careful consideration to work of other Contractors on the Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor's '/" coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other trades. 2. This Contractor shall provide a complete installation manual to the Electrical Contractor for each piece of equipment requiring electrical power /control connections scheduled to be performed by the Electrical Contractor. This shall be done prior to any rough -ins by the Electrical Contractor to insure proper power /control wiring has been provided. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies between the installation manuals, the electrical plans and the mechanical specifications for each piece of equipment. 3. Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and Specifications that apply for correlating information. 4. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation. 5. Should the Mechanical Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that interferes with work of other Contractors, the Mechanical Contractor shall make all necessary changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or conflict at the Mechanical Contractor's expense. E. Protection of Equipment: 081512 SNA201301 CD 23 00 10 - 4 04/18/13 1. Until final acceptance of the work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for the safety, good condition, and protection from damage of all materials and equipment installed. 2. If, during shipment or installation, the finish of equipment becomes chipped or scratched, the Contractor shall touch up or refinish surfaces to match original finish. F. The Contractor shall complete all safety forms required by General Contractor. 1.7 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State where the project is being constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required for each type of work covered under these Drawings and Specifications. • B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for the permanent services. C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national, state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Mechanical Contractor to meet all state and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of final inspection and approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals to the Owner prior to fmal close out. O &M manuals shall consist of approved shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment. O &M manuals shall be neatly bound in 3 -ring binders, contain an index and section tabs and be labeled with the Project name. B. Name, address, and telephone number of each Contractor installing equipment and systems, local representative for each item of equipment and each system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications with the Section tab sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation and maintenance instructions. 1. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in appropriate section. 2. A maintenance and lubrication schedule shall include each motor, function, control location, fuse location, belt sizes type of lubricant, and rate of lubrication in accordance with manufacturer. 3. A filter maintenance schedule shall include filter size and quantity for each unit, located by room number. 1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of mechanical equipment prior to fmal close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense to Owner, services of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems provided by this Contractor to Owner's permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to Owner for regular operation. B. The Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of five days instruction period for Owner's personnel. 081512 SNA201301 CD 23 00 10 - 5 04/18/13 C. Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill - timed operation or testing shall be repaired, at Contractor's expense, before fmal inspection and acceptance. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of defects that may develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of final completion of the Project or for as long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are in effect from the date of final completion of the Project, whichever is later. B. During the guarantee period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone conversation of a problem with any mechanical system, shall cause the Contractor to respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. C. During the guarantee period, the Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency. Part 2. — PRODUCTS NIA Part 3. - EXECUTION N/A END OF SECTION 081512 SNA201301 CD 230010 -6 04/18/13 SECTION 23 00 20 DEMOLITION Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all existing mechanical systems and related equipment under this contract are in proper working order, and notify Owner and Engineer of any problems before beginning any new work. B. Contractor shall verify that the condition and functionality of existing systems to which connections will be made, make the connections, and test. Coordinate with the General Contractor for any repairing, finishing and patching work required to complete the new systems. Contractor shall leave the mechanical system being disconnected in such condition as to allow for an easy, fast and clean reconnection of any new mechanical systems. C. Equipment and materials being removed shall remain the property of the Owner. The Owner shall indicate which items, if any, are to be retained. Items to be salvaged and retained shall be removed, salvaged, cleaned and placed in a storage area designated by the Owner. All other material and equipment not wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly. D. Accomplish all demolition using only mechanics skilled in the trade. If necessary, subcontract the work to meet this standard. If subcontracting is required, schedule the work to avoid delays or interruptions. E. During construction and remodeling, coordinate with the local fire chief and building officials for the correct procedures during the shut -down or modification of the fire sprinkler systems. Sprinkler system and alarms to remain functional. F. Schedule work in cooperation with the Owner's representatives to avoid disturbance or interruptions of the Owner's services and functions. Provide off -hours work or phasing of the project to meet this requirement. G. The Engineer has performed a field survey to ascertain existing site conditions. This survey was visual only and no attempt was made to verify exact conduit routing above ceilings or in walls. The Contractor shall thoroughly review demolition and construction Drawings and Specifications and be fully aware of design intent. Additional work required due to deviations found after ceilings and walls are opened up shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. H. Where insulation or fire proofmg on existing piping, equipment or structure is affected by the work shown or specified in theses documents, the Contractor shall not proceed until all materials have been verified not to • contain asbestos. I. Contractor shall notify Engineer immediately upon discovering any mechanical equipment not shown on the Drawings that result in site conflicts. Part 2. — PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall disconnect and remove all mechanical items as required to allow for new construction as indicated on these plans and specifications. Mechanical items not reused shall be removed back to the mains and capped. Contractor shall perform all work required including concrete floor & wall saw cutting and excavating to gain access to mechanical systems serving or connected to the equipment being removed. Perform any work regarding the modification of the existing systems as required to complete the demolition. 070803 SNA201301 CD 23 00 20 - 1 04/18/13 All miscellaneous piping and accessories associated with equipment being removed, but not specifically noted on the drawings, shall also be removed. Contractor shall carefully remove all equipment scheduled for reinstallation. B. Where existing walls, floors or other portions of the building require patching or repair after removal of mechanical material or equipment, the work shall be the responsibility of this contractor. This contractor shall be responsible for notifying and coordinating with the General Contractor for all such work. C. In areas of removal, demolition, cutting, rigging or similar work, contractor shall exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the integrity of the structure and the safety of personnel. D. Provide all required temporary bracing, shoring, and support protective coverings and enclosures to prevent damage to existing facilities or danger to existing property or personnel during the work. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent damage from the elements or excessive heat loss. Provide dust -proof temporary enclosures (including above ceilings) to separate areas under demolition or construction from the remainder of the building. Provide temporary hinged doors on enclosures as necessary. Seal temporary and permanent doors between the work area and the rest of the building with tape or other suitable material during demolition and welding and until dust has settled. Provide temporary air filters for all air handlers that serve spaces m or adjacent to the work area. Provide new, clean filters at the completion of the work. E. The fire protection system shall be reactivated at the end of each work day. The sprinlder contractor is responsible to verify that all sprinkler protection systems are filled and in operational condition and the system is functional before completing the work day. Before leaving the site each day the facility's operations personnel shall be notified that the system has been placed back in service. F. The sprinlder contractor shall be responsible for removing, relocating and reinstalling existing sprinkler system, branch lines and mains where necessary for demolition of the existing ceiling, ductwork, piping and equipment. Refer to Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical plans. Provide new heads to match existing as required per NPFA 13, to accommodate the elimination or addition of walls. Do not reuse existing sprinkler heads, which are removed. G. Provide new plumbing clean-outs, tee and wye fittings to allow testing of new plumbing systems that are being connected to existing systems. H. Where demolition of mechanical systems creates an opening in a fire - resistive assembly scheduled to remain after new construction provide all required firestopping or sealing in accordance with IBC Chapter 7. END OF SECTION 070803 SNA201301 CD 23 00 20 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 23 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included under this Division shall consist of furnishing labor and materials necessary for the installation of the work called for under the Mechanical, Fire Sprinkler Protection, Temperature Control and Mechanical Test & Balance contracts as listed in the Instruction to Bidders, as specified, and as shown on Drawings to provide a complete, operable and approved system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The following is a partial list of related standards: 1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE). 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 5. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE). 6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 7. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 8. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA). 9. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI). • 10. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.). 11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 12. National Fire Protection Association (NEPA). 13. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI). 14. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 15. Steel Tank Institute (STI). 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where equipment is specified by manufacturer, brand name or catalog number, this shall establish the standard of quality and style of the product to be provided under the Contract. B. Where two or more units of the same kind of equipment are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. Mixing and matching of various manufacturer's like or similar components shall not be permitted. C. The Contractor shall field verify and inspect existing buildings for connections to existing systems, equipment, and materials designated, on Drawings or in Specifications, to be used. D. The Contractor shall have full responsibility of component parts of the mechanical system to ensure that new equipment, integrated with existing equipment and systems, will perform and operate in accordance with requirements of the Specifications without excessive or unusual service or maintenance requirements. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying locations of such things as piping, ductwork, equipment, door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, etc., prior to the installation of any mechanical equipment. Installed mechanical work that interferes with the work of other trades shall be relocated by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Contractors shall coordinate with all other trades and install their systems in the space provided/coordinated within the structure. Install systems and materials for ease of maintenance. Equipment arrangements shall provide at least the minimum clearances as recommended by equipment manufacturer to facilitate proper 082912 SNA201301 CD 23 00 50 -1 04/18/13 maintenance and servicing of system. Deviations in minimum clearance requirements shall be permitted only upon prior written authorization from the Architect/Engineer. G. For project sites higher than 2000 feet or more above sea level, gas fired equipment shall be modified as required to maintain specified output. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.11 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS: A. Approved Manufacturers: 3M, Transco Products, Nelson Flameseal Systems, Tremco, Inc.. B. Firestopping materials shall conform to local building code requirements and shall be tested according to UL 1479 and ASTME -814 for through - penetration firestop systems. C. Firestopping materials shall be furnished by a supplier who specializes in the selection and furnishing of firestopping materials for building systems. D. Submit shop drawings including a penetration protection schedule which lists each fire resistive construction type for this project, its fire rating, item penetrating and insulation (if any) UL through - penetration firestop systems number, manufacturer and model numbers. Include installation diagrams and product data sheet. E. Contractor shall submit all fire stopping methods to Local Authorities for approval. Provide copies of all approved fire stopping methods to the Engineer. Seal all penetrations and sleeves through floors and fire walls with high temperature, fire rated sealant. Fire stop material shall be 3M brand Fire Barrier Penetration System. In lieu of type system described above, modular component system shall be ProSet System Inc. may be utilized. Install the appropriate concrete or wood penetration system as required by code. 2.2 WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING OPENINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for exact sizes and locations of chases and openings required for • mechanical work. B. Chases and Openings: 1. General Contractor shall leave chases and openings in walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions where shown on Drawings or otherwise necessary to receive mechanical work. It is this contractor's responsibility to coordinate sizes and locations prior to framing, pouring or setting of precast. 2.3 SLEEVES A. General Requirements: 1. Provide sleeves in conjunction with water tight piping passing through concrete or masonry walls, partitions, and slabs. Provide sleeves in mechanical equipment rooms and chases to prevent water flooding from floor to floor in addition to separating piping from building structure. 2. Sleeves shall extend 3" beyond the full thickness of walls and slabs and shall be at least 2 pipe diameters larger than or 2" larger than ducts piping passing through. Where piping with covering is installed, a minimum of 1" shall be provided between outside of pipe covering and inside surface of the sleeve. B. Duct Sleeves: 082912 SNA201301 CD 23 00 50-2 04/18/13 1. Material: Except as otherwise indicated, duct sleeves shall be constructed of minimum 22 gauge galvanized iron. 2. Vertical Sleeves: Vertical duct sleeves through floors shall have space between duct and sleeve packed with an approved fire stop material flush with top of sleeve to make a fire rated and watertight joint. Insulated duct shall have foamed rubber insulation full length within sleeves. 3. Placement: Set sheet metal sleeves for ductwork passing through floors above grade. Sleeve shall extend 3 -inch above finished floor elevation. Sleeve shall be supported in place before floor is poured and shall be caulked to make a waterproof joint between floor and sleeve. Where more than one duct is passing through a floor slab above grade and one floor opening for all ducts is provided, sleeve shall be same size as the overall opening. 4. Interior Sleeves: Ductwork through walls shall have soundproof packing in non -rated wall sleeves and an approved fire stop material in fire rated wall sleeves. Ducts passing through corridor walls not containing fire dampers shall be sleeved. 5. Exterior Sleeves: Ductwork passing through exterior walls shall be sleeved and caulked watertight. Exterior ductwork shall be so installed as to pitch away from wall penetration a minimum of 1/4-inch per foot. 6. Fire Rated Wall and Floor Openings: Ductwork passing through fire rated walls and floors shall be provided with an Underwriters' Laboratories listed duct and sleeve assembly. Duct and sleeve assembly shall meet or exceed fire rating of wall and floor through which the duct passes. C. Pipe sleeves: 1. Exterior Walls: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Install sleeves in exterior walls and floors below grade with approved caulking between sleeves and piping to make it waterproof. Plastic sleeves shall not be used. 2. Floors: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Vertical pipe sleeves through floors shall have space between pipe and sleeve packed with an approved fire stop material flush with top of sleeve to make a watertight and fire rated joint. 3. Interior Sleeves: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Piping through walls of adjacent rooms shall have soundproof packing in non -rated walls and an approved fire stop material in fire rated walls. 4. Fire Rated Wall and Floor Openings: Piping passing through fire rated walls and floors shall be provided with an Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. listed pipe and pipe sleeve assembly. Pipe and pipe sleeve assembly shall meet or exceed fire rating of wall and floor which the pipe passes through. 5. Contractor shall provide all sleeves required through footings, foundation walls and floors. Underground water services as indicated on plans shall be sleeved with schedule 40 PVC sleeving. Sleeve to be (1) size larger than the pipe it serves. Extend sleeves 0' -3" beyond penetration. Coordinate with Structural Engineer. 2.4 ACCESS PANELS A. The Contractor shall provide means of access for all equipment, smoke /fire dampers, fire damper, valves and fittings specified. Furnish wall and ceiling access panels as required to the General Contractor for installation. Access doors and panels required within rated separations shall carry the appropriate rating. Conform to Division 8 access panel specifications. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. On -Site Review: Contractor shall visit site to become thoroughly acquainted with existing conditions of site and services. 2. Existing Active Services: When encountered during construction, Contractor shall protect, brace or support pneumatic tubing, existing active sewers, water, gas, ductwork, or other services, where required, 082912 SNA201301 CD 23 00 50-3 04/18/13 for proper execution of Work. 3. Inactive Services: If encountered during construction, Contractor, as appropriate, shall cap or plug inactive pipes, ducts, and temperature control tubing or wiring at no additional cost to Owner. 4. Responsibility: Liability for repairs or replacement of damaged or defective materials, including, but not limited to, property damage resulting from negligence or other causes, shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility until work has been accepted by Architect/ Engineer and Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: After delivery, and before and after installation, equipment shall be protected against theft or damage. 1. Contractor shall protect plumbing fixtures, metal heating enclosures and other equipment and all baked enamel or glazed surfaces from damage by covering or coating as recommended in Bulletin, "Handling and Care of Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures ", issued by Plumbing Fixture Manufacturers Association or by other methods approved by Architect/Engineer. 2. Coat polished or plate metal parts with vaseline immediately after installation. Protect equipment outlets, pipe and conduit openings with temporary plugs, caps or burlap as required to prevent filling with construction dirt. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching shall be held to practical minimum consistent with good construction practice by properly locating and leaving sleeves and boxes, or notifying General Contractor of openings, where required, as construction progresses. All cutting and patching shall be done with the prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. 1. Necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions and ceilings, as required for the proper installation of work under this Contract, shall be the sole responsibility of this Contractor. Perform cutting and patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and to return the part affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Cutting and patching shall be performed by men experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. B. Pavements and Concrete: Cutting shall be accomplished by saw cutting a minimum of 1 '/ -inch deep prior to jack hammering. Contractor shall bore below the surface where indicated on Drawings or where required by Architect/Engineer. C. Repair: Patch pavements and concrete to match existing conditions. All labor and materials required to replace and repair sections cut or damaged shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Connection to Equipment Specified: Provide material and labor required to connect to the mechanical system of fixtures and equipment having mechanical connections and which are specified in other Sections or Divisions of the Specifications or furnished by Owner. 1. Provide piping supply connections with shut -off valves. 2. Ductwork connections to equipment, diffusers, and appurtenances shall be made with flexible ductwork unless a solid connection is indicated. 3. Drainage connections shall be properly trapped and vented. B. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide concrete pads for all floor mounted equipment. Pads shall be 4" thick and extend a minimum of 2" beyond equipment. C. Mechanical Contractor shall provide angle iron stands for all gas fired equipment located on the same level or 082 912 SNA201301 CD 23 00 50 -4 04/18/13 below any enclosed parking garage floor where the mechanical room opens to that same level. Stands shall elevate burners above 18" or as required by Local Code. This includes all MUA units, furnaces, water heaters, boilers, etc. Verify exact requirements with the Local Inspector prior to performing any fabrication. D. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: 1. Where uncovered exposed pipes pass through floors, walls or ceilings in finished rooms and inside casework, fit with approved type chrome plated metal plate. 2. Plastic escutcheon plates shall not be permitted. E. Filtration: At time of substantial completion, and prior to turning equipment over to Owner, Contractor shall install a complete set of unused, clean filters in each type of unit supplying filtered air to the building. 3.5 CLEANING A. Housekeeping, Cleaning and Storage: Remove from the building and site, scrap material, temporary building, packaging material, miscellaneous debris, and dirt on a regular schedule, or as required, and in accordance with Architect/Engineer's direction, to maintain building in a reasonably clean, workable condition during construction. 1. Cutting oil and steel shavings shall be caught in a suitable container to ensure fmal finish material in . building will not be marred or damaged. 2. Upon completion of work and before fmal inspection, Contractor shall remove plaster, paint, rust, stickers, and shipping tags from installed equipment. 3. Clean foreign matter from installed equipment and remove dirt and debris, in connection with work, from building. 3.6 PRE - OPERATIONAL SYSTEM CLEANOUT A. Pre- Cleaning Chemicals: New piping systems and appurtenances shall be cleaned with a one percent solution of Ferrosol 345, neutral pH cleaner to remove any iron deposits, oil -based coatings, mill scale and construction residues. 1. Follow manufacturers' directions regarding equipment. B. Cooling and Heating Water Systems: The chiller, condenser and chilled water lines and related cooling equipment, boiler, heat exchangers, heating piping and related heating equipment shall be thoroughly flushed out with precleaning chemicals, as called for above, designed to remove deposits such as pipe dope, oils, loose rust, mill scale and other extraneous materials. 1. Add recommended dosages of manufactured and blended pre- cleaner chemical products and circulate throughout the water system. Drain, fill and flush water systems until no foreign mater is observed and the total alkalinity of the rinse water is equal to that of the make -up air. 2. Clean strainer screen after each flush and furnish and install new strainer screens prior to filling system for operation. END OF SECTION 082912 SNA201301 CD 23 00 50 -5 04/18/13 SECTION 23 05 00 TESTING AND BALANCING Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of air, plumbing and natural gas systems, testing, adjusting, and balancing of hydronic [steam] [and] [refrigerating] systems, measurement of fmal operating condition of HVAC systems, sound measurement of equipment operating conditions, vibration measurement of equipment of operating conditions. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AABC (Associated Air Balance Council)- National Standards for Total System Balance. B. ASHRAE III (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers). 1. Practices for Measurement, Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Building, Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems. 2. TAB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. The process of checking and adjusting HVAC systems to meet design objective. Basic TAB terms used in this Section: "Chapter, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" of ASHRAE Handbook, latest Systems Volume. C. NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau). Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE 111 or NEBB Report forms. B. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. C. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to fmal acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. E. Provide reports in bound manuals, complete with index page and indexing' tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and a copy of either AABC National Project Performance Guaranty or NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification prior to commencing system balance. Part 2. - PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL 05, 01/12 SNA201301 CD 23 05 00 - 1 04/18/13 A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Domestic Water Systems: a. Pumps are rotating correctly. b. Proper strainers are clean and in place or in normal positions. c. Service and balance valves are open. 5. Ventilation Systems: a. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to fmal filters. b. Duct systems are clean of debris. c. Fans are rotating correctly. d. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. e. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. f. Air outlets are installed and connected. g. Air coil fins are cleaned. 6. Hydronic Systems: a. Pumps are rotating correctly. b. Proper strainers are clean and in place or in normal positions. c. Service and balance valves are open. d. Systems are flushed, filled and vented. B. When the work has been completed, balance the air flow from each diffuser and register in accordance with the recommendations of the diffuser manufacturer, setting dampers, controls and/or other volume control devices in such a manner as to produce the air flow rate indicated on the drawings. Test to the satisfaction of the Engineer to insure for satisfactory operation of all equipment: 1. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. Test and start-up all equipment supplied under this contract. 1. Provide all reports necessary to assure the Engineer and Owner that all functions of each piece of equipment have been thoroughly evaluated and deemed operable as designed. 2. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. 3. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. 4. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. 5. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 6. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to airflow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable -air- volume temperature control. 3.2 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems after air balancing to provide design quantities: 05/01/12 SNA201301 CD 23 05 00 - 2 04/18/13 1. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow - metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. 2. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. 3. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open or in normal position to heat transfer elements. 4. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves and fittings. Do not use service or shut -off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. 5. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. B. Hydronic piping systems: 1. System Guarantee: Contractor shall guarantee that the installation shall operate with complete noiseless circulation of heating and/or cooling media through piping system, radiation and equipment. 2. Defects: Contractor shall be responsible for defects which develop in the systems caused be faulty workmanship, material or equipment and shall replace any such faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of one year from date of fmal acceptance. Acceptance of the work shall not waive the guarantee. 3. Tests: In the presence of the Architect/Engineer, or his duly authorized representative the heating system shall be tested at 80 psi hydrostatic pressure and proved drop tight. Tests shall be complete before piping is connected to equipment or covered. 4. Heating/cooling water piping shall hold 150 psi gauge for 1 hour without leaks or additional water. 3.3 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes as required to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. J. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches w.c. (12.5 Pa) positive static pressure near the building entries. K. Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling, then heating, then modulating. 05/ 01/12 SNA201301 CD 23 05 00 - 3 04/18/13 L. Ventilation: Contractor shall guarantee complete uniform circulation of air through ventilated spaces without objectionable noise. Contractor shall assume responsibility for and shall replace any faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of 1 year from date of final acceptance. END OF SECTION • • 05/01/12 SNA201301 CD 23 05 00 - 4 04/18/13 SECTION 23 07 00 INSULATION Part 1. — GENERAL 1.11. SUMMARY A. Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for plumbing and hydronic piping, ductwork and equipment. B. Defmitions: 1. ASJ: All service jacket, white fmish facing or jacket. 2. Air conditioned space: Space directly supplied with heated or cooled air. 3. Cold: Equipment, ductwork or piping handling media at design temperature of 60° F or below. 4. Concealed: Ductwork and piping above ceilings and in chases and pipe spaces. 5. Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished areas or exposed to outdoor weather. 6. FSK: Foil- scrim -kraft facing. 7. Hot: HVAC Ductwork handling air at design temperature above 60° F; HVAC and plumbing equipment or piping handling media above 105° F. 8. Density: Pcf - pounds per cubic foot. 9. Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials. 10. Flat surface: BTU per hour per square foot. 11. Pipe or Cylinder: BTU per hour per linear foot. 12. Thermal Conductivity (k): BTU per inch thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference. 13. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride vapor retarder jacketing, white. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUMMARY • A. Materials: • 1. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, and/or facing and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation), fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM E -84, NFPA 225 and U/LI 723 not exceeding Flame Spread 25 and Smoke Developed 50. 2. Jacket and Facing Descriptions: a. All purpose vapor barrier jackets. b. VB vapor barrier, white kraft bonded to 1 mil aluminum foil, reinforced with glass yarn. Water vapor permeability 0.02 perms. c. FSK reinforced foil and paper_ (Foil Scrim Kraft). Aluminum foil (minimum 0.75 mil thick) reinforced with fiberglass yard mesh and laminated to 40 lbs. chemically treated fire resistant Kraft UL rated. 3. Exterior Jacket: a. Venture Tape, Ventureclad 1557CW, (Alumaguard 60) 6 mil thickness, adhesive backed, aluminum fmish jacket otherwise with zero permeability, shall be capable of being applied down to -20 F. 2.2 DUCTWORK A. Extemal rigid board insulation shall be Owens Coming 703 Series with FSK or ASJ (All Service Jacket) vapor barrier facing, 3 pound density fiberglass complete with non - combustible foil faced vapor barrier. Entire system shall be UL listed. 022213 SNA201301 CD 23 07 00 - 1 04/18/13 1. 0.030 thick PVC preformed jackets with seams made for welding. 2. 0.024 thick stucco embossed, smooth or corrugated pattern by Childers Products Company. B. Internal Duct lining shall be Knauf Eclipse Air Duct Board is a resin- bonded fiber glass formed into rigid, rectangular boards faced on one side with a fire- resistant foil- scrim -kraft (FSK) vapor retarder and a lightweight black fiber glass mat on the airstream surface. Rigidity shall be EI -475. Thermal conductivity shall be 0.23 BTU in. per sq. ft. per °F. hour at mean temperature of 75 °F. The airstream surface of duct board shall be is treated with an EPA registered, antimicrobial agent that prevents growth of mold, fungus or bacteria in accordance with ASTM C 1071, G21 and G22. Material shall be UL 181 listed and shall not exceed 25 Flame Spread, 50 Smoke Developed when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, CAN/ULC S102-M88, NFPA 255, and UL 723. C. Fiberglass blanket shall be 1 pound density, with factory applied type FSK jacket. Conductivity shall be 0.26 average maximum at mean temperature of 75 °F. 23 PIPING A. Piping shall be insulated with Manville (IMCOA, Owens - Corning, Knauf) "FLAME SAFE" fiber glass insulation. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.22 BTU in. per sq. ft. per °F. hour at mean temperature of 75 °F. • B. Provide galvanized steel shields at all pipe hangers on insulated piping except hot water heating piping where pipes bear directly on the clevis. Shields shall be 16 gauge for pipes 4" and larger diameter and 20 gauge for smaller pipes. C. Exposed areas inside a building shall be furnished with factory applied "FLAME SAFE" All- Purpose Vapor barrier jacket. D. All piping in concealed areas inside a building shall be provided with factory applied "FLAME SAFE" VB (Vapor Barrier Jacket or All- Purpose Jacket). E. All piping that is located outside and directly or indirectly exposed to the weather and is insulated, shall be totally enclosed and wrapped with a PVC pre - formed jacket. F. Fittings, valve bodies and flanges for pipe size 4" and smaller shall be provided with PVC jackets over fiberglass inserts. G. Armstrong (Rubatex, Halstead) Armaflex II flame retardant elastomeric thermal insulation, installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and as allowed by Local Codes, shall be suitable for pipe temperatures between -40° and 220 °. • Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All piping and ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry prior to the application of insulation. B. Provide continuous vapor barrier over all seams. 3.2 DUCTWORK A. Apply insulation in thickness and type as follows or per applicable state energy code, whichever is greater. B. OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK: The outside air ductwork to fan coils shall be insulated with 2" external foil faced rigid board fiberglass (or wrap for round duct) insulation or thermal resistance of R -8, whichever is greater (this includes the mixing box and/or sections of mixed air duct). 2" thickness glass fiber blanket may be used in lieu of board in concealed locations. Duct lining is not acceptable for outside air ductwork. 022213 SNA201301 CD 23 07 00 - 2 04/18/13 C. RETURN AIR DUCTWORK: Return air ducts shall be insulated with' /" thickness internal glass fiberboard for all return ductwork within mechanical rooms. D. SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK FOR DUCTED RETURNS: Supply air ducts shall be insulated with PA" thickness glass fiberboards from air handling unit discharge up to runouts to each register /diffuser. 1' A" thickness glass fiber blanket may be used in lieu of board in concealed locations. E. SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK FOR PLENUM RETURNS: Supply air ducts shall be insulated with 1' /2" thickness glass fiberboards completely with shafts and extended ten feet from air handling unit discharge. 11/2" thickness glass fiber blanket may be used in lieu of board in concealed locations. F. All individual room exhaust run outs shall be insulated with 1" wrapped insulation. Sidewall duct pentrations within floor /ceiling assemblies shall be insulated with 2" fiberglass wrap and/or a thermal resistance of R -8, whichever is greater. 3.3 PIPING: A. On cold water piping all seam edges shall be additionally sealed with vapor barrier adhesive and ends wrapped with vapor barrier tape overlapped the adjacent jacket. B. Heating Systems, Cooling Systems and Domestic Water, above 40 °F and Under 200 °F: 1. Apply fiberglass insulation to provide a K -value of 0.27. If the K -value of a product is less 0.22, then the thickness must be adjusted to have an equivalent R- value. Runout branches 2" in diameter and less . (not exceed 12 feet length) to individual terminal units: 0.5 ". C. Refrigerant suction piping shall be insulated with 1" Armaflex. All outside insulation shall be wrapped with Venture Tape 1507 black line set tape. D. All heating, chilled, fire sprinkler and domestic water piping within 15' of any exterior opening within the mechanical room shall be insulated with a minimum of 1" Fiberglass unless indicated otherwise in this specification section. E. For piping exposed to outdoor air, see insulation thicknesses for specific piping types below. Increase insulation thickness listed by 'A". F. On remodeling projects, all existing insulated piping that may have had its insulatin removed as a result of new work, shall be reinsulated to match existing. G. Condensate drain piping shall be insulated with 'A "Armflex. H. All existing insulated piping that may have had its insulation removed as a result of new work shall be re- insulated to match existing. I. The underside of roof drains and other drains specified shall be insulated with 11/2" of fiber glass cemented to the drain and fmished with a vapor barrier and adhesive to provide for complete vapor tight enclosure for the insulation. J. All storm piping that is located outside and directly or indirectly exposed to the weather and is insulated shall be totally enclosed and wrapped with a PVC pre - formed jacket. K. All service water heating piping in contact with high conductivity material, including concrete, must have 1" minimum insulation K -value of 0.27. Snow melting mains shall be covered with insulation below the level of the concrete slab including U -turns at the concrete slab expansion joint locations. Note: Contractor to 022213 SNA201301 CD 23 07 00 - 3 04/18/13 L. HYDRONIC HEATING WATER PIPING: 1. Apply fiberglass insulation in thickness as follows or per applicable State Energy Code, whichever is greater: a. (105 °F - 140 °F): (1) 'h" thru 1" ' /2" (2) 1 1/4" thru 4" 1" • b. (140 °F - 200 °F): (1) 'h" thru 1 1 'h " (2) 11/4" thru 4" 1 '/2" M. [EDIT: CHILLED WATER COOLING PIPING:[ 1. Apply fiberglass insulation in thickness as follows or per applicable State Energy Code, whichever is greater: a. (40 °F- 55 °F): (1) 1/2" thru 1 -1/4" '/z (2) 1 -1/4" thru 2" 3/4" (3) 21/2" and larger 1" b. Chilled Water below 40 °F (including waterside economizer heat exchanger piping) (1) Run out branches 1" (2) Under 1" 1" (3) 11/4" and up 1'/2" (4) For applications with fluid temperatures of 32 °F and below a vapor retarder shall be installed. 3.4 JACKETS A. Foil and Paper Jackets: Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1 1/2" laps at longitudinal joints and 3 -inch -wide butt strips at end joints. 1. Seal openings, punctures and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with vapor barrier compound. 2. Install PVC fitting covers over insulated flanges, fittings and valves. B. Exterior Exposed Insulation: Install continuous PVC jackets and seal all joints and seams with waterproof sealant. C. Install the PVC jacket with 1" overlap at longitudinal and butt joints and seal with adhesive. END OF SECTION 022213 SNA201301 CD 23 07 00 - 4 04/18/13 SECTION 23 08 00 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. All piping materials and methods of construction and workmanship shall be provided as per the requirements of local codes and regulations. 1. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 2. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability. B. Lead pipe, solders, flux, etc., are not allowed. C. The contractor is responsible for verifying all invert elevations with respect to building finished floor elevations and site provisions. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Heating and Chilled Water Piping: 1. Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing ASTM B88 -03 with wrought copper fittings, using 95/5 solder or brazing. 2. Type "L" seamless grooved copper tube with grooved copper couplings and fittings. a. Fittings shall be ASME B 16.22 wrought copper or ASME B16.18 cast bronze, with copper -tube dimensioned grooved ends. Victaulic Copper - Connection. b. Couplings shall be installation- ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing segments cast with offsetting angle -pattern bolt pads, Grade EHP gasket rated to +250 ° F, and zinc electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Victaulic Style 607. c. System shall be manufactured to copper -tube dimensions. (Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted.) 3. Schedule 40 A -53 ERW black steel pipe with cast iron screwed, welded or grooved fittings. a. Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting angle -pattern bolt pads to provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. 1) 2" through 6 ": Installation- Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly, with grade EHP gasket rated to +250 ° F / 120 ° C. Victaulic Style 107. 2) Victaulic Zero -Flex Style 07. b. Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Three flexible couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector. The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the vibration. Victaulic Installation -Ready Style 177 or Style 77. c. 14" through 24 ": Victaulic AGS series with lead -in chamfer on housing key and wide width FlushSeal® gasket. 101012 SNA201301 CD 23 08 00 - 1 04/18/13 1) Rigid Type: Housing key shall fill the wedge shaped AGS groove and provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. Victaulic Style W07. 2) Flexible Type: Housing key shall fit into the wedge shaped AGS groove and allow for linear and angular pipe movement. Victaulic Style W77. 4. Viega Pro -Press system may be used on type K, L and M hard copper tubing, sizes 'h" to 4" and soft copper tubing in 'h" to 1 'A". System shall be approved for up to 200 psi operating pressure and 250 °F for joining copper tubing. Viega Pro -Press shall only be used on piping system containing fluids and gases as indicated in the manufacturers approved listing. All application shall include the proper factory standard or field installed specialty seals. 5. Victaulic 304 stainless steel Pressfit system' /z " -2 ". 6. Chilled Water Only: Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC): Manufactured from Type IV Grade I CPVC compound with a cell classification of23447 per ASTM D 2846. a. CPVC pipe and fittings 2" and smaller and Schedule 80 CPVC for pipe and fittings 2 'A" and larger shall meet or exceed ASTM D2846, ASTM F438 and F439. Evertuff, Flowguard Gold, Nibco, Cresline Plastic Pipe, Charlotte Pipe, Genova, Bow Plumbing Group. b. All socket type joints shall be made with solvent cements and primers shall meet or exceed current ASTM standards. Solvent cement and primer shall be approved for use with pipe and fittings manufacturer. c. Provide smooth pipe supports and bracing to allow for expansion and contraction. Spaced per manufacturer's recommendations. d. Installation shall be by a factory trained installer per manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide Owner with minimum of 5 year manufacturer's warranty. 7. Schedule 80 PVC meeting or exceeding ASTM F441with approved solvent welded fittings meeting or exceeding ASTM 2457. 8. CPVC and Schedule 80 PVC piping shall be acceptable for use with glycol solution percentage by volume as specified. B. Condensate Water Piping: 1. Type "M" seamless copper hard and soft temper ANSI -H23.1 with wrought copper fittings using 95/5 solder or brazing. Type "M" shall not be used on domestic hot water circulating systems. 2. PVC Schedule 40 unthreaded or PVC Schedule 80 threaded. Pipe and corresponding fittings installed per Code limitations. 2.2 VALVES A. Acceptable Valve Manufacturers: 1. Apollo, Titan FCI, Milwaukee, Victaulic, Nibco, Watts, Mueller, Hammond, Griswold, Gruvlok. B. Gate Valves — Heating, and Chilled Water Piping: 1. 2 inches and Smaller: Milwaukee Figure 1152 or Hammond Figure IB 617, 125 pound bronze bodied valve with screwed end connections. The solid style disc and bonnet shall also be bronze, and the rising -type stem shall be copper - silicon alloy. C. Check Valves — Heating and Chilled Water Piping: 1. 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Milwaukee Figure 509/Hammond Figure IB 904, 150 pound bronze, screwed ends, bronze disc, swing check. 2. Non -Slam Check Valves - 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Clow Figure 329, 125 pound wafer type check valves with EPDM inserts. 3. Non -Slam Check Valves - 3 inches and Larger: Mueller Steam Specialty 105 MAPS, Titan FCI CJ50- DI-DBS, 125 pound globe style check valves with EPDM inserts. 101012 SNA201301 CD 23 08 00 - 2 04/18/13 4. Non -Slam Check Valves - 2 -1/2 through 12 inches: Victaulic Series 716, 300 psig spring - actuated check valve, with stainless steel spring and shaft, for horizontal or vertical installation. a. For sizes 14 through 24 inches, valves shall be Victaulic Series W715, rated to 230 psig, with stainless steel spring, shaft, and dual disc(s), and EPDM seat. D. Ball Valves — Heating Water Piping: 1. 3" and smaller for heating: Apollo 70 -100, Victaulic Series 722, or Milwaukee BA 100 two piece reduced port bronze body, Milwaukee BA 475/485 two piece full port forged brass body, Milwaukee BA 400 two piece full port bronze body 600 WOG chrome plated ball, blow out proof stem, reinforced PTFE seats and where necessary, extended stems for insulation. a. In the Vic -Press piping system, valves shall be Victaulic Series 589. E. Globe Valves — Heating and Chilled Water Piping: 1. 2 inches and Smaller — Solder ends: Milwaukee 1502 or Hammond Figure IB 418, 125 pound bronze bodied valve with solder end connections. The disc and bonnet shall also be bronze, and the stem shall be copper - silicon alloy. 2.3 FLOW FITTINGSBALANCE VALVE • A. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Bell & Gossett, Nibco, Mueller, Victaulic /TA Hydronics, Gruvlok. B. Bell & Gossett "Circuit Setter" or Victaulic/TA Hydronics balance valve. All bronze/brass ball or copper - alloy /ductile iron globe type construction with memory stop and integral valved read -out ports. Provide metal identification tags indicating location, size, GPM and meter reading. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES: A. Drain Valves - Heating, and Chilled Water Piping: 1. Nibco #C56- VB,'/" male thread, tee handle and vacuum breaker. 2. Apollo Series 78 -100 ball valve, 600 pound, bronze body, chrome plated brass ball and blow -out proff brass stem, reinforced Teflon seals and seats and 3/4" hose thread outlet with cap. 2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Nibco, National Pipe Hangers, Empire Industries, L.C. Penner, U.S. Plastic. B. Hangers shall adequately support the piping system and shall be installed to allow for expansion and contraction. Insulation shall be continuous and jackets shall be sealed tight at hangers. Provide neoprene rubber or rubber coated pad where uninsulated pipes rest on hangers. C. Provide additional expansion joints and offsets for excessive expansion m plastic piping. Follow plastic piping manufacturers' recommendations. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide Metraflex, Model HP axial expansion compensators rated for minimum 150psi working pressure. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexicraft, Hyspan, Duraflex, Microflex, Flexonics. 2. Provide additional expansion joints and offsets for excessive expansion in plastic piping. 101012 SNA201301 CD 23 08 00 - 3 04/18/13 3. Installation of piping and expansion products shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Thoroughly and substantially support all piping from approved hangers. The design, selection, spacing and application of horizontal pipe hangers, supports, restraints, anchors and guides shall be in accordance with applicable standards. The power Piping Code ANSI B31.1 shall take precedence over the MSS SP -69 Standard. F. Support horizontal piping with adjustable clevis hangers with locking nuts above and below the clevis. On insulated pipe where the hanger comes in contact with the piping, use a clevis hanger. Provide copper plated hangers to support copper piping where the hanger comes in contact with the piping. G. Support horizontal piping subject to expansion with adjustable roller hangers. H. All vertical pipes not specified to be supported on vibration isolation hangers shall be supported as follows: 1. Support vertical pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller at every floor level using riser clamps. If vertical pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller pass through slabs above finished areas, encase them in a watertight riser sleeve, Grinnell Figure 405. 2. Support vertical pipes 10 inches through 16 inches in diameter at every floor using six bolt riser clamps. 3. Support vertical pipes 18 inches in diameter and larger at every floor using structural steel channels and gussets welded to the pipe. Structural steel supports shall be provided under Division 15 and shall be designed by a registered structural engineer. I. Provide threaded steel hanger rods, sized and installed as recommended by the hanger manufacturer for the intended service. J. Support horizontal steel and copper piping with maximum spacing between supports as noted. Nominal pipe Distance Between Rod Diameter Size (In.) Hanger (Ft.) (In.) '/2 & 3 / 6 3/8 ltol'h 8 3/8 2 & 2'/2 10 1/2 3 & 4 12 5/8 K. Provide additional supports for valves or other concentrated loads between the regularly spaced supports. L. Except where trapeze hangers are used to support piping, all piping and ductwork shall be individually supported. Do not support ducts or pipes from other pipes, ducts, equipment or conduit. • M. Install hangers to provide a minimum of inch clear space between finished pipe insulation and any adjacent work. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. Use hangers which provide at least 1 '/2 inches of vertical adjustment after the piping is erected. N. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical soil pipe at each floor and at each hub. O. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. P. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be large enough to encompass the insulation and the metal protection shields, except that hangers may be applied directly to the pipe for domestic hot water and rainwater piping systems. Q. Provide hanger spreaders on all hangers for pipes 4 inches in diameter and larger. 101012 SNA201301 CD 23 08 00 - 4 04/18/13 R. Insulation Protection at Pipe Hangers. 1. On hot piping, where the hanger is specified to fit outside of the pipe insulation, provide a piece of calcium silicate insulation between the bottom half (180 °) of the piping and the hanger, with fiberglass insulation on the upper half. The calcium silicate section shall be 2 inches longer than the metal shield beneath it. 2. Provide a metal shield between the insulation and the hanger which is galvanized steel, 16 gauge for piping smaller than 4 inches, 14 gauge for piping 4 inches and larger. The metal shield shall span an arc of 180 °. The lengths of the shields shall be as follows: Pipe Size Shield Length Up to 6" 12" 3. On chilled water piping and other cold piping, install a wooden block between the piping and each hanger. The insulation jacketing shall be sealed continuously around these blocks, just as for the rest of the insulation system. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.11. GENERAL A. Provide offsets and transitions to hydronic and steam piping due to existing structure and trades work. B. Slope water piping 1" per 40' and arrange to drain at all low points. C. Provide shut -off valves as required by Code and good installation practice for the proper isolation of equipment. All branch take offs shall have isolation shut off valves. Provide extended stem valves where required for insulation. Except as otherwise specified or shown on plans, valves 2 -1/2 inch and smaller shall have screwed end connections and valves 3 inch and larger shall have grooved end or flange end construction. Install manual drain valves at every low point of each water piping system. D. Mechanical formed tees connections as created by T -Drill shall be formed in a continuous operation consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the surface to form a collar having a height of not less than three times the thickness of the tube wall. Branch tube shall not obstruct the flow in the main line tube. All joints shall be brazed in accordance with the Copper Development Association. Soft soldered joints will not be permitted. Mechanical formed connections shall be listed by the National Standard Plumbing Code, B.O.C.A., I.A.M.P.O., S.B.C.C., H.U.D., U.S. Army corps of Engineers, Underwriters Laboratory, ASME Code for Pressure Piping and shall be acceptable to governing authorities. E. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. The grooved coupling manufacturer's factory trained representative shall provide on -site training for contractor's field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor's representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s). F. Provide escutcheon plates at all wall, floor, or ceiling piping penetrations. This includes all mechanical piping systems. Escutcheon plates shall match the finish of the surrounding area. G. Provide a dielectric coupling or waterway fitting at all connections of dissimilar metals. Provide adequate clearance for insulation and for access to valves. All piping shall be concealed and shall maintain proper clearances for ceilings, ducts, walls, lighting, etc. except that piping may be exposed in mechanical areas. At all fixture and equipment connections where nipples are necessary between copper fixtures and tubing, such nipples shall be full size brass nipples with brass or copper adapters. 101012 SNA201301 CD 23 08 00 - 5 04/18/13 H. Ream pipe ends to remove burrs. Make joints smooth and unobstructed inside. Remove any obstructions or debris inside piping, blowing it out with compressed air or otherwise cleaning it internally immediately prior to assembly. I. Push -to- Connect Joints: Install Permalynx joints in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. Prepare and mark tubing ends using a tool supplied by the manufacturer and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. J. Install Vic -Press 3�4TM in accordance with Victaulic recommendations. Pipe shall be certified for use with the Vic -Press 3�4TM system, square cut ( +1- 0.030 "), properly deburred, and cleaned. Pipe ends shall be marked with a gauge supplied by Victaulic. Use a Victaulic `PFT' series tool with the proper sized jaw for pressing. K. Condensate Drains: 1. Provide a deep seal "P" trap at condensate drain beneath each water heater, and extend piping to nearest floor drain, service sink or as shown on drawings. 2. Effective water seal of "P" trap shall be minimum of two times negative static pressure in fan plenum for draw- through fan unit, but not less than 3 inch. Depth of trap shall be minimum of one -half the plenum maximum negative static pressure. 3. Traps for roof mounted equipment shall be constructed of rubber; drain piping shall be PVC, ABS plastic, or Type "M" copper with soldered joints. 4. When code allows and when routing condensate to local lays, provide tailpiece for branch connection. Coordinate unit requiring tailpiece with HVAC Contractor. END OF SECTION 101012 SNA201301 CD 23 08 00 - 6 04/18/13 SECTION 23 09 00 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Manufacturer shall have in town local representation and service of the equipment provided. 1.2 WARRANTY A. Temperature Control: Contractor shall be responsible for defects which develop in any part of the system caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment and shall replace any such faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of 1 year from date of substantial completion. Instruments shall be calibrated to sense, activate and display information specified. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Contractor shall provide a complete automatic temperature control system as specified. Contractor shall provide all 120/240 volt circuits as required to power all low voltage control devices or line voltage devices such as 120 volt damper motor etc.. All wiring shall be provided by this contractor. Electrical Division shall provide all 120/240, 1 phase, line voltage, direct control devices and wiring such as line voltage thermostats, time clocks and switches unless specifically noted to be supplied by this contractor and installed by the Electrical Division or remotely controlled and monitored by a Building Automation system. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Honeywell, Johnson, Trane, Carrier, Alerton, Invensys, Delta. C. Space Thermostats: 1. Thermostats shall be of one type for like systems. 2. Thermostats shall have lockout and upper /lower limit temperature setpoint capability. 3. Standalone heat/cool device thermostats shall be Emerson (White Rodgers) model 1F95EZ series capable of auto or manual heat/cool changeover. Thermostats shall have large easy to read digital display with push pad adjustment controls. 4. Common Spaces: Provide electronic programmable thermostats shall be Emerson (White Rodgers) model 1F95 series capable of auto or manual heat/cool changeover. Thermostats shall have digital readout with push pad adjustment controls. Part 3. - EXECUTION • 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate exact location of control power transformers and control panels with the Architect/Engineer. B. Thermostat located in public areas shall be provided with clear lockable covers unless noted otherwise. C. Thermostats shall have 50*-90° F temperature scale. D. Coordinate required mounting height of thermostats with Architect. E. Provide sensors and support brackets constructed of stainless steel, copper, brass, cast zinc or glass. Covers shall be galvanized steel painted with manufacturer's standard paint and color. 3.2 CONTROL SEQUENCES 010813 SNA201301 CD 23 09 00 - 1 04/18/13 A. Fintube Radiation: 1. Provide 24 volt control valve and space thermostat. 2. Provide two (2) perimeter radiation zones with 3 -way control valves and loop pressure sensors serving the perimeter heating loop which shall maintain a reasonable pressure in the event only one or two radiation control valves are open. B. Fan Coils: Provide a programmable thermostat with fan/off/auto switch and unoccupied/occupied settings. The space thermostat shall cycle the condensing unit to maintain setpoint. The fan shall run continuously during occupied periods. 1. Provide sensor in Dual Temperature Supply main to control 3 -way diverting control valve at each fan coil unit. When water temperature is 80 degrees F and lower, the port to the chilled water coil shall be open, when water temperature is 100 degrees F and higher, the port to the heating water coil shall be open. 2. Provide motorized damper on outside air intake duct to modulate outside air percentage based on outdoor air temperature. Minimum damper position to be set at 600 CFM when occupied. When unoccupied, damper shall be closed. Motorized damper on relief duct shall modulate with outside air motorized damper. END OF SECTION 010813 SNA201301 CD 23 09 00 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 23 20 00 HYDRONICS Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and equipment for the installation of complete and functioning hydronic heating system as indicated on the drawings. Install all equipment in accordance with all State and Local codes and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer's installation instructions prior to installing any piece of equipment or its associated services (drains, piping, etc.). 2. Provide factory tests to check construction, controls and operation of unit. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Hydronic Specialties: 1. Tanks: B &G, Amtrol, Mepco, Thrush, Wessles, John Wood, Bremco, Jarco, Ace, Taco, Flo Fab. 2. Flow Fittings, Valves & Accessories: B &G, Amtrol, Mepco, Thrush, Wessles, John Wood, Bremco, Jarco, Ace, Gustin- Bacon, Victaulic, Taco, Flo Fab, TA Hydronics, Gerrand, FDI. 3. Automatic Flow Limiting/regulating Valve, Flow Fittings, and Balancing Valves: Gerrand, TA Hydronics, B &G, Taco, FDI, Hays, Victaulic. 4. Automatic By -Pass Valves: Danfoss. B. Pumps: B &G, Armstrong, Aurora, Taco, Patterson, Allis- Chalmers, Peerless, Thrush, Flo Fab, Wilo. C. Fan Coils: Trane, McQuay, Airtherm, Carrier, First Company, IEC, Envirotec, Intemational, Williams. 2.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Provide strainer or suction diffuser for base mounted applications. B. Provide Amtrol Series 700 float type, air vent where required for proper elimination of air. Provide a shut off valve. C. Provide flow fitting and balancing valve Gerrand KG Series, Venturis and Indicators. Provide metal identification tags indicating location, size, GPM and meter reading. D. Provide where indicated an automatic flow limiting valve B &G Circuit Sentry complete with ball -type shutoff, measuring ports and a replaceable flow regulating cartridge to limit flow within +/ -5% GPM independent of fluctuating pressure. Provide metal identification tags indicating location, size and GPM. E. Provide where indicated an automatic by -pass valve Danfoss model AVDO. Valve shall be self - acting to maintain minimum flow rates. Valve shall open upon a rise in differential pressure with a setting range of 0.725 -7.25 psi capable of 145 psi working pressure and 248 F maximum flow temperature. Valve shall be available with NPT or solder tail ends. F. Provide where indicated flexible bronze hose with braided cover with copper tube ends for Freon or other sweat end services. Acceptable manufacturers: Mason Industries Type BBF, Flexonics Series 301. 040913 SNA201301 CD 23 20 00 - 1 04/18/13 2.3 COILS A. General: Coils shall be designed with aluminum plate fms and copper tubes. Coils shall be of capacity and style as scheduled. B. Construction: Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall be mounted in the unit casing to be accessible for service and can be removed from the unit through the side. Capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. C. Headers: • 1. All coils shall be enclosed in a coil section. Coil headers and U -bends shall not be exposed. 2. Headers shall be either round copper or cast iron. Steel pipe headers are not acceptable. 3. Counterflow: Water flow shall be counter to airflow. 4. Testing: Coils shall be proof tested to 300 psig and leak tested to 200 psig air pressure underwater. 2.4 IN -LINE PUMPS A. Bell and Gossett Series 60 or Series 80 as scheduled. B. Unit shall be centrifugal, single stage, close coupled, in -line, back pullout design. C. Casing shall be cast iron, bronze, rated for minimum of 175 psig working pressure, suction and discharge gauge port, air vent, flanged suction and discharge. D. Impeller shall be bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft and secured with locknut. E. Shaft shall be stainless steel or carbon steel with bronze or stainless steel sleeve through seal chamber. F. Provide standard mechanical seal. G. Each pump shall be factory tested hydraulically and dynamically balanced. H. Provide line size shutoff valve and strainer in suction piping. I. Provide check valve and balancing valve on discharge side of each pump, or use a triple duty valve. Provide a pressure gauge with shut -off valves piped to pump casing tappings for accurate pump pressure readings. J. Support piping on both sides of in -line pumps. Do not provide permanent support for the pump itself. K. Provide flexible pump connectors. L. Pump shall be selected with an impeller motor combination that would allow the pump to run out to 90% of its flow curve without overloading the motor. Notify the engineer if the motor selected is not large enough for this safety. 2.5 FAN COILS A. Magic Aire Series as scheduled, ARI certified and U.L. listed, 120 -1 with the optional high static motors with three speed manually switched motor speed controllers. Provide with the discharge duct collar, 2" filters, forward curved double width double inlet centrifugal fans statically and dynamically balanced, drain pan. Unit shall have a single point input power connection for the motor (with disconnecting means and thermal overload protection). B. Provide condensate drain piping. Provide float switch at condensate pan to shut off equipment prior to overflow of the pan. Coordinate with the plumbing contractor for drainage provisions. 040913 SNA201301 CD 23 20 00 - 2 04/18/13 C. All wiring between the fan coil and the wall mounted devices is by the Mechanical Contractor. D. Coils shall be sized as scheduled. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide accessible, manual vents at the high points for each zone. If a vent location is not accessible, extend the vent to an accessible surface of the cabinet. B. Provide each zone or device with a shut off valves on the supply and return lines with balancing valve on return. C. Support all motor driven equipment on vibration isolators. D. Fill the system with appropriate concentrations of heating water system chemical treatment and 30% ethylene glycol. E. Auxiliary Condensate Drain Pan: 1. Provide an auxiliary drain pan beneath each cooling coil in which condensate will occur. 2. Provide condensate overflow safety switch Little Giant Model ACS -2, 3. 3. Install switch in the auxiliary condensate drain pan and wire to shut off the unit served prior to overflow of the pan. END OF SECTION • 040913 SNA201301 CD 232000 -3 04118/13 SECTION 23 30 00 DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. All above ground ductwork material and construction shall be galvanized steel, installed in accordance with the Standards described in the latest edition of the ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers) Guide and Data Book, SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association) and Local governing mechanical codes. B. Changes in direction, elevation or shape shall be made by gradual methods such as radiused elbows of diverging or converging reducing fittings. Changes in dimension shall not exceed 20° diverging angle. Elbow radii shall be at least equal to the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Registers, Grilles and Diffusers and Terminal Air Devices: Titus, Price, J & J, Krueger, Tuttle and Bailey, Carnes, Nailor, Metalaire, Reliable Metal. B. Louvers: Cesco, Air Balance, Arrow United, Louvers & Dampers, Inc., Safe -Air, Pottorff, Greenheck. 2.2 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS A. Unless indicated, otherwise wall and ceiling R, G, D's shall be white; floor registers shall have plain aluminum fmish. Color fmishes shall be approved by the Architect. TYPE TITUS MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION A TMRA Adjustable steel round diffuser. Provide D -75 opposed blade neck mounted damper, color white. Provide foam gasket when mounted to finished ceiling. E 300RL Double deflection steel supply register. Provide type 1 border. Provide sheet rock frame in sheet rock ceilings. P 355RL Steel return/exhaust register. Provide type 1 border. Provide sheet rock frame in sheet rock ceilings. NOTE: SELECT ALL DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS BELOW "NC" OF 30. NOT ALL DIFFUSERS ARE NECESSARILY USED. REFER TO PLANS. 2.3 RELIEF/EXHAUST WALL AND ROOF VENTS A. Wall Caps: Provide Cook Gemini WCR Series with integral back draft damper. Coordinate with Architect finishes for specific color requirements. 2.4 LOUVERS A. Provide Ruskin GFL800 extruded aluminum louvers. Frame shall be 4" (0.080 wall thickness (2), with 606375 blades (0.063 wall thickness), J style blades, 45° angle, 5" center to center, 3/4' aluminum bird screen in removable frame. 040312 SNA201301 CD 23 30 00 - 1 04/18/13 2.5 DAMPERS A. Where dampers separate outdoors from indoors, they shall meet the following standards: Use no damper blade that is wider than 6 inches. Construct damper frames from at least 16 gauge, hot dipped galvanized steel. Fit each blade with double sided, inflatable, field replaceable, extruded vinyl edge seals that lock into slots in the blade. Size each blade to fit tightly between flexible, compressible, metal jamb seals. Set nylon bearings in stainless steel sleeves. Use hexagonal shafts for positive blade control. Conceal damper linkage inside the frames and out of the air stream. The entire assembly shall not rattle or vibrate. A closed damper shall not leak more than 6 SCFM per square foot of face area when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 for a damper selected at 2000 FPM and tested at 4 inches of water column pressure across the face. 2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. The flexible duct shall be of semi -rigid construction capable of maintaining the shaping required by job conditions without subsequent sagging or droop. Duct connections to equipment outlet collars shall be made in accordance with the duct manufacturer's recommendations. Maximum flexible air duct length not to exceed 6' -0 ". B. Flexible air duct shall be externally insulated with 1/2" thick 3/4 lb. density fiberglass wrapped around twice to 1" thick complete with non - combustible vapor barrier and UL listed. • C. Ductwork and insulation shall be UL listed as Flexible Air Ducts Connection Class I, and meet all NFPA 90A and 90B requirements. D. Insulated flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M -KE. E. No flexible ductwork connections shall be allowed in exposed ceiling areas 2.7 ACCESS DOORS A. Where motorized dampers, fire dampers, control equipment are installed in ductwork, provide suitable sized, gasketed doors in ducts. Doors shall be provided with Ventlok #220 door pull and #90 sash type latches. Use sponge rubber to felt gasketing material on door openings. Access doors in insulated ductwork shall be double wall construction with 1" insulation between wall 2.8 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide splitter dampers on all main ducts and where shown on the drawings. Provide Ventlok #690, self - locking splitter assembly on each damper. B. Provide Clevepak, Type DESC damper extractor with spin - collar at all branch take offs. C. Provide manual balancing damper at each main branch take - off as well as to each diffuser. D. In all inaccessible areas, provide balancing damper within reach at each diffuser or register. E. Provide turning vanes per SMACNA Standards in all square elbows. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Duct sizes shown are free area. Increase duct as a required to accommodate internal insulation. B. Provide a minimum of 2" wide flexible connectors to all ducted equipment less than 2000 CFM and 4" wide on 2000 CFM and greater. 040312 SNA201301 CD 23 30 00 - 2 04/18/13 C. Support all suspended motor and/or fan driven equipment on vibration isolators. D. All duct runout shall be equal to the grille or diffuser neck size unless indicated otherwise. END OF SECTION • 040312 SNA201301 CD 23 30 00 - 3 04/18/13 SECTION 23 80 00 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer's installation instructions prior to installing any piece of equipment or its associated service, (gas, hot or chilled water piping, flues, etc.). Any conflicts between the manufacturer's installation instructions and the plans or specification shall be brought to the engineer at once for clarification. Contractor will not receive additional money for installations requiring modifications due to these conflicts. • Part 2. — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Approved Manufacturers: Listed acceptable manufacturers shall be subject to compliance with specified requirements. 1. Fan Coils: Carrier, McQuay, First Company, Trane, Airtherm, IEC, Magic Aire. B. Condensate: 1. Provide condensate piping from each cooling coil condensate pan to nearest floor drain or common dram riser. 2. Provide an auxiliary drain pan beneath each cooling coil m which condensate will occur. 3. Provide condensate overflow safety switch Little Giant Model ACS -2, 3 or as option Diversitech SOS - 1. 4. Wire to shut off the unit served prior to overflow of the pan or sensing water build -up m the condensate piping. Piping shall be sized per Code and manufacturers recommendations with a minimum of 3 / ". C. Fan Coil Unit (FC): 1. Provide (Magic Aire) as scheduled. 2. Coils of aluminum fm- copper tube, minimum 4 rows for chilled water, minimum 1 row for heating water. 3. Forward curve blower wheels factory balanced. 4. Belt drive blowers. 5. Standard motors have overload protection. 6. Adjustable motor pulleys. • 7. Tapered hub type blower pulleys. 8. Fully insulated with 3/4" - 1 1/2 pound dual density insulation. 9. 2" pleated filters, Mery 8 (30 -35% efficiency). 10. Provide discharge arrangement as shown on the plans. 11. Large "easy to remove" access panels on front of each section. 12. Cabinets are fabricated of heavy gauge galvanealed steel, specially coated inside and out with Magic Aire beige baked powder enamel coating before assembly. 13. Bottom return units are to be built -up on legs as required. 14. Provide 2 row heating coils. Coils on 5 ton units and less are field assembled. Capacities based on 60 °F EAT and 180 °EWT. 15. Provide 4" concrete pad for units located on precast and existing building slab. 16. Provide stand with vibration isolators, minimum 1" deflection for units located on attic level of new and existing buildings. D. Fan Coils (FC): 110212 SNA201301 CD 23 80 00 - 1 04/18/13 1. Provide a fan coil hideaway or cabinet units as scheduled. Provide with the discharge duct collar, return air plenum, 2" filters, variable pitch motor sheaves, forward curved double width double inlet centrifugal fans statically and dynamically balanced. 2. Provide DX evaporator coil with matching [condensing unit] [heat pump]. Coils sized for 80°F DB/ 67 °F WB EAT. 3. Provide 2 row hot water coil with 24 volt two way control valve. Heating coils based on 20 °, 180° EWT 20° drop, 70 °F EAT. 4. Provide 3/4" condensate drain from each evaporator drain pan. Route to nearest floor drain or to the exterior 12" above finished grade. Part 3. - EXECUTION • 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation: 1. Support all suspended and floor mounted, motor and/or compressor driven equipment on spring isolators. END OF SECTION • • 110212 SNA201301 CD 23 80 00 - 2 04/18/13 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR: FRIENDSHIP CHURCH PRIOR LAKE, MN ARCHITECTS STATION NINETEEN ARCHITECTS 2001 UNIVERSITY AVE SE, SUITE 100 MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55414 (612) 623 -1800 ENGINEERS STEEN ENGINEERING, INC. 5430 DOUGLAS DRIVE NORTH CRYSTAL, MN 55429 (763) 585 -6742 Date: April 18, 2013 CD SET I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Mark R. Bren an Registration No. 24713 I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. lli Steven M. Youngs Registration No. 16544 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 26 00 20 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SECTION 26 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 26 05 10 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SECTION 26 05 19.10 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 05 33.10 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS SECTION 26 05 33.11 OUTLET BOXES SECTION 26 05 33.12 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES SECTION 26 05 35 RACEWAY SYSTEMS SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROLS SECTION 26 27 23 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES SECTION 26 51 00 LIGHTING SECTION 26 51 10 LIGHTING REBATES 081612 SNA201301 CD ELECTRICAL INDEX - 1 04/18/13 SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Electrical Division. B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Electrical Division work. No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits. C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers. D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the Architect/Engineer. E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Electrical Division and prior to final close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100% complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at fmal inspection shall be immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer. F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be directly credited to the Owner. 1.2 ELECTRICAL PLANS A. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the electrical work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other.. Any item. shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be considered as shown and specified on both. B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to the Engineer's attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and operational electrical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these Specifications. C. Drawings: 1. Contractor shall familiarize themselves with Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred spaces, suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc. 2. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all conduit and wire within soffits provided by the General Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically approved by the Architect and Engineer. 3. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate location only. Placement of electrical equipment and devices shall not interfere with locations or clearances of other trades' materials or equipment. 4. Contractor shall verify locations with architectural elevations. 5. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in the field. 6. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit within the available space. 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 1 04/18/13 7. Notify the Architect or Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical, Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. 8. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before installing any electrical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with other trades work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows: 1. Contractor: Shall mean Electrical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Electrical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with Contract Documents and deliver to site in a new, undamaged condition. 4. Connect: Shall mean to bring electrical service and/or control wiring to equipment, make all fmal connections, provide all necessary miscellaneous materials required and do fmal check out to ensure proper equipment connections. 5. Install: Shall mean to store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, connect, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating condition. 6. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install. E. CAD and Drawing Files: 1. Electrical CAD drawings prepared by Steen Engineering, Inc. for this Project are instruments of Steen Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this Project. During the course of the implementation of the Project, and with Steen Engineering, Inc. approval, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the preparation of Shop Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other projects, for additions to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others. Any revisions, additions and/or deletions to these CAD drawings, either intentional or unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of the person(s) making such revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s) shall hold harmless and indemnify Steen Engineering, Inc. of any and all responsibilities and liabilities. 2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be requested directly from the Architect. 1.3 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS A. For typical or repetetive HVAC unit installations, Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with Mechanical Contractor to schedule an inspection with local and/or state AHJ to review a complete mock -up example installation and receive approval prior to proceeding with additional installations. Installation shall meet all code and manufacturer's service clearance requirements. Contractor shall coordinate installation and subsequent inspection with general contractor and any related trades. B. Contractor shall submit '/ -inch scale drawing to the Engineer indicating placement of all mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. Indicate proposed locations of all major equipment and materials, including but not limited to service equipment, exterior wall and foundation penetrations, fire-rated wall and floor penetrations, sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases,. and mechanical/electrical equipment room layouts. This effort will require each trade to closely work together to produce a''/ -inch set of coordination drawings for each area of the building. C. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work. D. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials: 1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein. 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 0010 - 2 04/18/13 2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail. 3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the complete electrical installation. 4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, Contractor shall provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade practice. 5. Supply materials and equipment to the site in original packages, containers or crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule deliveries with other Contractors and the Engineer. 6. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage and protection from the elements for all materials and equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by Contractor as required by Engineer. 7. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior to final inspection and contract close out. 8. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type of material. Equipment shall be UL listed and labeled as an entire assembly or system. B. Prior Approvals: 1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details of the Specifications. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the use of substituted products and equipment, including additional labor and materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Within fifteen days after the award of the Contract, the Electrical Contractor shall submit shop drawings on all major electrical equipment to the Architect for approval. Shop Drawings shall be submitted by the Electrical Contractor, not their Subcontractors. These shop drawings shall cover such items as lighting fixtures, lamps, disconnects, fuses, starters, MCC sections, switchgear, devices, plates, panels, contactors, etc. The Contractor shall thoroughly review each item for compliance with these Specifications making any necessary corrections prior to submittal. Each shop drawing set shall be stamped, signed and dated indicating Contractor review. If the Contractor fails to properly review shop drawings, the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer for all additional reviews on a time and material basis. No equipment shall be released for shipment or installed prior to final approval by the Engineer. B. The Engineer will review all Shop Drawings submitted and will retain one copy for record file. C. Approval Stamp: This review is to verify general conformance with the design concept of the Project and substantial compliance with the information provided in the Contract Documents. This review does not in any way relieve the Contractor or their suppliers of their responsibility to provide all materials and equipment as specified, in quantities, quality and dimensions required. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 3 04/18/13 1. "No Exception Taken" indicates that the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. 2. "Make Noted Corrections" indicates that the Submittal, after noted corrections are made, appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without and increase in Contract Sum or Time. 3. "Revised and Resubmit" indicates that the noted revisions are such that a corrected copy of the Submittal is required for review to confirm that the noted revisions have been understood and made. The Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation after submitting a corrected copy and verifying with the reviewer that the corrected copy is acceptable, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in the Contract Sum or Time. 4. "Rejected" indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, a resubmission is required and fabrication or procurement is not authorized. D. If the Engineer rejects (Revised and Resubmit or Rejected) the same section two times the engineer shall be compensated for additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and will be deducted from the Contractor's application for payment. Contractor is responsible for all delays caused by the resubmittal process. E. Provide samples of materials or equipment proposed to be furnished, if requested. Samples shall become the property of the Architect/Engineer and will be returned only when accompanied by a written request to do so. F. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain an "As Built" set of bluelines on site, neatly notating routing, location or other field changes to the Contract Documents. Upon Project completion and prior to final close out, turn the "As Built" drawings over to the Owner. Provide a detailed transmittal indicating each sheet and other information turned. over to the Owner and acquire their representative's signature. This information shall be included at the project close out. 1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality workmanship will be accepted. B. The Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all Contractor generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner any interruptions necessary to existing systems prior shut down. D. Coordination: 1. Contractor shall give careful consideration. to work of other Contractors on the Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor's '''4" coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other trades. 2. The Electrical Contractor shall thoroughly review installation manuals for each piece of equipment requiring power control connections. Obtain instruction manuals from the Mechanical Contractor, Plumbing Contractor or Owner prior to roughing in any feeders or control wiring. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies between the electrical plans and specifications and the equipment installation manuals prior to any installation. If for any reason this Contractor fails to do so, any and all costs necessary to correct discrepancies will be borne by the Electrical Contractor. 3. Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications that apply for correlating information. 4. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation. 5. Should the Electrical Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that interferes with work of other Contractors, the Electrical Contractor shall make all necessary changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or conflict at the Electrical Contractor's expense. 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 4 04/18/13 E. Protection of Equipment: 1. Until fmal acceptance of the work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for the safety, good condition, and protection from damage of all materials and equipment installed. 2. If, during shipment or installation, the finish of equipment becomes chipped or scratched, the Contractor shall touch up or refmish surfaces to match original finish. 3. Switchboards, panelboards, transformers, bus ducts, motor starters and other electrical components stored or installed on -site shall be covered with plywood and polyethylene or an equivalent to protect them from any damage due to site conditions or from work by other trades. F. The Contractor shall complete all safety forms required by General Contractor. G. Live Work: All electrical equipment shall be de- energized prior to any work being performed. If it is necessary to work on any equipment live due to job conditions, precautions shall be taken to protect authorized personnel from accidentally coming in contact with live parts. Contractor shall have adequate personnel on site along with a back up plan to recover from an unscheduled outage. 1.7 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State where the project is being constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required for each type of work covered under these drawings and specifications. B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for the permanent services. C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national, state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. Following is a partial list of governing codes and/or standards: 1. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 3. State and Local Building Codes 4. State Board of Health 5. State Industrial Commission 6. State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations 7. National Electric Code 8. State and Local Electrical Installation Codes 9. Local Power Company Regulations and Requirements D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Electrical Contractor to meet all state and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of final inspection and approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O &M) manuals to the Owner prior to fmal close out. O &M manuals shall consist of approved shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment. O &M manuals shall be neatly bound in a 3 -ring binders, contain an index and section tabs and be labeled with the Project name. B. Name, address, and telephone number of each Contractor installing equipment and systems, local representative for each item of equipment and each system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications with the Section tab sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation and maintenance instructions. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in appropriate section. 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 5 04/18/13 1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of electrical equipment prior to fmal close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense to Owner, services of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, operation, and maintenance of all electrical systems provided by this Contractor to Owner's permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to Owner for regular operation. B. The Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of five days instruction period for Owner's personnel. C. Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill - timed operation or testing shall be repaired, at Contractor's expense, before final inspection and acceptance. 1.11) WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of defects that may develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of fmal completion of the Project or for as long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are in effect from the date of Owner acceptance of the Project, whichever is later. B. During the warranty period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone conversation of a problem with any electrical system, shall cause the Contractor to respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency. 1.11. TEMPORARY POWER A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary power and lighting to allow other Contractors and Subcontractors to perform their work. Prior to submitting a bid for this Project, contact the General Contractor to determine the type of equipment to be used in the performance of the work. The Electrical Bid shall include all labor and materials required to provide and maintain a complete temporary power and lighting system throughout the course of the project. Part 2. - PRODUCTS • N /A Para; 3. - EXECUTION N/A ENI) OF SECTION 081512 SNA201301 CD 26 00 10 - 6 04/18/13 SECTION 26 00 20 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all existing electrical systems and related equipment under this contract are in proper working order, and notify Owner and Engineer of any problems before beginning any new work. B. Contractor shall verify the condition and functionality of existing systems to which connections will be made, make the connections, and test. Coordinate with the General Contractor for any repairing, fmishing and patching work required to complete the new systems. Contractor shall leave the electrical system being disconnected in such condition as to allow for an easy, fast and clean reconnection of any new electrical systems. C. Equipment and materials being removed shall remain the property of the Owner. The Owner shall indicate which items, if any, are to be retained. Items to be salvaged and retained shall be removed, salvaged, cleaned and placed in a storage area designated by the Owner. All other material and equipment not wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly. D. Accomplish all demolition using only electricians skilled in the trade. If necessary, subcontract the work to meet this standard. If subcontracting is required, schedule the work to avoid delays or interruptions. E. Schedule work in cooperation with the Owner's representatives to avoid disturbance or interruptions of the Owner's services and functions. Provide off -hours work or phasing of the project to meet this requirement. F. The Engineer has performed a field survey to ascertain existing site conditions. This survey was visual only and no attempt was made to verify exact conduit routing above ceilings or in walls. The Contractor shall thoroughly review demolition and construction Drawings and Specifications and be fully aware of design intent. Additional work required due to deviations found after ceilings and walls are opened up shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Contractor shall notify Engineer immediately upon discovering any electrical equipment not shown on the Drawings that result in site conflicts. H. Telephone, television and fire alarm systems, etc. shall remain in full operating condition during the entire construction period. Should any portion of any system require relocation or demolition, this Contractor shall schedule the work with the Owner and system representative 48 hours prior to performing the actual work. I. Existing wiring and equipment: I. All existing wiring, fixtures and equipment shall remain as is, except where removal is called for on the Drawings and/or in the Specifications or made necessary by the alterations to the building as part of this contract. 2. All conduit and wiring uncovered by other contractors within the existing building walls, floors or structure shall be replaced or rerouted as necessary to complete the remodeling (i.e., where the General Contractor removes a wall or floor, or cuts an opening into a wall or floor, any conduit uncovered shall be rerouted by the Electrical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner). Wherever it is necessary to withdraw conductors from existing raceways, new conductors shall be installed. 3. All existing work altered during the course of remodeling shall be placed in safe operating condition, shall remain in service unless otherwise noted, and shall be restored to satisfactory operating condition. Part 2. — PRODUCTS N/A 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 00 20 - 1 04/18/13 Part 3. — EXECUTION 3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Carefully handle all fixtures and devices being removed. Properly store items scheduled for reinstallation. If the Contractor fails to properly protect items scheduled for reuse, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish new items, equal to the existing, at no cost to the Owner. B. Contractor shall properly dispose of all lamps and all fixture ballasts not reused in new construction. Remove all lamps and ballasts from the site and dispose with a state certified disposal facility. C. Where branch circuit or feeder conduits are stubbed out of a column or slab and will not be reused, cut back to a point below the finished surface and patch to match existing. . D. Daily clean all work areas to minimize dirt and dust in the facility. E. Wherever an existing device is removed, Contractor shall provide conduit and wiring as required to maintain service to all remaining devices. F. Wherever switches, receptacles, lighting fixtures and other electrical components are removed from boxes that remain in walls or ceilings, provide blank coverplates as required. Where clocks or speakers are removed, provide coverplates as required to cover entire opening. G. Wherever existing panels are modified, provide revised typed directories, identifying all circuits with clear plastic cover mounted in card holder. Room numbers or names used for circuit identification shall correspond to nameplates installed on room doors by General Contractor or as selected by Owner. If panel does not have a panel identification, provide a label per Section 26 24 16.10. END OF SECTION 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 00 20 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 26 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless noted otherwise in this Specification or on the Drawings, all materials shall be new and in their original packages. All materials shall comply with this Specification and at a minimum all applicable codes and standards as listed in Section 26 00 10. B. Nameplates shall identify equipment by name and source of power. They shall be a minimum of 1 1/4" x 3 ", or larger if necessary for wording. Lettering shall be a minimum of 3/16" in height. C. Any cutting and patching required in walls, floors, ceilings or partitions for the installation of electrical systems shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor. All cutting and patching shall be done with the prior approval of the Architect/ Engineer. Patching to match existing finishes shall be performed by the proper trades such as concrete fmishers, sheetrockers, tapers, painters etc. at the expense of the Electrical Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying locations of such things as piping, ductwork, equipment, door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, etc., prior to the installation of all electrical equipment. Installed electrical work that interferes with the work of other trades shall be relocated by the Electrical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Contractor shall paint all exposed electrical equipment, such as conduit/raceway, meter sockets and panels, to match adjacent finishes. Refer to Architectural Specifications for method to be used. F. Switched receptacles, where shown, shall be modified and connected so that only the upper portion is switched. G. Receptacles and outlets located on opposite sides of a common wall shall not be mounted in the same stud space. At least one stud shall separate devices. Where this requirement is not practical, such as in back to back floor plans where devices must be back to back, the use of 3M MPP-4S moldable Puddy Pad shall be used in sufficient thickness to match the hour rating of the wall. H. All switches, receptacles and outlets installed within rated assemblies shall be firestopped to maintain rating of assemblies. I. Circuit numbers shown are for reference only within noted panel. Contractor shall neatly identify correct circuit numbers on the as -built drawings. J. Where required, the Contractor shall provide GFI devices or GFI breakers per the NEC. Part 2. - PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Identify all pull and junction boxes with circuit or feeder numbers and source of power using black magic marker. B. Each panelboard shall be provided with a typed circuit directory. Clearly describe loads and areas served. Room names or Owner's room numbers shall be used. Handwritten directories will not be accepted. 120911 SNA201301 CD 26 00 50 - 1 04/18/13 C. The Contractor shall perform saw cutting, trenching, backfilling, compaction and patching required for underground raceway systems shown or specified. D. Contractor shall verify the location of all fixtures and devices with the Architect prior to installation. E. Provide access panels where j -boxes or pull boxes are installed in inaccessible locations. All access panels shall be approved by the Engineer and Architect prior to installation. F. All receptacles and outlets located in block walls shall be mounted so that only one block is cut. G. Contractor shall submit all fire stopping methods to the local authorities for approval. Provide copies of all approved fire stopping methods to the Engineer. All fire stopping shall be reviewed and approved by Local Authorities prior to installation. • H. Seal all penetrations and sleeves through floors and fire walls with a high temperature, fire rated sealant. Fire stop material shall be Chase Technology CTCPR -855 fire stop, 3M brand Fire Barrier Penetration System or Nelson Flameseal System. END OF SECTION • 120911 SNA201301 CD 26 00 50 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 10 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide circuits, including final connections unless noted otherwise, to each item of electrically powered equipment wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS N/A 1.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect all equipment per instruction manuals provided by the Mechanical Contractor, Plumbing Contractor or Owner as specified in Section 26 00 10. B. Connect all equipment as indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule and as specified in Section 26 24 19. C. Do not scale Electrical Drawings for rough -in dimensions. Part 2. - PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION N/A END OF SECTION 092712 SNA201301 CD 26 05 10 - 1 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 19.10 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) Part 1. - GENERAL It SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide and connect 600 volt and below wire and cable. B. Wiring Sizing: Wire sizes indicated on Drawings are for copper conductors. Conductor sizes are specified by American Wire Gage (AWG) numbers, except where conductor cross sections in MCM is indicated. Unless noted otherwise conductors smaller than 12 AWG shall not be used for branch circuits. C. In Conduit: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, electric system conductors shall be installed in conduit. Conduit fill requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) shall not be exceeded. D. MC Cable: MC Cable may be used where permitted by Code. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): Devices shall be in accordance with Section 26 00 10. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 00 10. 1.4 CONDUCTORS FOR COMMUNICATION AND OTHER SYSTEMS A. General Requirements: Refer to specific communication system Sections for conductor requirements. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All wire and cable and accessories shall be as follows: 1. Building Wire/Cable: Recognized manufactures of electrical building wire. 2. Plastic Tape: AMP, Eagle or 3M. 3. Spring Wire Connectors: Heyco, Ideal, 3M or T &B. 4. Split -Bolt Connectors: Bumdy, O- Z✓Gedney, Square D, or T &B. 5. Solderless Crimp Pressure Connectors: Burndy, Ideal T &B or 3M. 6. Twist -on Wire Connectors: Buchanan, Ideal or 3M. 7. Vinyl Electric Insulation Tape: Permacel, Tomic or 3M. 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Copper Conductors: Conductors shall be soft, annealed 98% copper, electrically continuous and free from short circuits or grounds. B. Aluminum Conductors: Aluminum conductors shall not be used on this Project. 23 SOLID AND STRANDED A. General Requirements: 120511 SNA201301 CD 26 05 19.10 - 1 04/18/13 1. Wires shall be solid or stranded for sizes 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Wires shall be stranded for sizes 8 AWG and larger. 2.4 INSULATION A. Voltage Class: Insulation, unless otherwise noted, shall be 600 volt. B. Insulation Type: Conductor insulation shall be as follows: 1. Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuit Conductors: Type THfN/THWN with a temperature rating of 75 C. 2. Direct Burial Conductors: As noted on Drawings. Type USE or OF cross - linked polyethylene. C. Color Code: Wire and cable color shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. On larger cables, where factory color coding is not available, marking tape shall be used to identify each phase and neutral conductors. A minimum length of six inches shall be color coded at each end. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall match existing wiring systems. 2.5 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS A. Conductors 8 AWG and Smaller. Use solderless crimp or indent type pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps for 8 AWG. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps. Strictly comply with the number, size and combination of conductors as listed on manufacturer's packaging. B. Conductors 6 AWG and Larger. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape. 2.6 CONTROL WIRING A. General Requirements: 1. Control conductors shall be 14 AWG or larger. 2. Conductors shall be sized large enough so that voltage drop under in -rush conditions will not adversely affect operation of the controls. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide 12 AWG or larger conductors for power and lighting circuits and no wire smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. 2. Provide 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit rims longer than 75 feet and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit runs longer than 150 feet. 3. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable. 4. Conductors shall be tested to be continuous and free from shorts and grounds. 5. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. 6. Conductor lengths for parallel circuits shall be equal. 7. Provide a minimum of twelve inches of slack conductor at each outlet. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. General Requirements: 120511 SNA201301 CD 26 05 19.10 - 2 04/18/13 1. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wires. 2. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3. Control and communication conductors shall be installed in separate, dedicated raceway systems. 3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. General Requirements: 1. Splices shall only occur in accessible junction boxes. Splices in conductors installed below grade are not permitted. 2. Wires shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to installing lugs and connectors. 3. Splices, taps and terminations shall be made to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. 4. Spare conductors shall be terminated with electrical tape. END OF SECTION 120511 SNA201301 CD 26 05 19.10 - 3 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 33.10 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide conduits wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 0010. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Conduit and Fittings: Galvanized steel by recognized manufacturers of conduit systems of type and sizes required. B. Non - Metallic Conduit: High impact PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) heavy wall, Schedule 40 rated for 90° C wire, Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed in accordance with Article 347 of the National Electric Code (NEC) for underground and exposed use. PVC conduit shall be Schedule 80 for under roadway or vehicle crossing area. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: All conduit shall be of one manufacturer as follows: 1. Alfex 2. Allied • 3. Carlon 4. Republic 5. Sealtight • 6. Triangle 7. VAW of America 8. Youngstown D. Acceptable Manufacturers: All conduit shall be of one manufacturer as follows: 1. Appleton 2. CH 3. Kellems 4. OZ Red Dot 5. T&B 2.2 CONDUITS A. Minimum Size: Conduit shall be sized according to the Drawings, with no conduit smaller than ' /2 -inch trade size. If not sized on the Drawings, the NEC shall be used to determine the size based on the number and size of conductors required. The Engineer shall approve all calculated conduit sizes and method of installation prior to installation. B. Type: Conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel. In lieu of rigid galvanized steel the following conduits may be used only as specified herein: 1. Intermediate Steel Conduit may be used in all locations. 2. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): May be used in dry locations for wiring below 600 volts in all 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 1 04/18/13 interior spaces not in direct contact with earth or where exposed to weather using steel watertight compression fittings and backstraps. EMT shall not be installed in the following areas: a. Concrete slabs on grade or in soil. b. Unprotected within five feet of finished floor. c. Conduit drops in shop areas. d. Conduit stub -ups to equipment or machinery. e. Hazardous areas. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be permitted only in the following locations: a. Flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to equipment such as motors, fixed equipment, electric heating equipment, ect. Trade sizes 'A -inch through 1 '/ -inch shall be used in lengths no longer than twenty-four inches, 2- inches through 3- inches no longer than thirty-six inches, 3 ' /cinch through 4 -inch no longer than forty-eight inches. b. Fittings shall be steel set screw type for smaller sizes and steel clamp type for larger sizes. c. For light fixture connections, where conduit is concealed above ceilings, lengths shall not exceed six inches (3/8 -inch diameter size may be used above concealed ceilings to connect light fixtures). d. Concealed within equipment cabinets if approved by Architect/Engineer. 4. Rigid Non - Metallic Conduit: May be used only where run in soil or in concrete slabs on grade unless otherwise noted on Drawings or specified herein. a. Conduit entries into pole bases or concrete pads shall be rigid galvanized steel. Conduits emerging • out of floor slab -on -grade shall be rigid galvanized steel. b. All non - metallic conduits shall have a grounding conductor sized in accordance with Table 250 -95 of the NEC. Contractor shall increase conduit size to accommodate the grounding conductor. 5. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: May be used in lieu of rigid galvanized steel with approval of Engineer. 2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit: 1. Couplings, locknuts and bushings shall be threaded type. Threadless couplings shall not be used without prior approval of Engineer. 2. Locknuts shall be of the conduit type. 3. Bushings shall consist of an insulating insert molded or locked into metallic body fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or non - metallic material are not permitted. 4. Where conduit is installed in concrete, Erickson -type and set -screw couplings may be used to complete a conduit run. Set -screw fittings shall be approved for concrete installation and shall be case - hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly set in conduit wall for positive ground. 5. Threaded cast iron type sealing fittings shall be used. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be continuous drain type. Fittings in concealed work shall be installed in a flush steel box with blank coverplate having the same finish as that of other electrical plates in room. B. EMT: 1. For conduit 2 -inch and smaller, fittings shall be concrete tight compression gland type only, with threaded outer nut or set -screw type. Fittings shall be malleable steel type, not cast. 2. For conduit over 2 -inch, connectors shall be set -screw type with two screws each and couplings shall be set -screw type with four screws each. Set - screws shall be case - hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly set in wall of conduit for positive ground. 3. Indent type connectors shall not be permitted. 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 2 04/18/13 4. Fittings made of pot metal Die cast or pressure -cast zinc alloy shall not be permitted. C. Flexible Metal: Multiple point type threading into internal wall of conduit convolutions or set -screw type. Material shall be only steel or malleable iron. D. Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal: Type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats. Material shall be only steel or malleable iron. E. Direct Burial Rigid Non - Metallic Conduit: Fittings as recommended by conduit manufacturer for bonding with solvent cement. Provide PVC -40 in all landscape areas and PVC -80 under all covered areas where vehicles travel. F. Expansion Fittings: Use expansion fittings in conduits installed in concrete slabs or in soil under slabs at the point where conduits cross expansion joints. Verify expansion joint locations with concrete installer. Expansion fittings shall be O.Z. Type AX for rigid conduit, O.Z. Gedney Type TX for EMT conduit and Carlon Type E945 for rigid non - metallic conduit. All rigid non - metallic conduits installed at a temperature of 25° F above or below the final conduit temperature, as well as all rigid non - metallic conduits installed in temperatures below 50° F, shall require expansion fittings. Where temperature conditions require the use of rigid non - metallic expansion fittings, provide one expansion fitting for each conduit run up to one - hundred feet long. Runs over one- hundred feet in length require one expansion fitting for each one - hundred feet or portion thereof. 2.4 FIRE STOPS A. General Requirements: Conduits and conduit sleeves that penetrate fire rated walls or partitions shall be sealed with Hevi- Duty/Nelson, Type CLK, non - sagging adhesive sealant. Basis of design is Hevi- Duty/Nelson, Type CLK. Additional approved manufactures are 3M and Specified Technologies Inc. All firestopping products shall be installed by experienced workers, familiar with the proper application and installation of appropriate U.L fire stopping design rating systems. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit fire stopping manufacturer's appropriate conduit and conduit sleeve penetration system design criteria and UL approved number for each type of UL fire stopping design rating system used on the project. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT A. General Requirements: 1. Conduits shall be concealed within floor, ceiling or wall building construction, unless specifically noted or otherwise specified. Conduits shall only be installed exposed in boiler rooms, mechanical rooms and electric rooms and for connections at motors and surface cabinets. 2. Conduit systems shall be complete with fittings and accessories to make system complete and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and to cabinets and junction boxes. Conduits shall form a neat appearing, mechanically firm assembly, adhering to NECA standards of installation and good electrical practice. Conduit ends shall be reamed before installation and shall be capped during construction period. Route exposed conduits and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping with elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. 3. Conduits shall not obstruct head room, walkways or doorways. 4. Conduits shall be secured to cabinets, junctions boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes by bonding type locknuts. Rigid and IMC conduit installations shall have a locknut on outside of enclosure and locknut and bushing on inside of enclosure. EMT installations may have a single locknut on inside of enclosure, wrench tight. Conduit connections shall not be made to junction box covers. 5. Provide a pull wire in empty conduits, consisting of one No. 12 steel or copper wire or heavy duty nylon cord for small conduits and nylon rope for large conduits. 6. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Conduit shall be 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 3 04/18/13 fastened using straps or clamps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers or bolted split galvanized hangers secured to structure with machine screws, expansion sleeves or lead anchors. Spring steel type supports or fasteners shall be permitted for concealed 1/2 -inch EMT only. Chain, wire or perforated straps shall not be used to support or fasten conduit. 7. Conduit support spacing shall be provided as required by the NEC, but in no case shall the maximum spacing of supports exceed six feet for conduits smaller than 1 -inch trade size and 10 feet for conduits f- inch trade size and larger. 8. Group conduits in parallel runs where practical using conduit racks constructed of steel channel with conduit straps /clamps or trapeze hangers with U -bolts or other approved fasteners. 9. Conduits that are direct buried in the same trench shall be group in parallel runs where practical. The conduits shall be installed using racks or supports to maintain air separation between all conduits as per NEC at a minimum. 10. Fasteners shall be sized and designed for intended use. Fasteners, in solid masonry or concrete, shall be steel or malleable iron concrete inserts, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter steel expansion anchors embedded not less than 1 1/8- inches or 1/4 -inch minimum diameter power set fasteners with depth of penetration at least three inches. Hollow masonry anchors shall be toggle bolts, hollow wall fasteners, or concrete block anchors. Sheetmetal screws shall be used on metal studs and wood screws used on wood construction. Attachment by wood plugs or wood blocking is not permitted. 11. Support vertical conduit runs at each floor slab with approved hangers. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: All conduits shall be installed in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation: 1. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. 2. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. 3. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheetmetal boxes in damp or wet locations. 4. Install no more than equivalent of four 90- degree bends between boxes for power circuits and two 90- degree bends for low voltage and communications circuits. 5. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. Outdoor conduits shall be graded a minimum of six inches per one - hundred feet with no traps and shall be pitched to drain into manholes, pull boxes or suitable located drain tees. 6. Coordinate all conduits with other trades. Consult with Mechanical Contractor before installing conduits for electrical feeders so that conflicts between locations of conduit runs, piping, and ductwork will be adjusted prior to installation. In general, large pipe mains and air ducts shall be given priority in available space. Conduit runs shall be installed so as to maintain, wherever practical, a minimum separation of three inches from water and waste piping and six inches from steam piping. 7. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations. B. Conduits in Soil or Slabs on Grade: Metallic conduit shall have a factory coating of 20 mil bonded PVC or shall be field coated on outside with asphaltum before installation. Couplings and damaged areas of coating shall be completely coated after installation. Conduits shall be at least eight inches below bottom of slabs on grade. C. Conduits in Slabs Not On Grade: Conduits shall occupy the middle third when practical and have at least 1 1/4- inch concrete cover. Consult with the General Contractor to determine minimum allowable horizontal spacing between conduits to maintain structural integrity of floor slab. Conduits shall be tied to reinforcing rods to prevent movement or sagging during pour. D. Conduits in Concrete Joists and Columns: No conduits shall be run in steel reinforced concrete joists, beams or columns without approval of Architect/Engineer; except for conduit runs to switches and receptacles specifically shown in columns. E. Conduits in New Masonry Walls: Conduits shall be installed during wall construction or "fished in ". No conduit shall be channeled in without special permission of Architect. 061507 SNA201301 CD 260533.10 -4 04/18/13 F. Horizontal Runs in Walls: No conduit shall run horizontally in concrete block or brick walls without approval of Architect/Engineer. Horizontal runs shall be made in floor or ceiling construction. G. Conduits on Equipment: Conduits shall not be mounted on ductwork, boilers, ventilation units or other such mechanical equipment, except where necessary to make connections to electrical devices that are part of or mounted on such equipment. Where conduits must be nun on equipment, care shall be taken not to cover access doors, controls, removable panels, etc., or otherwise hinder the normal maintenance and repair of the equipment. H. Conduits Under Boilers: No conduit shall be run under boiler. I. Conduit Through Roofs: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket. J. Expansion Fittings: Install expansion fittings where conduits in concrete slabs or in soil under slabs cross building expansion joints. Conduits installed in suspended ceiling spaces shall have offsets or bends adjacent to building expansion joints. K. Conduits in Demountable Partitions: Conduit shall enter partitions from ceiling to facilitate future partition removal. No conduits shall enter from floors. A junction box shall be provided above ceiling at the point where conduit enters partition. L. Conduits Through Exterior Walls: Where conduit systems pass through exterior walls or footings below grade, entrance shall be made watertight by providing pipe sleeves in wall with 1/2 -inch minimum clearance around conduit and caulking with oakum or an approved non - hardening type caulking compound. Alternate acceptable method is by means of a conduit entrance seal, O.Z. /Gedney Company, Type "FSK" or as approved by Engineer. Seal conduit stubs as described above. In addition, inside of conduit shall be sealed watertight with an approved non - hardening low to no VOC emitting type caulking compound packed around wires. M. Conduits Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings: Branch circuit conduits and conduits feeding ceiling lighting shall not be supported by suspended ceiling lighting fixtures, mechanical piping or air conditioning ducts. Branch circuit conduits may be fastened to ceiling support members with fasteners designed for that purpose. • N. Conduit Sleeves: Same material as conduits required in the area. Both ends of sleeves shall have bushings. 3.3 GROUTING AND FIRE STOPS A. General Requirements: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for grouting airtight any openings adjacent to conduits and other openings to seal against passage of air, smoke or vapors. Openings around conduits through floors shall be sealed watertight. 2. Contractor shall seal around each conduit or conduit sleeve penetrating fire rated walls or partitions with sealant specified. Interior conduit sleeves in walls or partitions shall be sealed to provide a complete fire rated installation in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3. All firestopping products shall be installed by experienced workers, familiar with the proper application and installation of appropriate UL fire stopping design rating systems. Contractor shall submit fire stopping manufacturer's appropriate conduit and conduit sleeve penetration system design criteria and UL approved number for each type of UL fire stopping design rating system used on the project prior to installation. 3.4 CONDUIT STUB - UPS A. Stubbed Up Through Floor Slabs: Where conduit is called to be stubbed up at an exposed location, a rigid conduit threaded coupling shall be installed flush with finish floor. Provide a recessed pipe plug, flush with floor, in each stub -up. 3.5 EMPTY CONDUITS 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 5 04/18/13 A. Identification: Empty conduits installed for future use or for use by others shall have markers and identification at terminations. Empty boxes shall be marked with the system named in a visible place on the exposed coverplate. END OF SECTION • 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.10 - 6 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 33.11 OUTLET BOXES Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide outlet boxes of heavy gauge galvanized steel, of knockout type, wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Recognized Manufacturers of electric outlet boxes, manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code (NEC) and industry standards. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Ceiling Boxes: 4 -inch octagonal ceiling boxes shall be used, except as otherwise specified. For additional wire space 4 11/16 —inch square boxes may be used. Outlet boxes for fixtures shall be complete with fixture studs. B. Wall Boxes: 4 -inch square wall boxes shall be used with one or two device raised cover. Raised covers or tile rings shall be flush with fmished walls. 1. Boxes in plastered walls shall be standard 4 inch square boxes with appropriate plaster rings. 2. Boxes in brick, exposed concrete block, glazed tile and wood paneled walls shall be 4 -inch square having a raised cover with straight sides not less than 1 -inch. 4 11/16 - inch square box may be used for additional wire space. Where thickness of masonry or more than two gangs are required 3 3 / -inch high masonry boxes may be used. 3. Switch boxes in door frames shall be Raco No. 426 with Sierra narrow plates. 4. Boxes that are surface mounted shall be 4 -inch square with pressed steel plates. Where mounted within six inches of a floor, box type shall be "FS" or "FD ". 5. Straight through and sectional switch boxes shall not be used. 6. Flanged airtight boxes shall be NuTek Airtight #FWSW series. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: - 1. Boxes shall not be recessed back- to-back on opposite sides of wall, offset a minimum of six inches. Through wall boxes shall not be used. 2. Boxes shall be roughed -in to provide a neat appearance. Centerlines of boxes shall be aligned vertically and horizontally. Boxes shall be symmetrically located with the major architectural features when they occur between doors and windows and in wood panels. 3. Adjust horizontal position of boxes such that bottom of box is located on top of masonry coarse and vertical centerline is either on a masonry course or centered on a masonry unit. Contractor shall coordinate with other trades so boxes are installed with no unsightly joints around them. 4. Boxes shall be installed such that the front of box is flush with fmished wall, boxes more than ''A inch back from finished wall shall not be acceptable. 5. Boxes used for narrow fluorescent fixtures shall have openings of such a size that they will be completely covered by fixtures. 6. Boxes in finished ceiling construction shall be supported by structural building members or when necessary 111709 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.11 - 1 04/18/13 7. Provide flanged airtight boxes in the interior side of exterior walls. 8. Contractor shall coordinate height and location of boxes with Architectural elevations and other trades so as not to conflict with other work or equipment. Boxes shall not interfere with door trim. It shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to move boxes that conflict with others at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION • 111.709 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.11 - 2 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 33.12 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide pull boxes as required to facilitate the pulling of wires or when more than four quarter bends occur in any conduit run. No attempt has been made to show all necessary boxes on Drawings. Part2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Type: 1. Pull and junction boxes shall be sized and installed to meet requirements of Article 314 of the latest edition National Electric Code (NEC). 2. Provide galvanized code -gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Pull and junction boxes shall be located to be accessible after building is finished. Pull and junction boxes shall not be placed m any finished spaces without prior approval of Architect/Engineer. No boxes shall be installed above plaster ceilings without prior approval of Architect/Engineer. 1. Pull boxes installed above lay -in ceiling tiles shall be within twenty-four inches of ceiling for accessibility and shall not conflict with removal of ceiling tiles. 2. Pull boxes shall be within twenty-four inches where installed above access panels. 3.2 CONDUCTORS IN PULL BOXES A. General Requirements: Conductors shall be of sufficient length within pull boxes to neatly train conductors without excess. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Pull Boxes: Pull boxes shall be identified as to type of system in box as follows: 1. Stencil coverplate with 1/2 -inch black letters in non - finished areas. 2. Identify with a tag inside of box in finished areas. 3. Paint boxes red and stencil "FIRE ALARM" for all boxes used for fire alarm and detection systems. B. Conductors: Identify in a permanent neat and legible manner all conductors or cables within box by means of tags, pressure sensitive tape or cable ties. END OF SECTION 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 33.12 - 1 04/18/13 SECTION 26 05 35 RACEWAY SYSTEMS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Unless specifically noted or specified otherwise, install all electrical wiring in an enclosed raceway system. Raceway materials shall be as specified in Section 26 05 33.10. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Raceway Size: Raceways should be sized to meet the minimum requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and all state and local codes and ordinances. Where raceway sizes are indicated, provide raceways shown. B. Conduit Fill: Conduit fill shall be based on THWN conductors, at 75° C, as listed in the latest edition of the NEC. Derating shall be considered when sizing conduits. Provide increased conduit size where required. Part 2. - PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Concealed: Raceways shall be installed concealed, unless specifically noted or otherwise specified. Generally, raceways shall be installed exposed only on walls and ceilings of unfinished rooms, equipment rooms or where indicated on Drawings. • B. Continuous System: Raceway systems shall be complete from outlet to outlet and from cabinets and junction boxes. Raceway systems shall enter and be secured to boxes and cabinets in such a manner that the system shall • be electrically continuous from point of origin to outlets. C. Mounting: Raceways shall not be mounted on boiler, ventilation units or other such mechanical equipment, except where necessary to make connections to electrical devices that are part of or mounted on such equipment. D. Interference: Coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor prior to installing conduit or pull boxes for electrical feeders to avoid conflicts with locations of raceway runs and mechanical equipment. Revisions to the raceway system made to avoid conflicts shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 061507 SNA201301 CD 26 05 35 - 1 04/18/13 SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROLS Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. In general, all motors indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule or as shown on the Drawings are furnished, set in place and mounted by others. Motor locations and mounting heights are approximate and shall be verified with the motor installer. 2. Provide a feeder from a panelboard through a disconnecting switch and starter to each motor. Provide final connections to each motor and check each motor for proper rotation. 3. Provide all disconnects and starters indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule, unless specifically noted as "Furnished by Others ", in which case install disconnects and starters as required for a complete system. 4. Refer to the Electrical Equipment Schedule Notes for control requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 00 10. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All motor control devices shall be of the same manufacturer as follows (Square D catalog numbers are used to specify required type): 1. Allen - Bradley 2. Cutler - Hammer/Eaton 3. Furnas 4. General Electric 5. Siemens 6. Square D 2.2 COMBINATION UNITS A. General Requirements: Provide combination devices where a disconnect switch is indicated at the same location as a magnetic starter. 2.3 DISCONNECTING MEANS A. General Requirements: Provide all disconnect switches indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule, except where specifically noted as "Furnished By Others ", in which case install switches as required for a complete system. B. Type: Disconnect switches shall be as follows: 1. Heavy duty type, fusible, unless otherwise indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule. 2. NEMA 1 enclosure, except NEMA 3R where installed outside or on roof. 3. Motor rated for proper horsepower. 4. Proper voltage rating. 011911 SNA201301 CD 26 24 19 - 1 04/18/13 5. Fuses shall be sized as specified in Section 26 28 13. 6. Electrical interlock to disconnect all separately derived control circuits or interlock wiring. 7. Terminals suitable for both 60 °C and 75 °C conductors. 2.4 MAGNETIC STARTERS A. General Requirements: Provide all magnetic starters indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule, except where specifically noted as "Furnished By Others ", in which case install magnetic starters as required for a complete system. B. Type: Magnetic starters shall be non - reversing type (Square D, Class 8536). Each starters shall be complete with all of the following features: 1. Full voltage, across - the -line, horsepower rated. Terminals suitable for both 60 °C and 75 °C conductors. 2. Surface mounted NEMA 1 enclosures, except NEMA 3R where installed outside or on roof. 3. Motor running over - current protection in each ungrounded conductor. Electrical Contractor shall verify actual name plate current ratings of each motor prior to installation over - current protection. 4. Low voltage release. 5. Holding coil of proper voltage. 6. Control Transformer: Provide a transformer of the same voltage as the holding coil, within each magnetic starter. Transformer shall be complete with both primary and secondary fusing. 7. Hand - Off -Auto Selector Switch: Switch shall be mounted on starter cover and connected in circuit such that protective devices remain in circuit in both auto and hand positions ((Square D, Class 9999). 8. Pilot Light: Pilot light shall be mounted on starter cover and shall be complete with red lens and lamp (Square D, Class 9999). 9. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide a minimum of four auxiliary contacts per starter. 2.5 MANUAL STARTERS A. General Requirements: Provide all manual starters indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule, except where specifically noted as "Furnished By Others ", in which case install manual starters as required for a complete system. B. Type: Manual starters shall be as follows: 1. Full voltage, across - the -line, horsepower rated. 2. One motor running over - current protector in each ungrounded conductor. 3. In finished areas, all manual starters shall be flush mounted in plates to match device plates sized to fit standard outlet boxes (Square D, Class 2510). Manufacturer's direction plate for resetting overloads shall be installed on flush plates. Plates shall be engraved as noted in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule. 4. Where exposed conduit is permitted, manual starters (Square D, Class 2510) shall be in surface boxes. 5. Pilot lights with manual starters shall be red neon jewel type. Pilot lights shall be connected to conductors at actual motor location in order to indicate that motor is running. 2.6 CONTROL STATIONS A. General Requirements: Provide all control devices as noted in the Mechanical and Electrical Schedule. In finished areas, all control stations shall be flush mounted in plates to match device plates and of a size to fit standard outlet boxes. B. Type: Control stations shall be as follows: 1. Start-Stop Maintained Stations:, Maintained contact type for 2 -wire control of magnetic starters. Actuator buttons shall be engraved start-stop (Square D, Class 9001). 2. Start -Stop Momentary Stations: For 3 -wire control of magnetic starters or relays. Engrave actuator 011911 SNA201301 CD 262419 -2 04/18/13 3. Toggle Switch Stations: Provide standard toggle switches as specified under Section 26 27 23. 4. Pilot Lights: Pilot lights at start-stop stations shall be incandescent type with red lens. Pilot lights at the toggle switches shall be neon type mounted in separate gangs of device plates. Pilot lights shall be connected to conductors on load side of disconnect at motor in order to indicate that motor is running. 5. Float Switches, Pressure Switches, P.E. Switches, and E.P. Switches: Device shall be furnished and installed by others, but connected by Electrical Contractor. Verify location of such equipment with the installer. 6. Special Key Switches: Each key switch, including special wall outlet boxes and engraved plates shall be furnished by others but installed by Electrical Contractor. 7. Limit Switches: Switches shall be furnished and set in place by others, but installed by Electrical Contractor. The number of limit switches and function shall be coordinated with equipment suppliers' Shop Drawings. 8. Snap Switch: Control motor with switch on the Drawings. 9. Duct Heat or Smoke Fire Detectors: Refer to Section 26 90 00.10 or Section 26 90 00.11. 10. Engraving: Provide engraving of remote motor control stations to properly identify station. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DISCONNECTS AND STARTERS A. General Requirements: Provide disconnecting switches and starters indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule noted as "Furnished By Others ", in which case install disconnect switches and starters as required for a complete system. B. Starters and Disconnect Locations: Locations shown on Drawings are approximate and shall be coordinated on site to clear other equipment, provide proper accessibility and provide ease of maintenance. Starters and disconnects shall be installed with clearances as required by the NEC. Starters and disconnects shall be installed in locations that do not provide required clearances only with the prior approval of both the Electrical Inspector and Architect/Engineer. In general, starters and disconnects shall be located near the motors, wall mounted not more than 6 feet above the floor or mounted on equipment where readily accessible from the floors and shall not be mounted over live or moving parts. When indicated to be installed above finished ceilings, starters and disconnects shall be located within 24 inches of ceiling for ease of maintenance and accessibility. C. Elevator. Shunt -trip circuit breaker(s) (STB) or fused disconnects shall be located in elevator equipment room immediately next to knob side of equipment room entrance door. Coordinate exact location with elevator inspector. D. Starter Overloads: Provide running current protection in each starter based on actual motor nameplate readings and overload manufacturer's selection tables. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONTROLS A. General Requirements: Provide all control wiring indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule. Provide adequate auxiliary contacts and relays to accomplish interlocks and subsidiary control connections. Coordinate all work with Mechanical and Temperature Control Contractors, such that operation of mechanical equipment will be as described in Mechanical Specifications. B. Hand - Off -Auto Operation: Where equipment does not have automatic control, connect the hand - off -auto selector switch for manual operation with automatic position available for future use. Connections to selector switch shall be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices will be bypassed when switch is in manual position; safety control devices, such as low- or high- pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in motor - control circuit in both manual and automatic positions of the selector switch. 33 MOTOR CONNECTIONS 011911 SNA201301 CD 26 24 19 - 3 04/18/13 A. General Requirements: Provide feeders from panelboards, through disconnecting switches and starters, to all motors. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to motors and shall not be less than 12 inches nor more than 24 inches in length. Flexible metal conduit in boiler rooms, kitchens and mechanical rooms shall be liquid tight type. Provide a separate grounding conductor within flexible conduit, bonded to conduit system, for motors. B. Connections to Roof Mounted Motors: Provide weatherproof connections to all roof mounted motors. C. Connections to Wall Hung Water Coolers: Install in accordance with cooler manufacturer's requirements. Conceal receptacle behind cooler enclosure at all devices where possible. 3.4 LABELING AND ENGRAVING A. Labeling: Provide labels inscribed with both the motor name and number attached to each motor disconnect and to each motor starter or combination switch - starter. Each motor name shall be as indicated in the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule. On projects where no Equipment Schedule is provided, motor names shall be as directed by Engineer. Labels shall be black micarta plastic laminate plates with 1/4 -inch high white cut letters. B. Engraving: Provide identification on remote motor control pushbutton stations, momentary contact stations and hand-off-auto stations. Flush plates shall be engraved with Sierra permanent type filled letters. Surface mounted control stations shall have 1/4 -inch high white cut letters on black micarta plates. END OF SECTION • 011911 SNA201301 CD 26 24 19 - 4 04/18/13 SECTION 26 27 23 WIRING DEVICES Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide all labor, materials and accessories as required to install and connect wiring devices wherever required by Drawings and Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings m accordance with Section 26 00 10. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All wiring devices shall be of the same manufacturer as follows (Leviton and Hubbell catalog numbers are used to specify required type and quality): 1. Cooper 2. General Electric 3. Hubbell 4. Leviton 5. Pass & Seymour 6. Slater 7. Sierra B. Acceptable Manufacturers: All wiring devices shall be of the same manufacturer as follows: 1. Cooper 2. Leviton 3. Sierra 4. Slater 2.2 DEVICE COLOR A. General Requirements: Unless noted otherwise, all wiring devices and wall plates shall be coordinated with the Architect. Submit samples to Architect for review and approval. 2.3 SWITCHES A. General Requirements: Switches for lighting loads shall be 15 amp or 20 amp, 120 volt, quiet toggle type and side wired. B. Switches shall be the following: 1. 15 amp, 120/277 volt, single pole Leviton #1201 -2X 2. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, single pole Leviton #1221 -2X 3. 15 amp, 120/277 volt, 3 -way Leviton #1203 -2X 4. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 3 -way Leviton #1223 -2X 5. 15 amp, 120/277 volt, 4 -way Leviton #1204 -2X 6. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 4 -way Leviton #1224 -2X 7. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 2 -pole Leviton #1222-2X 022813 SNA201301 CD 26 27 23 - 1 04/18/13 C. Door frame switches shall be Pass & Seymour No. ACD -201 or ACD -203 as required, complete with mounting straps and stainless steel plates. D. Timer switches shall be Leviton LTB30 -1L, electronic with four presets, up to 30 minutes, rated for 1000 watts / l hp motor. 2.4 CONVENIENCE OUTLETS A. General Requirements: Duplex receptacles shall be 15 amp or 20 amp, 125 volt, 3 -wire, grounding type, quickwire push -in and side or back and side wired. Install 20 amp rated duplex receptacles in all common areas. All receptacles shall be installed with the ground slot down. Provide GFI receptacles where shown or required by the National Electrical Code (NEC) and install with ground slot down. B. Receptacles shall be the following: 1. 15 amp, 125 volt Leviton #BR15 -X 2. 15 amp, 125 volt, GFI Leviton #7599 -X 3. 20 amp, 125 volt Leviton #BR20 -X 4. 20 amp, 125 volt, GFI Leviton #7899 -X C. Special receptacles shall be the following: • 1. 20 amp, 250 volt Leviton #5821 -X 2. 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 -pole, 4 -wire, grounding Leviton #278 3. 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 -pole, 4 -wire, grounding Leviton #279 D. Exterior receptacles shall be low profile, recessed, weatherproof (WP) with cord openings and solid cover. Arlington IN BOX. 2.5 DIMMERS A. General Requirements: Provide all dimmers as shown on the Drawings. B. Dimmers shall be as follows: 1. 600 watt, 120 volt, incandescent Lutron #NT -600 2. 1000 watt, 120 volt, incandescent Lutron #NT -1000 3. 1,500 watt, 120 volt, incandescent Lutron #NT -1500 4. 16 or 8 amp, 120/277 volt, fluorescent Lutron #NTF Series 2.6 DEVICE PLATES A. General Requirements: Device plates shall be provided for all devices shown on the Drawings or called for in the specifications. Device plates in finished and unfmished areas shall be plastic, unless noted otherwise. Multiple device plates shall be constructed of a single plate. No sectional plates will be accepted. B. Special Screws: Where so indicated, device plates shall be complete with special tamperproof spanner oval head screw. Furnish Owner with three special screw drivers for the spanner head screws. C. Engraved Plates: Engraved plates shall have letters as required, 1/8 -inch minimum letter height and black filling. Printed tape or glued on plates are not acceptable. The following plates shall be engraved: 1. Wall plates so indicated on Drawings. 2. Switch wall plates controlling any lights which are out of sight of switches. 3. Switch wall plates controlling motors. D. Commercial Kitchen Device Coverplates: Provide 302 stainless steel plates for all devices indicated. 022813 SNA201301 CD 26 27 23 - 2 04/18/13 Part 3. — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DEVICES A. General Requirements: Device height shall be as follows, except where noted otherwise on the Drawings: 1. Switches, receptacles and outlets shall be mounted at the following heights, measured from device center to floor, unless noted otherwise. a. Receptacle 18" b. Telephone outlet 18" c. Telephone outlet, wall 46" d. TV outlet 18" e. Switch 46" top of device f. Devices above counter without backsplash 8" above counter g. Devices above counter with backsplash 4" above backsplash B. The Contractor shall coordinate the mounting height of all special receptacles with the Architect, Owner, Mechanical Contractor and equipment suppliers. C. Where locations shown or mounting heights specified for devices conflict with other trades or building finishers, the Contractor shall coordinate exact requirements prior to installation and install only after the approval of all involved. D. Provide spacers as required between outlet boxes and devices so that each device is flush with the fmished wall. Plate screws shall not be used to stabilize device. E. Location: 1. Receptacles along side of switches in janitor closets, storage rooms and mechanical spaces shall be in 2 -gang boxes, with switch in first gang and receptacle in second gang. 2. Switches near doors shall be located on side opposite the hinges (verify door swings with Architectural Drawings before installation) and close to door trim. Edge of switch plate shall be within four inches of door frame. 3. Devices located at counters shall be mounted eight inches from device center to top of counter, unless noted otherwise. 4. Switches controlling range hood fan and lights, garbage disposals, undercabinet lighting, etc., in handicapped units shall be installed m the cabinet front. Coordinate the exact available location with the Architect. F. Provide dedicated neutral and ground wire to each dimmer or timer switch. 3.2 MOVING DEVICES A. The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, reserves the right to move any device a distance of ten feet in any direction from the location shown on the Drawings without an increase in Contract amount. This requirement shall only apply to devices before installation. B. In the event that an outlet shown on the Drawings will not be able to serve the specified piece of equipment, the outlet shall be relocated as required, with no increase in contract amount. END OF SECTION 022813 SNA201301 CD 26 27 23 - 3 04/18/13 SECTION 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide safety switches wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. 1. Every effort has been expended to provide an accurate list of equipment, however, the Contractor shall verify motor nameplate on site before installing switches or selecting fuses. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 26 00 10. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All safety switches shall be of one manufacturer as follows. 1. Cutler- Hammer 2. General Electric 3. I.T.E. (Siemens) 4. Square D 2.2 MATERIALS A. Type: 1. Safety switches shall be fused. Non - fusible switches may be used in lieu of fusible where allowed by the National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Safety switches shall be NEMA HD (heavy duty) type, horsepower rated, and of ampere sizes shown on Drawings or as required by the NEC. Safety switches shall have NEMA 1 enclosures, except in wet locations or where indicated as weatherproof, in which case a NEMA 3R enclosure shall be used. Locations on roof or outside shall be considered wet locations. 3. Fusible safety switches shall contain Class R fuse provisions to reject fuses, except Class R type. 4. Safety switches shall contain padlocking provisions and defeater screw mechanisms. Provide interlock contacts where so specified. 5. Safety switches shall be rated 240 volts where used on 120/208 volt or 120/240 volt systems. 6. Safety switches shall be rated 600 volts where used on 277/480 volt systems. 7. Switches rated 30 amperes through 100 amperes shall have lugs listed for 60 C or 75 C conductors. Switches rated over 100 amperes shall have lugs listed for 75 C. 2.3 ARC FLASH WARNING LABEL A. Provide arc flash warning label per Code. B. Label shall include calculated arc fault current. C. Labeling and calculated values shall be included with shop drawing submittals. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 SUMMARY 010913 SNA201301 CD 26 28 16- 1 04/18/13 A. This contractor shall review all Mechanical Equipment Schedule and plans and provide disconnects and fuses as required by Code. END OF SECTION • • 010913 SNA201301 CD 26 28 16- 2 04/18/13 SECTION 26 51 00 LIGHTING Part 1. - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide fixtures shown on Drawings complete with lamps as indicated in Light Fixture Schedule. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 16010. Shop Drawings submitted for approval shall contain the following minimum information: 1. Manufacturer and type of ballast for fluorescent and HID fixtures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): Devices shall be in accordance with Section 16010. 1. Exterior fixtures shall bear the UL label for wet or damp locations as required for the use intended. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. General Requirements: Metal parts shall be steel, with end plates connected to body with fasteners or by welding, with all essential components required for a complete installation. 2.2 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent, Electronic: Wherever noted in the Light Fixture Schedule, fluorescent ballasts shall be as follows: 1. High frequency, premium grade, class "P" rated, instant start. Provide program start when controlled by occupancy sensors. 2. 60 Hz rated for the voltage noted. 3. Voltage regulation and light regulation of +/- 10 %. 4. 90 percent or higher ballast - factor for two -lamp and three -lamp ballasts, greater than 85% for four - lamp ballasts. . 5. "A" or better sound rating. 6. Meet FCC rules for EMI and RFI interference. • 7. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less. 8. Lamp Crest Factor of less than 1.7. 9. Interior mounted fixture ballasts shall have a 50° F minimum starting temperature and exterior mounted fixture ballasts shall have a -20° F minimum starting temperature. 10. Each ballast to have 3 -year warranty with a minimum $10.00 labor reimbursement. 11. Power factor of 90% minimum. 12. Acceptable manufacturers: All electronic fluorescent ballasts shall be as follows: a. Magnetek b. Motorola c. Osram/Sylvania B. Compact Lamp: All compact lamp ballasts shall be as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. 120612 SNA201301 CD 26 51 00 -1 04/18/13 1. Compact fluorescent ballasts shall contain an end -of -life shut off circuit. C. High Intensity Discharge (HID): All high intensity discharge lamp ballasts shall be as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. 2.3 EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT A. General Requirements: Wherever noted in the Light Fixture Schedule or Drawings emergency lighting units shall be as follows: 1. A self - contained storage battery used as a second source of power. 2. Shall supply and maintain the total output for a period of 11/2 hours minimum, without the voltage applied to the load failing below 87%% of normal light output. 2.4 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES A. General Requirements: Lamps shall be 130 volt unless noted otherwise. 2.5 LENSES A. General Requirements: Provide pure virgin acrylic 0.125 plastic lenses unless noted otherwise. 2.6 RECESSED FIXTURES A. General Requirements: 1. Provide recessed fixtures with frames appropriate for the type of ceiling mounting. 2. Provide suitable plaster frames where installed in plaster ceilings. 3. Provide fixtures that have wiring, ballasts and relamping access from below the ceiling unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide UL listed and labeled enclosure for all fixtures that penetrate rated fire assemblies or that penetrate into unheated areas, such as soffits and attics. Install enclosure, seal all openings with caulking and duct tape and provide plastic cover over enclosure (also caulked and taped) to restrict air infiltration prior to installation of insulation. UL listed enclosure shall be E.Z. Barrier (612 - 436 - 0606). If enclosure will not maintain proper clearances around fixture per manufacturer's recommendations, provide sheetrock boxout. 5. Incandescent and HID fixtures shall be UL listed and labeled for thermal protection. 2.7 FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. General Requirements: 1. Manufacturer's catalog number indicates type, quality and style, but may not cover ballast, lamp or special details required. Contractor shall provide the lighting fixtures with special features noted. 2. Provide fixtures complete with lamps. 3. Coordinate light fixtures with latest Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans prior to release of fixture order. 4. Adjust mounting to match ceiling type at no additional cost to Owner. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: All incandescent fluorescent, LED and HID lamps shall be: 1. General Electric 2. Osram/Sylvania 3. Phillips Part 3. - EXECUTION 120612 SNA201301 CD 26 51 00 -2 04/18/13 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: 1. Remove manufacturer's labels from exterior of fixtures. 2. Install fixtures when the work of other trades in the area is substantially complete, to avoid damage or defacement after installation. Fixtures shall not be installed on ceilings until ceiling finishes are complete, except fixtures may be installed on exposed T -bar ceilings after T -bars are installed and before tile installation. 3. Coordinate fixture locations with the ceiling installation and install fixtures in a uniform pattem to tiles or exposed grids. Fixtures shall be symmetrically spaced with rows in alignment and parallel with the building features. Measurements shall be taken from the Architectural Drawings. 4. Install 2x2 fixtures and compact fluorescent downlights with lamps perpendicular to corridor. 5. Where floodlighting has been indicated, provide for adjusting during evening hours to Engineer's satisfaction. 6. Directional fixtures shall be properly aimed and aligned as directed by the Owner's representative. 7. Provide concrete bases for all exterior pole mounted fixtures. Refer to the Drawings for base detail. 3.2 FIXTURE MOUNTING A. General Requirements: 1. Surface fixtures, other than fluorescent type, shall be securely fastened to outlet box. 2. Recessed fixtures, except those installed within an exposed grid type ceiling, shall be supported from building structural members or from concealed steel framing channels 1 -1/2 inches or larger. No recessed fixtures shall be supported from ceiling tiles. 3. Individually mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be supported within 12 inches of each end of fixture. 4. Continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall be supported within 12 inches of end of each row and at intervals not to exceed 48 inches along entire row. 5. Chain hung fixtures shall be permitted only where specifically noted. Chains shall be spaced the same as supports described under this Section. Chains shall be heavy duty, nickel or cadmium plated, suitable for weight of specific fixture. Jack chain shall not be used. Unless otherwise indicated, chain hung fixtures shall be provided with a grounded receptacle and grounded portable cords and plugs to feed individual units or continuous rows as required. Chain hung fixtures shall be located on site to clear mechanical ducts and equipment. 3.3 SUPPORTS AND FASTENING A. For Fixtures Not In Exposed T -Bar Grid Ceilings: Fixture supports, or outlet boxes used to support fixtures, shall be securely fastened to building structural members or to concealed steel ceiling framing channels 1- 1/2 inches or larger. Fixture hanging rods shall be of adequate dimensions to support fixture and shall be not less than 3/8 inch diameter. Fixture supports shall be fastened to structure as follows: 1. To concrete with steel or lead expandable concrete anchors set into a minimum of 1 -1/2 inches of concrete or with 3/8 inch minimum diameter toggle bolts through concrete. 2. To wood with lag screws a minimum 1/4 inch diameter entering wood structural members a minimum of 2 inches. 3. To 16 gauge steel channels where used to span building bar joists, structural members or ceiling 1 -1/2 inch minimum framing channels. Provide Steel City, No. 6029 steel channels or Thomas & Betts. B. For Fixtures in Exposed T -Bar Grid Ceilings: Fixtures shall be supported as follows: 1. Recessed fixtures designed expressly for lay -in mounting and under 50 lbs. shall be installed in that manner. Grid system shall be supported from structure as required by ceiling system installer. 2. Recessed fixtures not designed for lay -in mounting or over 50 lbs. shall be installed per the manufacturer's requirements. Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware required. Contractor shall also coordinate with the ceiling system installer and the Architect. 120612 SNA201301 CD 26 51 00 -3 04/18/13 3. Provide flexible metal conduit connections for all recessed type fixtures in lay -in ceilings permitting fixture to be lifted out. Maximum flexible conduit shall not exceed six feet. One to four fixtures may be served by a single common outlet box, securely fastened to structure or ceiling support members and within 30 inches of ceiling tile. 4. Provide fixture retainers or clips for each fixture installed in exposed grid suspended ceilings in accordance with UBC and state building codes. 5. Recessed fixtures, not designed to lay -in directly on grids, shall be centered on ceiling tiles and shall be supported with 16 gauge steel channels used to span over T -bar grids. No fixture shall be supported by ceiling tiles. 6. Surface mounted fixtures to be centered directly on a T -bar grid shall be secured to that grid with hanger clamps, clips or other approved fasteners designed for the purpose. Unless otherwise noted, ceiling T -bar grid system shall be supported from structure by ceiling system installer. 7. Surface mounted fixtures to be centered between T -bar grids shall be secured to a 16 gauge steel channel installed by this Contractor to span over top of main T -bar grids. Steel channels shall be Steel City, No. 6029 or Thomas & Betts. Non -main T -bar grids shall not be used to support steel channels. Unless otherwise noted, ceiling T -bar grid system shall be supported from structure by ceiling system installer. 3.4 SPECIAL FIXTURE COORDINATION A. Storage and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms: Contractor shall verify actual fixture locations with Architect. Fixture locations shall be revised as required to clear all equipment, ducts, and piping. END OF SECTION 120612 SNA201301 CD 26 51 00 -4 04/18/13 SECTION 26 51 10 LIGHTING REBATES Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide one copy of quantity invoices required by the local power company to allow Owner to receive Energy Rebates for the use of energy saving ballasts and/or energy saving lamps. Part 2. — PRODUCTS N/A Part 3. — EXECUTION 3J. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall coordinate with the local power company and the Owner as required to obtain all applicable lamp and/or ballast rebates. B. All rebates shall be made directly to Owner. • C. Retain samples of existing lamps and/or ballasts for proof of energy savings when required by the local power company. • END OF SECTION 100405 SNA201301 CD 26 51 10 - 1 04/18/13 S EEN ENGINEERING, INC. 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, MN 55429 763-585-6742 main 763.585.6757 fax Email: steen @steenen&com May 22, 2013 ADDENDUM (ADDN) NO. 1 TO PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR: FRIENDSHIP CHURCH PRIOR LAKE, MN STEEN #SNA201301 The following additions, deletions, corrections or clarifications are hereby made to the original plans and specifications, issued April 18, 2013 and become part of these Construction Documents. Items herein take precedence over items in the plans and specifications, which they modify or supplement. The main trade concerned with each Addenda item is primarily responsible, but certain attendant work of other trades may also be affected. This Contractor is cautioned that while the items specified below are general, it is assumed that all work required to implement each Addenda item is included. SPECIFICATIONS 1. Section 23 09 00; Automatic Temperature Control: Revised and resubmitted (attached) DRAWINGS M5 — Issued (attached). 1. Revised as shown on M5 (attached). M6 1. Revise Mechanical Alternate Note A to read: "MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE PRICING AS AN ALTERNATE TO PROVIDE 2 FURNACES WITH MODULATING GAS HEATING AND DX COOLING. THIS WILL BE IN LIEU OF FAN COIL UNITS FC -4 AND FC -5. ALTERNATE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE A 5 TON CONDENSING UNIT AND A 3 TON CONDENSING UNIT INCLUDING INSTALLATION AND INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT AND LIQUID. SUCTION LINES. FURNACES SHALL BE SIMILAR TO CARRIER MODELS 59MN7A04512 AND 59MN7A09020." 2. Add Mechanical Alternate Note B: "MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE PRICING AS AN ALTERNATE TO PROVIDE A DUCT HOT WATER HEATING COIL FOR THE OUTSIDE AIR DUCT SERVING THE 5 TON FURNACE. PRICING SHALL INCLUDE ALL PIPING, PITTINGS, VALVES, DUCTWORK AND DesignirngSensible Cost.Riective Solutions Page 2 ADDN# 1 May 22, 2013 Friendship Church STEEN# SNA201301 DUCTWORK FITTINGS REQUIRED. HEATING COIL SIZE SHALL BE BASED ON 600 CFM WITH FACE VELOCITY OF 600 FPM OR LESS AND PRODUCING A MINIMUM OF 46,000 BTUH OF HEAT. OUTSIDE AIR LOUVERS SERVING BOTH FURNACES SHALL ALSO BE PART OF ALTERNATE BID." 3. Add Specific Mechanical Note 13 to read: `EXISTING RELOCATED TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONTROLLING EXISTING FINNED TUBE RADIATION." M9 — Issued (attached). 1. Revised Fan Coil Unit detail as shown on M9 (attached). END OF ADDN NO. 1 / SECTION 23 09 00 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL Part 1. — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Manufacturer shall have in town local representation and service of the equipment provided. B. Contractor shall tie into the existing building automatic temperature control system as for control of Fan Coil Units FC-4 & FC -5. 1.2 WARRANTY A. Temperature Control: Contractor shall be responsible for defects which develop in any part of the system caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment and shall replace any such faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of 1 year from date of substantial completion. Instruments shall be calibrated to sense, activate and display information specified. Part 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Contractor shall provide all 120/240 volt circuits as required to power all low voltage control devices or line voltage devices such as 120 volt damper motor etc.. All wiring shall be provided by this contractor. Electrical Division shall provide all 120/240, 1 phase, line voltage, direct control devices and wiring such as line voltage thermostats, time clocks and switches unless specifically noted to be supplied by this contractor and installed by the Electrical Division or remotely controlled and monitored by a Building Automation system. Coordinate with owner to verify if there are any existing control point connections available to tie into. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Uhl Company. Part 3. - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate exact location of control power transformers and control panels with the Architect/Engineer. B. DELETED. C. DELETED. D. Coordinate required mounting height of sensors with Architect: E. Provide sensors and support brackets constructed of stainless steel, copper, brass, cast zinc or glass. Covers shall be galvanized steel painted with manufacturer's standard paint and color. 3.2 CONTROL SEQUENCES A. Existing Fintube Radiation: 1. Existing sensors that control the existing fmtube radiation zone valves will remain as is. B. Fan Coil Units FC-4 & FC -5: Provide a space sensor to control 3 -way modulating valve to provide heating and cooling. The fan shall run continuously during occupied periods. During unoccupied periods, fan shall run / cycle as required only when there is a call for heating or cooling to satisfy space sensor. 010813 SNA201301 ADDN#1 23 09 00 - 1 05/22/13 1. Provide sensor in discharge duct with override to control modulating 3 -way valve to keep discharge air temperature from exceeding 105 degrees F. 2. FC -5 Only: Provide motorized damper on outside air intake duct to modulate outside air percentage based on outdoor air temperature. Minimum damper position to be set at 600 CFM when occupied. When unoccupied, damper shall be closed. Maximum damper position to be full economizer at 1880 CFM. Return air motorized damper shall be controlled with outside air damper such that when outside air damper opens, return air damper closes and vise versa. END OF SECTION 010813 SNA201301 ADDN #1 23 09 00 - 2 05/22/13 STATION NINETEEN ARCHITECTS, INC. 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE S.E. SUITE 100 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55414 612.623.1800 FAX 612.623.0012 REQUEST # 2 - One Hour Protection Notes DATE: AUGUST 13, 2013 PROJECT: FRIENDSHIP CHURCH FROM: STATION 19 ARCHITECTS, INC. PROJ. #: 4428 SEND TO: VIA: CITY 1. CITY OF PRIOR LAKE X EMAIL 4646 DAKOTA STREET SE PRIOR LAKE, MN 55372 Contact: Robert Hutchins MAIL GENERAL 2. CLA CONSTRUCTION X EMAIL CONTRACTOR 6451 E 190 ST PRIOR LAKE, MN 55372 Contact: Conrad Anderson MAIL X ASI The work shall be carried out in accordance with the following Supplemental Instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgement that there will be no change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. PR Please submit an itemized Proposal for Changes in the Contract Sum and Contract Time for the proposed modifications to the Contract Documents described herein. This is not a Change Order, Change Directive, or a Direction to Proceed with the work described in the proposed modification. CCD You are hereby directed to make the following change(s) in this Contract. Signature by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement with the proposed adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time set forth in this Construction Change Directive. When signed by the Owner and Architect and received by the Contractor, this document becomes effective IMMEDIATELY as a Construction Change Directive (CCD), and the Contractor shall proceed with the change(s) described below. DESCRIPTION: Clarification of One Hour Protection of Existing Steel Beams and Columns at Lower Level Work Area as noted on attached 1 /R2. ATTACHED: 1/R2: Annotated Partial Lower Level Reflected Ceiling Plan Sheet A5 - END REQUEST — The following is based on information provided by the Contractor. CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM OF: CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME OF: To expedite work, you may sign and date this document below. By signing, you are agreeing to the pricing and other terms as described in this document. This document will serve as a written change ISSUED BY: STATION 19 ARCHITECTS, INC. ACCEPTED BY: CLA CONSTRUCTION ARCHITECT'S REPRESENTATIVE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE DATE AUTHORIZED BY: FRIENDSHIP CHURCH OWNER'S DATE REPRESENTATIVE 111 logical SPEEDHIDE® 42 -7 Solutions from PPG' Arcnitectural t oatings SF'ttUIIIUt Interior i-1re Ketardant Hat Latex GENERAL DESCRIPTION TINTING AND BASE INFORMATION SPEEDHIDE Interior Fire Retardant latex is formulated to meet Refer to the appropriate color formula book, automatic tinting the performance requirements of professional application. The equipment, and or computer color matching system for color paint film intumesces when exposed to flame or high tempera- formulas and tinting instructions. tures. t,oanng expanas ana rorms a micK cnar oianKet tintumes- cence) which retards flame spread and minimizes smoke 42 -7 White development. Some colors, drastic color changes, or porous substrates may require more than one coat to achieve a uniform finish. 0 VOC compliant in all regulated areas Meets MPI® category #64, Interior Latex Fire Retardant Flat VN UUUI: I U/A 1 H 6: Meets Green Performance Standards (GPS -1 & GPS -2) PRODUCT TYPE: Modified Polyvinyl Acetate Latex Can help earn LEED® 2009 credits SHEEN: Flat: 0 to 5 (60° and 85° Gloss Meter) Fulfills Class A rating established by the National Fire VOLUME SOLIDS: 50% +/- 2% Protection Association WEIGHT SOLIDS: 62% +I- 2% Meets most local and state fire laws VOC: 33 gIL (0.3 lbs. /gal.) Passed ASTM E -84, NFPA 255, UL 723 WEIGHT /GALLON: 11.7 lbs. (5.3 kg) +/- 0.2 lbs. (91 g) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATES Cement Board COVERAGE: 150 to 335 sq. ft. /gal. (13 to 31 sq. m /3.78L) Gypsum Wallboard- Drywall Wet Film Thickness: 4.8 to 10.8 mils Wood Wet Microns: 122 to 274.3 APPLICATION INFORMATION Dry Film Thickness: 2.4 to 5.4 mils Dry Microns: 61 to 137.2 Stir thoroughly before and occasionally during use. When using more than one can of the same color, intermix to ensure color Coverage figures do not include loss due to surface irregularities and uniformity. USE WITH ADEQUATE VENTILATION. KEEP OUT porosity or material loss due to application method or mixing. OF REACH OF CHILDREN. Read all label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) information prior to use. MSDS are available DRYING TIME: Dry time @ 77 °F (25 °C); 50% relative humidity. through our website or by calling 1- 800 -441 -9695. To Touch: 30 minutes Application Equipment: Apply with a high quality brush, roller, To Handle: 4 hours paint pad, or by spray equipment. Where necessary, apply a To Recoat: 4 hours second coat. ,o run t. ure: au clays Airless Spray: Pressure 2400 psi, 60 mesh filter. Drying times listed may vary depending on temperature, humidity, film Spray equipment must be handled with due care and in build, color, and air movement. accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. High - pressure injection of coatings into the skin by airless equipment may cause WASHING INSTRUCTIONS: Wait at least 14 days after painting serious injury. before cleaning the surface with a non - abrasive mild cleaner. Brush: Polyester /Nylon Brush Roller: 3/8" • 3/4" nap roller cover. CLEANUP: Soap and water Thinning: No thinning is recommended. Up to 1/2 pint of water (237 mL) per U.S. gallon (3.78 L) may be added for brush /roller DISPOSAL: Contact your focal environmental regulatory agency for applications. For conventional spray, up to one pint (473 mL) of guidance on disposal of unused product. Do not pour down a drain or water per U.S. gallon (3.78 L) may be added. storm sewer. rermtssioie temperatures auring application: Material: 50 to 90 ° F 10 to 32 °C FLASH POINT: Over 200 °F (93 °C) Ambient: 50 to 90 ° F 10 to 32 °C Substrate: 50 to 90 °F 10 to 32 °C FEATURES / BENEFITS Features Benefits Intumescence Retards flame spread and minimizes smoke development Great hide and coverage Hides surface imperfection Applies like a conventional latex flat paint May be applied by brush, roller or spray Good scrubbability Withstands repeated cleaning without loss of intumescence Excellent adhesion and durability Looks like new longer x:50 g/L VOC Meets the most stringent environmental regulations nationwide Can help earn LEED 2009 credits Contributes to sustainable design MP/ approval in category #64, Interior Latex Fire Retardant Flat Meets strict performance and aesthetic requirements SPEEDHIDE® 42 -7 Architectural Coatings SPEEDHIDE Interior Fire Retardant Flat Latex GENERAL SURFACE PREPARATION • Surface muss be free of grease, dirt, rust, and loose or powdery paint. Water sensitive coatings including calcimine must be completely removed. Repair cracks and gouges with patching compound. Sand these smooth and remove all dust. Previously painted glossy or slick surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned with strong detergents to remove surface soils and contaminates. To promote adhesion, surface sheen should be removed or reduced by rubbing with sandpaper. To meet UL rating, SPEEDH(DE Interior Fire Retardant Flat Latex is self- priming on bare wood and cement board. WARNING! If you scrape, sand, or remove old paint, you may release lead dust or fumes. LEAD IS TOXIC. EXPOSURE TO LEAD DUST OR FUMES CAN CAUSE SERIOUS ILLNESS, SUCH AS BRAIN DAMAGE, ESPECIALLY IN CHILDREN. PREGNANT WOMEN SHOULD ALSO AVOID EXPOSURE. Wear a properly fitted NIOSH- approved respirator and prevent skin contact to control lead exposure. Clean up carefully with a HEPA vacuum and a wet mop. Before you start, find out how to protect yourself and your family by contacting the USEPA National Lea Information Hotline at 1- 800 -424 -LEAD or log on to www.epa.govllead. In Canada contact a regional Health Canada office. Follow these instructions to control exposure to other hazardous substances that may be released during surface preparation. RECOMMENDED PRIMERS LIMITATIONS OF USE ,,C DOc„u Feu- pninuUy runt IN I LRIUK Ut ONLY. Apply when air, surface ana proauct Gypsum Wallboard - Drywall Self- priming temperatures are above 50 °F (10 °C). Not recommended for Wood Self- priming application over "foam" type insulations. Not recommended for use on floors. Do not use where continuous dampness exists. PROTECT FROM FREEZING. PACKAGING 1- Gallon (3.78 L) 5- Gallon (18.9 L) The PPG logo is a registered trademark of PPG Industries Ohio, Inc. SPEEDHIDE is a registered trademark of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. LEED is a registered trademark of the US Green Building Council. The Master Painters Institute and MPI are registered trademarks of Master Painters Institute, Inc. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. believes the technical data presented is currently accurate: however, no guarantee of accuracy, comprehensiveness, or performance is given or implied. Improvements in coatings technology may cause future technical data to vary from what is in this bulletin. For complete, up -to -date technical information, visit our web site or call 1- 800 -441 -9695. PPG Industries, Inc. Technical Services Architect/Specifier Canada, Inc. A2.7 2/2013 r Architectural Coatings 800 441 -9695 888-PPG-IDEA Architectural Coatings Supersedes (12/2012) One PPG Place 1- 888 - 807 -5123 fax 4 Kenview Blvd Pittsburgh, PA 15272 Brampton, ON L6T 5E4 www.ppgpittsburghpaints.com www.ppgporterpaints.com III, = ry ' e;. � � R 'r ��ii .�.}+.lw. � _ .�,,:a., <„ � �>1i�!>iw;.i. �>r r —�4� �Ju a� t *` .I 4 ... ...,. — — m ... rn o „:, „,u, . .. . . . - g ' ILP CD NM ME 0 ° _ ■■ ® CO = „," .. : - z N & (D =W m •i ]i 1.1 1111 _ 1 z__ • ■O,' ▪ r m A& n . : E$ 'A a .51�■��M� z' — 0 2 rTi •_•�! � MP �, MERMEN � 1011�_M� „ rn Z > 0 `th' 2 1,,, HirmailinupP O r i 1 - - > m < w \-- �. ,--�„��,.. . r = � , HwK- 2—comz X - „gym _iX zaoO -nODO� M m C } 0-o>i -<xm;to u m� � � r �,�r � 1 z pcp i z m C O z � h � -0m Om o z z c0 z _0 O CO m n r - D7 ocnimao OrmO —imO I -° W r k r \ -> i °C5 c 9 p -..� mo col . c. C- �Cmm >Om �mW -`Z� =�,33 C� O�T' + � O�n�_00 S C�<zmWm � � , 0 5 �mrn0 ZZ0o0�Ocp• t ox z_o O hc > 0 > � m i — ZOm a i la , c H J(nZ ZOz Z t ��� CO Z�1 <X o m O m�m�0 c2-22 =C�m w o — i IT w 0 a p i W x J3 �C1 —o �m Z H �z - „ Z y O 001 Onmc� E m w - o r DJ F < co Zz W( mm =� � 13 :: O -I I 0 z � m�Zmz c T. m �� Z < � ii ( Z u TI r” Z m I) n 0 h � 0 f 7� O O 1 C Z 'u ma. 1 r — I. J1— le Imp =man=CIiimmitiM i - 1 H w cn • IT ;� fA ; _. _ • 1— , , , • �e , M. -< o y 0 i ii CD I A lin ri I I a 3 IIIIMel MO] IMO] '< M1001111111 , NM 4 _ci W/, Fa H . , .___N, ______________. .w_.______________ ,. - 1 1 I 3 , ; .., 6 / / 0 2 ' Protect FIRETEX FX5120 ` "`R & WATERBASED INTUMESCENT EARFN Marine FIREPROOFING SHERWIN C oa ti ngs --f:5,...iriic. WILLIAMS. B59W5120 WHITE Revised: February 25, 2013 PRODUCT INFORMATION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED USES FIRETEX FX5120 is a waterbased thin -film intumescent fire protec- • For use on exposed structural steel that requires an aesthetic tion coating for use on interior exposed structural steel substrates. finish Its smooth paint -like finish allows architects to design using exposed • Commercial buildings steel for a decorative and aesthetic final appearance. • Healthcare / Hospitals • Hotels • Provides up to 2 hours fire protection in accordance with UL • Educational buildings 263 (ASTM E -119) and CAN /ULC -S101 • Stadiums • Single component • Iconic structures • Aesthetic finish • Public buildings • Impact resistant • Airports • l..ow odor, low VOC • Atriums • Outstanding application characteristics • Warehouses • School gymnasiums • Convention centers PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS ..aillMar...... APPROVALS Finish: Flat 1 r•vides U. To 2 H• urs Fire Protection in Accordance With UL 263 AST - 9) and CAN /ULC -S101 Color: White • U 1981 Beam Design •_UL Beam Desi• • Volume Solids: 69% !(' • L Y623 Columrj e - • UL • - use olumn Desig tea- -- Weight Solids: 71 % PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS VOC: <4 g/L ; 0.03 lb/gal Test Name Test Method Results Abrasion Resistance ASTM D4060 290 mg loss Note: Product is designed for spray and brush application Adhesion ASTM D4541 391 psi Recommended Spreading Rate pe coat: Durometer Hardness ASTM D2240 Shore D - 53 Airless Spray Brush Impact Resistance ASTM D2794 Direct: 16 in. lbs. Wet mils (microns) 56.0 (1400) 18.0 (441) Reverse: 20 in. lbs. Dry mils (microns) 40.0 (1000) 12.0 (300) Class Surface Burning ASTM E84 Flame Spread - 0 — Coverage sq ft/gal (m /L) 28 (0.7) 92 (2.3) Smoke Developed - 5 l heoretical coverage sq ft/gal (1 1104 27 2 /L) @ 1 mil / 25 microns dft (27.1) APPLICATION EQUIPMENT airless Maximum .raag tolerance typically 72.0 mils (1800 microns) wet by The following is a guide. Changes in pressures and tip sizes may be needed for proper spray characteristics. Always purge spray Prying Schedule: I equipment before use with listed reducer. Any reduction must be @ 60FI15°C @ 73 °F /23 °C compliant with existing VOC regulations and compatible with the To touch: 5 hours 3 hours existing environmental and application conditions. To handle *: To recoat: 24 hours 6 hours Airless Spray *This will depend on the total thickness of FIRETEX FX5120 to be Nozzle Size: 17 -23 (depending on application applied. No more than 2 coats by airless spray should be applied requirements) within any 24 hour period. Operating Pressure: 2500 psi (175 kg /cm Drying time is temperature, humidity, and film thickness dependent. Use 3/8" ID fluid line where lengths in excess of 10 feet are Shelf Life: 10 months, unopened required. In -line gun or pump filters should not normally be used. Store indoors at 40 °F (4.5 °C) to 100 °F (38 °C). Brush Reducer /Clean Up: Water The material is suitable for brush application but due to the nature of the material a ribbed appearance will result. Application of more than one coat may be necessary to give equivalent dry film thickness to a single spray applied coat. www.sherwin - williams.com /protective continued on back an!0a }oJd /w o( s w e! I I!M -U!MJ ay s'MMM •3SOdInd aVllOW:PM VJOd SS3N11d ONVA111I8V ±NYHO •suo!yonJysu! - J3IN ONIOf11ONI '3SIMH3H1O HO MY1 dO NOI1VI3d0 A8 XaOln1V1S pue elep Ieo!ugoal leuo!l!ppe Jo; angeluesGJdei swe!IINM-u!MJags inoA loeluo0 'O311d1N1 a0 03SS3adX3 'SINVI111M-NIMa3HS A9 30VIN SI ONI)I ANY dO •ao!0u;nogl!M a6ueyo of loafgns aae suo!lOnJlsu! pue eyep Ieo!ugoal pags!Ignd 331NVaVfl NO AINVHUVM a3H10 ON 'swe!II!M- u!MJaLiS Act pau!waalap se lonpad en!pelep eql Jo; p!ed eoud eseg3Jnd Guy ;o pun ;ai gig Jo lonpoad an!; 'asn aiowq wegs SOSW au; of Jabaa o a ;apay;;olueweoeldaaofpal!w!Is!' Rue;!' en !loelepuenwdslonpoadJo ;A!I!ge!1 S NOIl�Ib '0321 h13db' •sGJnpeooad Ioi;uoo Jfl!lenb swe!pM- u!rvuegs a!geo!Idde yy!M pJOOOe u! syoa ;ap 6u! d S - Jnloe ;o ae4 eq of spnpoid Jno slues eM i(uedwo0 swe!IIM-u!MJaus Gill }UanIOS AUe 6UISn UaLiM SU01 }epUawwOOaJ AINVddVM )(Tales s,aajn }oe;nuew Molloy . Ja}e/ y }!M asn Jeje Alele!paww! ugapn8 uo!yeo!lddy pue uo!lewao ;ul S100} uea10 . JeleM !am Alele!peww! sJefeds pue sp!ds ueal0 ew a lonpoJd lueoel wow eql u!elgo of Gn!le ;uasaJdGJ swepl!M -u!MJ qS Jno/ 8nsuo0 •uo!leo!Ignd ;o ew!l Gip peia;;o lonpoad agl of u!eued pue a6ueyo of SNOIlO/1H1SNI do NV373 loafgis aJe u!aJaq quo; les suO!lepuawwooaa pue uo!leWJO ;u! Lions •/uedwo0 swe!IIM- u!MJGgs Gill Jo;legeq uo Jo Aq palonpuoo slse; uodn peseq ern aaLiS elea PnpOJd s!yl u! gjJO; ;as suO!lepuewwooei pue uo!lewJO ;u! aLil • pepuewwooaJ SI d3WIv-1:S/Q puooas Jed pa; g ;o pads i!e palelguany'6u!Aip ay} do !Deeds o} JapJO U! aoepns paleoo ay} JOAO J!e 6u!}eln3J!O ;o poglaw 1 / 6E' 4 ' le /q1 9' 4 4 416!9M awns aonpoJ }u! o} alges!npe s! }! suo!}!puoo Lions Japun pue 'ssaooJd 6uiAip aLi} UMOO SMOIS OS B }Uawanow 11e 40 sloe •suog sJeu!e }uoo (10Z) uolle6 g :6u!6e)loed -!puoo A}!p!wny y6!y Aq papae }ai s! leuelew s!y } ;o aw!; /up au NOI1VINdOdNN 9N1213021Q S31ON 7VNOIlIOOd •seaae (go') aoedg pauo!}!puo0 JoualUl Jo; paJmbaa oinnn }oU s! }eoodo }y •}onpojd ay } ;o saipadoJd eouewJO}Iad Gag ay} page Allepiew!}ap lou saop S!4l •suog!pUOO }ua!gwe pue uo!}eo!ldde •s }onpoad -Jan( `AJlawoe6 uo 6u!puadap'pals IeanpnJ }s ;o sal6ue IeuJa }u! Jo 0!}!0ads Jo; an! }e}Uasaade2{ swe!II!M- U!MJagg JnoA }oe }UO0 lewelxa pue sa6uel; ;o se6pe uo Jn000 Aew 6umpeJO Alleuo!seoo0 Axod3 pazAle }e0 pasegaa ;eM 001, uoloJOy pesegJele/ •sassaumo!y; win y6!y Jo /pue sawn; JOUa }u!edJadng - eaadwa; Mol ;e pagnbaa eq Aew saw!; bu!;eoaaano papua ;x3 o!os Axod3 9M 9H IeU}snpuloJd •uo!;ewJO; win 00A cueZ OOP Jen aid Jadwd aansua o; %9 paa3Xa ;ou pinoys A;!p!wny angelab 00A OJBZ OOZ JeW cud opAJOV 00A OJaZ Ieu;snpul aid •uo! ;ewao; WI!; Jedwd aansue o; pannbaJ Axod3 pazAleleoead Ieu;snpul aid s! (0.9) d,0y ;o aJn;eaadwa; a ;ea ;sgns pue a!e wnw!u!w y gyg Axo done yj x aoen auey;aJnAlod sp!Iog -!I-I •paa!edw! eq Aew AuowJeH so! ;s!Ja ;aeaeya 6u!AeJds pue `papua;xe Aluea! ;!u6!s aq II!M pleaaw3 saw!; 6ulAJp 10004) 4009 Moleq saan;eaadwa; uol ;ea!Idde ;y }oalago03 awoH uo!eJna }ulod Map ay} anoge 0!IAJOy Wla :s }eooaol panoaaay (00E) dog }seal }e eq pinous aJn}eJedwal a}ei}sgng •lel }uessa ale suoR!puoo uollelquan pooh A }Ip!wny angelaJ y6!y ;o suog!puoo uI S11VO0dOj 03ON3W11O33d •s }onpoad •uogeo!!dde pile Jo 6ulanp SUOWpuoa 0g!0ads Jo; an!}e;uasaadaa swe!pm- u!MJegg JnoA loe }uo0 ;0M Jo dwep `uolpsuapuo0 o; pasodxa aq ;ou ;snw ;I • ;uaw - uoJ!nua IeuJe ;u! AJp e u! pa!Idde aq ;snw OZ69X4 X3132114 Jawud Axod3 alge }eooe21 SNOI110N0 N011b'Ol7dd Jawud IesJ9AIUll IAJ00Jd IeU }SnpUI aid Q d 9kg Axodo oeyg Jawud IeSJan!Un )I!woJ>1 Weill uo!saype a }enbape SH puoE! wad{ :saewud panoJaay aJnsua 0} leua}ew u6!aao; Jay }o pue '}snJ as001 'TJ!p `aseaJ6 ' }snp 'Ho IIe anOwaH •uog!puoo punos u! pue `AJp `ueep aq }snw aoe}Jng •Jawud panoadde y }!■ pew!Jd aq ism NOIld2ldd32/d 301dddl S Sd3WRId 030N3141141O03b1 NOI1VW21OINI 1OflaO2id 311H OZ 19M698 'S1411r1771M 01.1pEOD NIAILIGHS ONklOO Jd3?Jid auLlEy� 1N3OS3INf11NI a3SV82131VM IS° H°a>r3 \ aial OZ ISXi X313? II antpaaJOJd L.R27583 - Mastic and Intumescent Coatings Page 1 of 2 ® ONLINE CERTIFICATIONS DIRECTORY CDWZ.R27583 Mastic and Intumescent Coatings pane Bottom Mastic and Intumescent Coatings See General Information for Mastic and Intumescent Coatings THE SHERWIN - WILLIAMS CO R27583 101 W PROSPECT AVE CLEVELAND, OH 44115 USA Type Firetex M90/02 coating Investigated per the requirements of UL 1709 for use in Design No. )(R632. Type Firetex FX5120 coa • es '. • r the requirements of UL 263 for Interior Conditioned Space and Interior General Purpose use in Design Nos. D981, N Y n Products covered under this certification are at times applied with a secondary coating for finish and aesthetic purposes. This is primarily accomplished by adding an optional coating over the cured mastic or Intumescent coating. The following optional coatings have been investigated as to not reduce the fire resistance rating of the specific mastic and intumescent coating listed. The optional coatings listed in the table below have not been investigated to provide protection against exposure to any environmental conditions. Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted as to the particular requirements covering the Installation and use of UL certified products, equipment, systems, devices and materials. Optional Coating Mastic and Intumescent Optional Coating Optional Target Thkns Coating Model Name Model Name Coating Mfr (microns) Firetex FX5120 Pro Mar 400 Zero VOC Sherwin Williams 30 Firetex FX5120 Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Sherwin Williams 35 Firetex FX5120 Harmony Sherwin Williams 45 Firetex FX5120 Emerald Sherwin Williams 40 Firetex FX5120 Superpaint Interior Sherwin Williams 40 Firetex FX5120 Duration Home Sherwin Williams 35 Firetex FX5120 EcoSelect Sherwin Williams 30 Firetex FX5R0 Solo Sherwin Williams 45 Firetex FX5120 Metalatex Sherwin Williams 37 -100 Firetex FX5120 DTM Acrylic Sherwin Williams 63 -100 Firetex FX5120 Pro Industrial SherCryl 4000 Sherwin Williams 50 -100 Firetex FX5120 Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Sherwin Williams 65 -100 Firetex FX5120 Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Epoxy Sherwin Williams 35 Firetex FX5120 Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy Sherwin Williams 63 -75 Firetex FX5120 Macropoxy 646 Sherwin Williams 125 -250 Firetex FX5120 Hi- Solids Polyurethane Sherwin Williams 75 -125 Firetex FX5120 Waterbased Acrolon 100 Sherwin Williams 50 -100 Firetex FX5120 Acrylon Ultra Sherwin Williams 50 -75 Last Updated on 2013 -03 -20 Qtiiestions? Print this page Terms of Use Paae Too http:// database. ul. com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT/ 1 FRAME /showpage.html ?name =C... 5/24/2013 . , L.R27583 - Mastic and Intumescent Coatings Page 2 of 2 © 2013 UL LLC When the UL Leaf Mark is on the product, or when the word "Environment" is included in the UL Mark, please search the UL Environment database for additional information regarding this products certification. The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under UL's Follow -Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL's Follow -Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product. U1 permits the reproduction of the material contained In the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide Information, Designs and /or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non - misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: "© 2013 UL LLC ". http: // database. ul. com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT/ 1 FRAME /showpage.html ?name =C... 5/24/2013 WV.Y624 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 1 of 7 ONLINE CERTIFICATIONS DIRECTORY Design No. Y624 BXUV.Y624 Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI /UL 263 Page Bottom Design /System /Construction /Assembly Usage Disclaimer • Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted in all cases as to the particular requirements covering the installation and use of UL Listed or Classified products, equipment, system, devices, and materials. • Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction. • Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with applicable requirements. The published information cannot always address every construction nuance encountered in the field. • When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product manufacturer noted for the design. Users of fire resistance assemblies are advised to consult the general Guide Information for each product category and each group of assemblies. The Guide Information includes specifics concerning alternate materials and alternate methods of construction. • Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered as Classified, Listed, or Recognized. Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI /UL 263 See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI /UL 263 Design No. Y624 December 10, 2012 Ratings - 1, 1 -1 /2 and 2 Hr (See Item 3) n r. J y �-.. 1 • �6WV�nyYYKiv�N��MMJ - �+YwYm.•.vNYv�Y`/wYY•.J.• 1. Steel Tube Column — Steel rectangular tube (ST) or pipe (SP) columns with the minimum sizes shown In the tables below. 2. Primer Coating — 50 micron (2 mil) thickness of an epoxy primer or 100 micron (4 mil) thickness of a modified alkyd http: // database. ul. com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT /1 FRAME /showpage.html ?nam... 12/12/2012 1/1 <,tJ V.Y624 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 2 of 7 primer. 3. Mastic & Intumescent Coating* - Coating spray or brush applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at the minimum average dry thickness shown in the thickness below. The thickness shown does not include primer thickness. Required Thickness (mm) Hp /A 60 min. 90 min. 120 min. 210 4.09 6.04 8.96 205 4.01 5.94 8.80 200 3.92 5.83 8.65 195 3.84 5.73 8.49 190 3.75 5.63 8.34 185 3.67 5.52 8.18 180 3.58 5.42 8.03 175 3.50 5.32 7.87 170 3.41 5.22 7.72 165 3.33 5.11 7.56 160 3.25 5.01 7.40 155 3.16 4.91 7.25 150 3.08 4.80 7.09 145 2.99 4.70 6.94 140 2.91 4.60 6.78 135 2.82 4.49 6.63 130 2.74 4.39 6.47 125 2.65 4.29 6.32 120 2.57 4.18 6.16 115 2.49 4.08 6.00 110 2.40 3.98 5.85 105 2.32 3.87 5.69 100 2.23 3.77 5.54 95 2.15 3.67 5.38 90 2.06 3.57 5.23 85 1.98 3.46 5.07 80 1.89 3.36 4.92 75 1.81 3.26 4.76 70 1.72 3.15 4.61 65 1.64 3.05 4.45 Required Thickness (in) HSS Tube Size A/P 60 min. 90 min. 120 min. 2x2x1/4 0.21 0.149 0.223 0.331 2.5x2.5x1/4 0.21 0.149 0.223 0.331 3x2x1/4 0.21 0.149 0.223 0.331 3x3x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 C 3.5x3.5x1/4 ' M :1 0.143 0.216 0.320 4x2x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 4x3x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 4x4x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 http: / /database.ul.com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT /1 FRAME /showpage.html ?nam... 12/12/2012 _ .0 V.Y624 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 3 of 7 5x2x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 5x3x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 6x2x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 5x4x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 5x5x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 6x3x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 6x4x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 7x3x1/4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 8x2x1 /4 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 7x4x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 7x7x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 8x3x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 8x4x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 8x6x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 8x8x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 10x2x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 10x4x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 10x6x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 10x10x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 12x2x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 12x4x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 12X6X1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 12x8x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 12x12x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 14x4x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 14x6x1/4 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 3X3X5/16 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 3.5X3.5X5/16 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 4x2x5/16 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 4X3X5/16 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 5x2x5/16 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 4X4X5/16 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 5X3X15/16 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 6x2x5/16 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 5X4X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 5X5X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 6X3X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 6X4X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 7X3X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 7X4X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 8X2X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 8X3X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 6X6X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 7X5X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 7X7X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 8X4X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 http: // database. ul. com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT /1 FRAME /showpage.html ?nam... 12/12/2012 _L.) V.Y624 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 4 of 7 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 8X8X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 10X2X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 10X4X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 10X6X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 10X10X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 12X4X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 12X6X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 12X8X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 14X4X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 14X6X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 16X4X5/16 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 12X12X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 14X10X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 16X8X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 18X6X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 20X4X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 14X14X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 16X12X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 16X16X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 20X8X5/16 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 4X4X3/8 0.32 0.104 0.168 0.247 5X3X3/8 0.32 0.104 0.168 0.247 6X2X3/8 0.32 0.104 0.168 0.247 5X4X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 6X3X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 5X5X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 6X4X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 6X6X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 7X3X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 7X4X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 7X5X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 8X2X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 8X3X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 8X4X3/8 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 7X7X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 8X6X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 10X4X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 8X8X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 10X6X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 10X10X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 12X4X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 12X6X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 12X8X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 12X12X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 14X4X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 http: / /database.ul.com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT / 1 FRAME /showpage.html ?nam... 12/12/2012 V.Y624 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 5 of 7 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 14X10X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 14X14X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 16X4X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 16X8X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 16X12X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 18X6X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 20X4X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 20X8X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 16X16X3/8 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 4X4X1/2 0.42 0.084 0.144 0.211 5X3X1/2 0.42 0.084 0.144 0.211 5X5X1/2 0.43 0.083 0.142 0.208 6X4X1/2 0.43 0.083 0.142 0.208 6X6X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 7X5X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 7X7X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 8X4X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 8X6X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 10X4X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 8X8X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 10X6X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 12X4X1/2 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 12X6X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 14X4X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 10X10X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 12X8X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 12X12X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 14X6X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 14X10X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 14X14X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 16X4X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 16X8X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 16X12X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 16X16X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 18X6X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 20X4X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 20X8X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 20X12X1/2 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 8X8X5/8 0.55 0.069 0.126 0.184 10X10X5/8 0.55 0.069 0.126 0.184 12X8X5/8 0.55 0.069 0.126 0.184 16X12X5/8 0.56 0.068 0.124 0.181 Required Thickness (in) HSS Pipe Size I A/P 60 min. ( 90 min. I 120 min. http: // database. ul. com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT /1 FRAME /showpage.html ?nam... 12/12/2012 . w V.Y624 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 6 of 7 3x0.216 0.19 0.161 0.238 0.353 3.5x0.216 0.19 0.161 0.238 0.353 2.5X0.25 0.21 0.149 0.223 0.331 3X0.25 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 3.5X0.25 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 4X0.25 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 5X0.25 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 6X0.25 0.22 0.143 0.216 0.320 6.625X0.25 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 7X0.25 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 7.5X0.25 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 8.625X0.25 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 9.625X0.25 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 10X0.25 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 12.5X0.25 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 5X0.258 0.23 0.137 0.209 0.309 6X0.28 0.25 0.128 0.197 0.292 3 X 0.3 0.25 0.128 0.197 0.292 3.5X0.300 0.26 0.124 0.192 0.284 3.5X0.313 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 4X0.313 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 5X0.312 0.27 0.120 0.187 0.277 6X0.312 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 6.625X0.312 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 7X0.312 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 7.5X0.312 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 9.625X0.312 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 10X0.312 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 12.5X0.312 0.28 0.116 0.183 0.271 14X0.312 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 16X0.312 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 4X0.337 0.29 0.113 0.179 0.265 5X0.375 0.33 0.102 0.166 0.244 10X0.375 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 14X0.375 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 16X0.375 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 18X0.375 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 20X0.375 0.34 0.099 0.162 0.239 16X0.438 0.40 0.087 0.148 0.217 5X0.5 0.43 0.083 0.142 0.208 6X0.5 0.43 0.083 0.142 0.208 7X0.5 0.43 0.083 0.142 0.208 10X0.5 0.44 0.081 0.140 0.206 12.5X0.5 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 14X0.5 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 16X0.5 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 http: // database. ul. com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT /1 FRAME /showpage.html ?nam... 12/12/2012 V.Y624 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 7 of 7 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 20X0.5 0.45 0.080 0.139 0.203 10X0.625 0.55 0.069 0.126 0.184 11.25X0.625 0.55 0.069 0.126 0.184 12X0.625 0.55 0.069 0.126 0.184 LEIGH'S PAINTS — FIRETEX FX5120 INVESTIGATED FOR INTERIOR CONDITIONED SPACE AND INTERIOR GENERAL PURPOSE THE SHERWIN - WILLIAMS CO — FI' ETEX FX5120 NVESTIGATED FOR INTERIOR CONDITIONED SPACE AND INTERIOR GENERAL PURPOSE *Bearing the UL Classification Mark Last Updated on 2012 -12 -10 Ouestions? Print this one Terms of Use Paae Too © 2012 UL LLC When the UL Leaf Mark is on the product, or when the word "Environment" is included in the UL Mark, please search the UL Environment database for additional information regarding this product's certification. The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under UL's Follow -Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL's Follow -Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product. UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide Information, Designs and /or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non - misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: "© 2012 UL LLC ". http: // database. ul. com /cgi- bin/XYV /template/LISEXT /1 FRAME /showpage.html ?nam... 12/12/2012 (3 - 7o2 443 Lafayette Road N. DEPARTMENT OF (651) 284 -5005 St. Paul, Minnesota 55155 1 -800- DIAL -DLI www.dli.mn.gov LAB R & I DUST Y TTY: (651) 2974198 Adlik August 23, 2013 Clearwater Plumbing and Heating 19260 Mushtown Road Prior Lake, MN 55372 Gentlemen/Ladies: Subject: REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION regarding plumbing at Friendship Baptist Church Remodel, 17741 Fairlawn Avenue, Prior Lake, Scott County, Minnesota, Plan No. PLB 1308- 00025 We are NOT able to grant approval at this time of the plans and specifications submitted for the above - designated project. The following comment(s) outline the changes and/or additional information that must be submitted so that we can further evaluate the plans and specifications for compliance with the standards of this department: 1 The Plumbing Plan Review Application indicates that each sheet of the plumbing design must be signed and include the designer's licensed number. Since only one of the sheets was signed, provide revised plans that include the signature and license number of the master plumber on each sheet of the design. 2 The waste and vent riser diagram shows that the laundry tub and clothes washer will be common vented, but the underfloor drain piping plan shows separate 2 -inch pipes for the laundry tub and clothes washer. Provide revised plans that clarify which design is correct. 3 Indicate whether a potable water connection will be provided for a coffee maker. 4 The plans indicate that a coffee sink will be provided. Clarify whether this sink is part of a breakroom or kitchenette, or whether this sink is part of a larger kitchen (i.e.: a kitchen with hand sinks, dishwasher, three - compartment sink, etc.). 5. Indicate the pipe materials to be used, including the quality standard (e.g. ASTM, ANSI, etc.). Please submit the requested information promptly so we may complete our plan review. No construction related to the above - referenced plans shall begin until approval is provided by our office. When submitting additional information, please refer to Plan No. PLB1308- 00025. If you have any questions, contact me at 651/284 - 5803. Sincerely, Scott Sawyer, P.E. Public Health Engineer Plumbing Plan Review and Inspections Unit cc: City of Prior Lake Building Official File This information can be provided to you in altemative formats (Braille, large print or audio). An Equal Opportunity Employer C 0 . 9 - - 3, , %eat L4 ?Iv .D S . ...i. C 08/16/13 04:06 PR CDT Ner�«ya -- -- mat tic cv-ta, / RRtKSE`l V i dl' I`t_f) * INVOICE * #s #: /)tf N E SUPPLY, INC. H LUMBER i S MONNENS P LUMBUMBER R & BUILDING MATERIAL I 16214 MG r d W A 11-6' 1° .ey 1614 PR LAIE M 3 BOX 488 P PRIOR U PRIOR LAKE MN 55372 ACCT: MO2629 INV DATE: 08-16 - 13 15:58 SHIP VIA: OUR TRUCK �� 4rA INV #:398604 SHIP DATE:08 -16 -13 'WHSE' MESGoFREINDSHIP CHRCH- REF *: FRT TERM: PO ' ?'-4. � � ORDER SHIP UNIT ITEM SIZE UOM QUANTITY -.1 .° S 2 2 EA MI OAK EA 2 /her OAK BORROWED BORROWED LITE UNIT 6 -3/4 TRIMMABLE OAK VENEER JAMBS �y� 156 OAK CASING APPLIED ONE SIDE (' / � BACK SIDE LOOSE /MITERED � / GLASS TO BE PITCHED IN FRAME l� 014101 OUTSIDE OF BOX 61 -7/8 X 60 - 5/8 2 2 EACH . ZZ00016470 NON -STOCK EACH 2 60- 3/8X59 - 1/4 CLEAR TEMP GLASS --, EA 2 2 2 EA MI OA K O BORROWED LITE UNIT 6 -3/4 TRIMMABLE OAK VENEER JAMB 156 OAK CASING APPLIED ONE SIDE BACKSIDE LOOSE AND MITERED GLASS TO BE PITCHED IN FRAME OUTSIDE OF FRAME 30 -5/8 X 60 -5/8 2 2 EACH ZZ00016471 NON -STOCK •- EACH 2 '' 29- 3/16X59 - 1/ 4 CLEAR TEMP GLASS_ TOTAL t , 0 );rj -' HERITAGE MILLWORK, INC. 6190 MCKINLEY ST NW RAMSEY, MN 55303 763- 323 - 75 01 A SERVICE CHARGE OF 1 1 /2% PER MONTH WILL BE CHARGED ON INVOICES PA PAY TERMS: 1% 10TH IF 16TH- 31ST,1X 25TH IF 1ST- 15TH,N30 DUE DATE: YOU MAY DEDUCT 812.91 IF PAID ON OR BEFORE SEPTEMBER 10, 2013 a . � rt , ,te a. i 1' . `der' re; Ji e - 25 Sept 2012 Heritage Millwork, In 6190 McKinley St NW • Ramsey MN 55303 Attn: Tom Keller RE: Visions Tempered Glass Tom: This letter serves as a Certificate of Compliance indicating that all glass supplied to Heritage Millwork for the Visions glass .program has been tempered in accordance with the Consumer Product Safety Commission Standard 16 CFR 1201, Categories 1 & and ANZI Z97, 1 The tempered glass meets the quality and strength requirements of ASTM C - 1036 - 90 and ASTM C - 1048 - 90 and the Safety Criteria of CPS 16 CFR 1201. Please contact me if you need further information of have any questions. Thank you, • Amy Jensen River City Creative Glass 3550 W 145 St • Unit 2 Burnsville MN 55306 952- 224 -9030 Tel 952- 224 -9035 Fax LOC /100 tiLZ# b£ :bl £1OZ160 /01 LZZ£ ZIL £9L ou! ){aoM!!!W a6e1!JaH:woJd 4 VC I : uolsioA 0! PC 10 L abed E 1.0Z/L0/0 L :alas lu!ad IL9 : 31Of O 09'00 $ 09'004 $ (0 'Zt' $ lo s0b4e40 [Inn sepnioul) .yelol Hun alaldwoQ `Pe!Idb (loaa!p) &loloed 09135 $ 05'95 $ .91.16 9 `au!d lealo `sower uo!sualx3 aalawuad 0000000 L MINI paw) Aioloed - ioge puu sped apsodwo3 631ad a4X3 ao!Jd Ielol uould!JaseO am well wnN Iced AIO :sluewwo3 s -s :6u!pueH /uolleJadO Z -L : • -z!s well/GPO Pufl Hufl alaldwoO `pail... loaa!a) /Goloe-J `49L16 9'au!d leen :We(' UO! • . 3 ialawuad IInW MOJJN :leual - , : U!IInW leo!PeA :Aluoud I I (loeiia) itaoloed :uo!leoo16u!IIoW 0000000 :ragwfN Ued Z L Hun al!sodwoO , H..9 /402XM..'/80.17= ezlS1l4 H..8 /90.ZXM..: LO.t =ezISOd 1r13MOHS 1-131S ' :uo!leoo1 :Ie!l!u! 1. :A1O well sun 9001 :# well sun W9£6`4 $ 00'99L $ 00761. $ sse1O q3 -Moi . ouewioped 00139L $ 00'Z61. $ 4 ` S `au!d ma */e1!4M 'Hull L , L60L0£I 1. solid PapuelX3 aOJJd lelol uol4d!JoseJ ez!S =41 wnN lied AIO :sluewwo SoA :0G!1!1B %MS AO- - 3 `L£'0 :OOHS '6Z'0 :aoloe uaa4UoN • - oZ II s -10 f73-M0 aoueWJO -d LPN ' . •Ll s au!d - - .Joloa Joplin al!4M :aoloo Joualx3 eOuuld 6u!I!eN :uolldO eweJd L60LOE 1. :JegwnN Ued s :6u4pueH/uo4eJedO of :ez!s weil/aPoo 1!ufl spun al6u!s VSd `seueS OOP Z4OZ41uf1 PRIOR LAKE. DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING AND INSPECTION INSPECTION RECORD SITE ADDRESS 11 • ra A& NATURE OF WORK 1--∎ USE OF BUILDING 1. PERMIT DATE ISSUED CONTRACTOR T L , , ccep,.15r FucT PHONE 44(n -. INSTALL EROSION CONRTOL AND MAINTAIN CLEAN STREETS AT ALL TIMES INSPECTOR DATE �s r (0-6 P (- r To Backfill) PLACE NO CONCRETE UNTIL ABOVE HAS BEEN SIGNED ROUGH - INS FRAMING INSULATION ELECTRICAL PLUMBING 41- -7/15- HEATING GAS LINE AIR TEST 4111111111111MMit COVER NO WORK UNTIL THE ABOVE HAS BEEN SIGNED FINALS BUILDING ®I ELECTRICAL PLUMBING A HEATING 0 DO NOT OCCUPY UNTIL ABOVE HAS BEEN SIGNED NOTICE This card must be posted near an electrical service cabinet prior to rough -in inspections and maintained until all inspections have been approved. On buildings and additions where no service cabinet is available, card shall be placed near main entrance. FOR ALL INSPECTIONS (952) 447 -9850 CITY OF PRIOR LAKE BUILD G P IT PLAN REVIEW INSPEG`I OR DATE 7 P O. . FRII NDS1 11P C1 IURCI I ❑ACCEPTED AS SUBMITTED UACCEPTED WITH CORRECTIONS AS NOTED PROT1R LAKE, MN o NOT ACCEPTED-CORRECT& RESUBMIT .1 TITLE SHEET These comments are for your information.All work shall be done in full compliance with all applicable building&zoning code requirements including items not specifically noted in this review. ARCHITECTURAL KEEP THIS PLAN SET ON SITE AT ALL TIMES. TEAM fL�� 7—(e- PROJECTC Al LOWER LEVEL DEMO PLAN Z. gmc9t6� Cr�Ge-n/`� �'�E©" LOWER LEVEL CODE & FLOOR PLAN �� �v STATION ARCHITECT A2 ,�6� NINETEEN A3 MAIN LEVEL CODE & FLOOR PLAN \ Architects- Irmrporated Station 19 Architects, Inc. f�� � 2001 UNIVERSITY A4 UPPER LEVEL CODE & FLOOR PLAN ,�,�j-'�J AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 2001 University Ave. S,E, Suite 1 M A5 LOWER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN J� MINNEAPOLIS, v MINNESOTA 55414 PHONE(612)623.1600 Minneapolis, MN 55414 BUILDING LL TYPE �� FAX 612 623.0012 A6 U G & W A S l PH:(612) 623-1800 A7 WALL SECTIONS & PLAN DETAILS su�emdk. ma Registered ludutect reeler Qre laws FAX:(612) 623-0012 Separate permits are required MINNE �: A8 ENLARGED PLANS & MOUNTING HEIGHTS for Plumbing, Heating SIGNATURE OWNER fZ Kc. A9 DOOR & FRAME ELEVATIONS Outside Sewer and Water, REGtSARCHAAAMN Nt1M8EFtT m PETERSON Friendship Church A10 MILLWORK DETAILS Electrical, r(,jj DATE. 1DAARa<2013 All CODE REVIEW �oP s; 17741 Fairlawn Ave CHECKM Eff: T" Prior Lake, MN 55372 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE PRDF FRIENDSHIP PH:(952) 447-8282 CHURCH ROOM# ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE WALL HM FRAMES CEILING REMARKS PRIOR LAKE, FAX:(952) 447-8223 002 STORAGE EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST MINNESOTA Project Number 4428 003A STORAGE EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST 003B STORAGE EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST t�t0�� ' � -n Prtstrakr 004 MECHANICAL EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST .�. L4�f311it. ._.r 005 MEN EXIST EXIST PT EXIST EXIST .. 006 E 1 P PTI 1 a« t007 LOWER LOBBY CPT 1 VB 1 GWB PT 1,2 PTI EXIST B2013511 No. Date Aper Revision Nolen Utz- mini 1 g � � 008 YOUTH ASSEMBLY CPT 1 VB 1 GWB PT 1 PT 1 EXIST 008A NE MECH CPT 1 VB1 GWB PT 1 PT 1 EXIST ( 1 008B PRESENTATION ? VB1 GWB PT 1 PTI EXIST 008C STORAGE CPT 1 VB 1 GWB PT 1 PT 1 EXIST � wo �, 009 MAINT/STOR EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST '� m htudi_ 010 ELEV EQUIPMENT EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST r0 -< No. Date Issue Notes >_ 'Dr SVY 011 STORAGE EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST P„,,, 012 HALLWAY EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C� — —± FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES sheer T� TITLE 1. SEE PLAN A2 FOR FINISH LOCATIONS SHEET 2. SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET A4 FOR FINISH LOCATIONS e.°.i.9�. 3. SEE CEILING SHEET A5 FOR FINISH LOCATIONS j ES SPECIFIC DEMO NOTES - CONT'D SPECIFIC DEMO NOT CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS DESIGNATED BELOW IN THE LOCATION 6. CARPET AND BASE. IDENTIFIED BY THE FOLLOWING SYMBOL. ITEMS.TO BE REMOVED SHOWN DASHED. 7. DISPLAY BOARD- SAVE FOR OWNERS USE. 8. LIGHT FIXTURES 1. STUD WALL AND ALL INTEGRAL COMPONENTS INCLUDING ANY DOOR AND WINDOWS 9. WINDOW AND ALL RELATED HARDWARE 2. DOOR AND ALL RELATED HARDWARE 10. FLOOR & WALL TILE 3. DOOR AND ALL RELATED HARDWARE--TO BE RELOCATED. 11. SHEETROCK TO STUDS 4. SINK 12. VANITY BASE W/SINK 5. ACT CEILINGS INCLUDING GRID LIGHTS&ALL ACCESSORIES. NOTE: SEE SPEC FOR GENERAL DEMO NOTES ORIGINAL LOWER LEVEL - 189 OCC. __-- S TAT I O N ---- 0 ' 9 9 NINETEEN t „ „ 6 , ; 9 1 ;' ; Architects- Incorporated —� 1 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE , UE SOUTHEAST-4 — SUITE 100 ' q� ,r 5 f0 7 MINNEAPOLIS, 9 , , ! `� '!! [ Q0B 2 MINNESOTA 55414 1 1 _ r­N i I fi - 1 K=,_________,-� r_ PHONE(612)623.1800 I FAX 612 623.0012 t l 2 t t t t 1� ;; 8 : ' t I tie cirr cion, mat o:s pian. 3009 L t , ,t t t 8 , ' =pe� ata2 a �,� 1 i ,, prepared io me or r my d rea ' ' 6 t t 1 ' t 1 , Wupervtsfon and that 1.a dory t t i t 1 Registered Architect oder the laws t t t t t ' of the state d: 001 f ?00 MINN TA e I Merv- 12 SIGNATURE OOS ; I, ,, ;; _1 ARCHITECT.. T0M PtT6tSON -- - Maintenance/Storage 5 11 rpt � , ' � ' i t i 1,; REGISTRATION NUMBER: 10581 009 DATE: to APRIL 4019 I t t t DRAWN BY: Lj 6 ORIGINAL OCC. cHEClceo BY, TWP Mechanical/Elect_. " C LASS ROOM PROJECT TM„ 1 , tt . 11 t 528 SF @ 20 SF/P = 26 OCC. FRIENDSHIP 004 ' ' 1 t g ;; CHURCH rl tt 1 til PRIOR LAKE, ORIGINAL OCC. ;; ORIGINAL OCC. ; MINNESOTA ' ' 1 ,, ” �• 1 Project Number 4428 FELLOWSHIP ,, ;; CLASSROOM , Stor ' ' 1185 SF @ 15 SF/P =79 OCC. ,; '' 1185 SF @ 15 SF/P = 79 OCC. NW Stair ' ' 1I " ifaundomm�nined inelecnmicfites. 0036 ; ; ;; ;; Elev Eq o dronkfi�:ia«,�Irbieaeur� ut 001 t t , Elevator ,Waodw " " 7 DEMO 010 Thidom—,—yr,otbeuaed« piedwld.A 3 DEMO pmrcmuWt. Stor t t T 1 1 1 ®2113,ti gh sm ved 00814' CPT No. Date Appr Revision Notes 003A 101_ ; 908 '�- t� t1 --------------- ---------- ----------- 80 -------- UP -- ________________________________- EXIST EXIST j� CPT Hallway CPT St. Storage U 6 012 011 Unexc_. 002 DEMO EXIST CPT CPT No,I Date Issue Notes PI® CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet TAW LOWER LEVEL 0 4 8 FT DEMO PLAN 1 DEMO PLAN 11 NORTH Al Scale: 1/8 = 1 -0 Al GENERAL PLAN NOTES SPECIFIC PLAN NOTES A. FOR WALL TYPES,SEE SHEET AX 1. ALTERNATE 12-0"WIDE OVERHEAD DOOR B. SEE CODE REVIEW PLAN SHEETS A5&A6 FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES. 2. PATCH WALLS&FLOOR AT REMOVED WALLS C. SEE SPEC. FOR DOOR HARDWARE. 3. VIDEO MONITOR BY OTHERS-PROVIDE BLOCKING D. ALL GRIDS ARE LOCATED AT THE OUTSIDE FACE OF FOUNDATION 4. GWB SOFFIT @ REMOVED LOWER WALLS. EL 7'-0" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. HC HEIGHT WATER COOLER/TILE BEHIND&AT SIDES (AS OCCURS) E. SEE 4/A6 FOR FRAME ELEVATIONS 6. EXPOSED COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED W/INTUMESCENT PAINT TO MAINTAIN RATING F. SEE SPEC. FOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE AND FINISH KEY. 7. AV DESK BY OWNERS ORIGINAL LOWER LEVEL IS SPRINKLERED 8. VINYL TRANSITION ORIGINAL LOWER LEVEL (LL) OCCUPANCY @ 189 Occ.-SEE DEMO PLAN SHEET Al 9. EXISTING DOOR W/PANIC HARDWARE PROPOSED LL OCCUPANCY FOR PLUMBING COUNT: MAY ASSUME NON-CONCURRENT OCCUPANCY OF LOBBY& ASSEMBLY=140 Occ. Plumbing (/09 SEATS SHOWN) PROPOSED LL OCCUPANCY FOR EXITING COUNT: MUST ASSUME CONCURRENT OCCUPANCY OF LOBBY& ASSEMBLY=83+ 124+14+2=223 Occ. @ Exiting 34" CLEAR PROVIDED=34"/0.15 in./Occ Allowable=226 OCC. CAPACITY 34" CLEAR PROVIDED=34"/0.15 in./Occ 56 Clear Provided w/Alt DR 00 - -373 Occ. Capacity Allowable- 226 APACITY ALT - ADD ACTUAL 77 Occ.=OK ACTUAL @ 69 Occ. OK 9'-011 BI-PART DOORS A� Nos A7 9 ,V I� A7 A7 S TAT I O N I I �. _ NINETEEN 9 007 °�° ,F ''il p T- uu nn IN _ Hl I,If - I Architects-Incorporated o 12 SF 1 r i' ' I' 07 2001 UNIVERSITY to '' '' - 120° AVENUE SOUTHEAST p') ' �f ' _ 35 a 2 SUITE 100 07 �� MINNEAPOLIS, 511 " G 2 28'GANIE CIRCLE SHOWN DASHED �08� INE Mech MINNESOTA 55414 9-0 1/2 rJ 28'GAME CIRCLE SHOWN DASHED 0 — \ �— r ' — \ PHONE(612)623.1800 f r — — —— 008A FAX 612 623.0012 5'-8 1/4" W I I 4 \\ CV I hearby certify that this plan, ,'♦ , ,' ♦ , ,' ♦ __ _ 5 41_ - \ \ r specification,or redpeo�rl was I 006 ® I r �/ ♦♦, ' •,� ♦� f "1 I ' It I If I II , superv�Isibon and thatlama dulyt C ) C� ` ♦�♦ L ? p \ \ P P Y Y I I ' / t,♦ > `� �` ♦ ., r I I _ _ tir=y a!=u O Q ♦` ♦\ , Registered Architect under the laws I 2 —I- 2 .' , ,�) ( ♦ , ) Y ♦ ,�) = 1 I , - ri i 1 i r v ♦\ \ of the state of: 005 _211 �c (� 4_ ! -- ' —�J MINNESOTA 3 - ----- - - ---- 1 1 4 \ I SIGNATURE ----, AIII III , ♦✓�♦ ✓ �i♦) wr. iI_ I Iu�I=dII it=3gI kI4I=ddI 1441==1iI ° ,I ARCHITECT TOM PEERSON omen A4 005 FUTUIt ! 11 1 11 ! REGISTRATION NUMBER: 105817 Men ALTERNATE/ Rf006 i=� CPT1 �CPT2 18 APPIL281361 SF Maintenance/Storaq I I I, ' DATE: I ♦ I I L I, 1 1 I 1. . I . ♦v♦ / �1 I f I I, ri=} —9 I 009 DRAWN BY: EJ f 1 I I Lower Fellowship Lobby I 4-_ ! Youth Assembly I Presentation' — ---------- f , It , 1 I I-� I I ri- -- 1 I I I 007 2 v n r' ri 1 n—i 00$ 1 ri= 1 699 SF CHECKED BY: TWP W w1!i II= I If I '�: I If t 00 BB , /300 =2OCC I ' _ PROJECT TITLE It , ` '♦1'251 SF , , ti / ♦ '� �� ; 4-3 865 SF: „ i 217 SF if Mechanical/Elect. I , ' ' ' `-/15'='83 OCC" '�} t>` } ' 1 1 11 1/7=124 OCC 11 /15=14 OCC; FRIENDSHIP `-� �) (�\ ,') 4 Fr) I ri'-- II e1 Lri-1 =i '-= '-- -;=i , CHURCH 004 I ' I \1 I II`-� ' .',, , . ♦. , , u .r ill 1 II I >09 SEA TS �I I — u 'SHOWN SF f lJ PRIOR LAKE, II 1 II I D 1 11 1 II I ' �� ----- -- o w: '_' . 4 2 ! ° ' MINNESOTA , � r � � rt ♦ n_4 rl i ri i / ♦ %y ',,•4 ,`;'`� a f1 , 6 I; 'i , , ,/ - / SIM Project Number 4428 6 n• i i } A4 , / moors mny—,In uK mn:m Uion ofrlsvonir Q ! : % / ( > _ 1 , files.Statiau Ni--Architects,Inc is not /) ♦ �' \ /') I <_ I!_% r!s- I!^? �r]}. /f — responsi67eforanycuh.ddamagesorezp<nses ♦ /` !`v ♦ ♦ /` ,'� -', ri=3 6;I��a`"i ri=i ri=•l -t7 ' / rotor d—romaicdlnue—i,,fil— Stor Ile 1 II It i II I II 00 _ —� Electronic files may not aceuratelyrefle�.t thefinal .�. ve•rio se�ify all layov di—iaasbd�dotbthe 7 003B ------- ,'STOR 00 2 Elev Eq..i _ �,-tm°Ynm6�n anrcnpied,,tont 7VJ0077C �5 008B-% oo8c r Elevator oio I ®t1o17 lrigh re d Stor 120° 62 SFNo. Date Appr Revision Notes 003A1 6/27113 REQUEST#1 j UPC1 Hallway 91-011 St. q wStora e 9 012 Unexc. 77 ad 49 SF w o No. Date Issue Notes Ph— CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet Title LOWER LEVEL CODE& 1 FLOOR PLAN 0 4 8 FT FLOOR PLAN I (T Drav,irg No. A2Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0' A Z NORTH /� CANTILEVERED BALCONY 2 15 67D BALCONY MEETS PAVING AT GRADE OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE 159S ft 183 sq ft 221 sq ft /160=,OCC D 4' ,loo=1OCC /100=2OCC NOTE: 2 EARLY PRE-SCHOOL FOR LOWER LEVEL OFFICE/1 ft 79s occ as /3551150CC CODE PLAN NOTES D LATER PRE-SCHOOL SEE LOWER ' ,46420 FLOOR PLAN 1/A2 ' OFFICE OFFICE /35=420CC tD133sgft 167sgft OFFICE /100=1 OCC /100=1 OCC 155 sq ft /100=1 OCC UP 12 �{U"n OFFICE OFFICE S TAT I O N 202 sq k 216 SC&C DEMO DOOR- 77_" /1oo=zocc /160=2occ EL 64°Clear Provided= � 6410.2--320 coKPATCH OPENING 20" ACTUAL®320ocap-ONINETEEN G07D D:_ P , Architects-Incorporated %�7 : - _ - _-- P""\ 2001 UNIVERSITY G 1008> -" "- - 320D 320D AVENUE SOUTHEAST - ,OOB ; RELOCATE DOOR SUITE 100 2 MINNEAPOLIS, OA _— _____. MINNESOTA 55414 PHONE(612)623.1800 RELOCATE TO 34°CLEAR PROVIDED=34°/0.2 ind Occ Allowable= FAX 612 623.0012 : 70 -- CAPACITY- -_---- UPPER LEVEL - MEDIA STOR ACTUAL 0170 Oe OK I hewby certify that this plan, specification,or report was - prepared by me or under my direct 37'-9"<2.5 x 15'-1 OlI supervision and that I am a duly Registered Architect under the laws per IBC 1.017.3 of the state of: ATRIUM MEN MINNESOTA GARDEN � SIGNATURE 1 ARCHITECT: TOM PETERSON I� CAFE co REGISTRATION NUMBER: 845 sq ft WOMEN /15=56 OCC15'-10" CENTER DATE: 10 APRIL2013 - DRAWN BY: EJ 4801 sq ft CHECKED BY: TTyP PROJECT TITLE MULTI-PURPOSE 4801 sq ft FRIENDSHIP AS=320 OCC CHURCH MOVEABLE SEATING 4117 2519 sq ft MECH /7=359 OCC STOR ft 0 PRIOR LAKE, 130041gOCCPLATFORM MINNESOTA PLATFORM MOVEABLE SEATING Project Number 4428 CLASSROOM 680 sq ft smrs m� u,a uantmissiun urelttuvnk 2005gft III 1 4586 ft /15=450CC o yorrorin /15=13 OCC q fila.ss,eool,-yt n nrehueets,roe.is p es /35=13 OCC respwsblefor avyclaims,dd.g orezpzm KITCHEN oiomtet oto m-ii'd iinncI"U"ic el� 411 Sgft INFO Electronic fiks may notxcumtely" thefinal /200=2 SCC detiencanditiovs.It is the responsibility of the STOR ntean.eary an layouts,aimeotioat naa omen a 180 T'Rl information. us,i documzm may not he used or ropied svitho W 2 1 13 prior ronsent. 01013./high...—d CHAPEL No. Date Appr Revision Notes 2263 sq ft Q Q _- 1 6/27113 REQUEST#1 10 9 9 0 192 SEATS 4 - - - W � M 25 D 1 a 4117 d„ CLASSROOM INFANT TODDLER 222 1 k 373 sq k 369 sq ft / 265 /20=2 11 OCC /35=10 OCC /20-- 18 OCC /f ///� No. Date Issue Notes Q 218 UP 320 t Phase CONSTRUCTION /Y\/Yn DOCUMENTS 265 320 - Sheet title s4°clear�Povded= 0 sa°GearP�rovidea= MAIN LEVEL CODE AQCTUAL®2850.'0y ACTUAL® bearaaone 0 8 16 FT &FLOOR PLAN 1 MAIN LEVEL CODE PLAN Draring No. A3 Cale: 1/16" = 1 -0" A3 STOR a 30 CLASSROOM CLASSROOM CLASSROOM CLASSROOM - 405 sq It 1228 sq It 1218 sq It 619 sq If /20=20OCC /20=61 GCC 120=60OCC 120=30 OCC NOTE. vA_ FOR LOWER LEVEL Rog RELOCATE CODE PLAN NOTES EXISTING 20r SEE LOWER MIN LABELLED x OFFICE 2 FLOOR PLAN 1/A2 a DOOR& ``"`c-� ` /1006 occ ` oOA FRAME..__ �v3`` 'RELOCATED y�y EXISTING 20 STOR / 2 20 sr MIN LABELLED 2 — DOOR& 0 12 2 FRAME FROM EL STATION sr. 200 m OWER LEVEL ), 120 30 D 31 DN NINETEEN <7-' Architects-Incorporated a 120 0 2001 UNIVERSITY 2 AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 01 00 MINNEAPOLIS, , MINNESOTA 55414 WOMEN MEN PHONE(612)623.1800 OFFICE __ FAX 612 623.0012 267 sq It I hearby certify that this plan, 1100=2OCC - -- - specification,or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly ATRIUM Registered Architect under the laws GARDEN 65 of the state of: MINNESOTA SIGNATURE OFFICE ARCHITECT: TOM PETERSON 294 sgft (RELO TED /loo=2occ EXISTIN 0 REGISTRATION NUMBER: 10581 VIIN LABELLE DATE: 18 APRIL2013 DOOR& x�_ £, FRAME FROM ' DRAWN BY: EJ MAIN LEVEL 7 a CHECKED BY: TWP OFFICE PROJECT TITLE �:r�_--A- , /1006 OCC 100'COMMON PATH OF � � OPEN FRIENDSHIP DEGRESS PER ICC 1014.3 $ r CHURCH 2 0 EXCEPTION 2 _ _ _, _ _ _ �1 D -5 2 BALCONY �` PRIOR LAKE, 1538sgft MINNESOTA STOR. 130 seats E OFFICE I Project Number 4428 145 sq It I 187'TO EXIT-COMPLIES W/ >;mrs mn me vnn:m on oraeermnie 200'EXIT ACCESS TRAVEL files.S.flneN1.1 nArehst—,Inc.isnm 1100=1 OCC y orur m DISTANCE PER ICC TABLE 1016.1 t ftheuvavthorizeduseofine 1 D responsible for avy claims,damages or expenses I Mf—fl-.-;red in el—k files. Elecwnk files may vot vccurntelyredec[the fia l desi gni—[t is the res y v a� c�o srrify all layouts,dimekvs mtd other u related informatfv Thi:d«nment mny vm be used or copied n;mom i OPEN OFFICE / PLATFORM FELLOW72D ®zola anagh[sreser.na 270 Sq ft / ( No. Date Appr Revision Notes /100=2 OCC 225 sq ft 1936 sq It ( _. 115=15OC /15=129OCC 2 218 / /OFFICE /227 sq ft 4100=2OCC STOR. / uP No. Date Issue Notes Phase CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet Title UPPER LEVEL CODE 1 0 8 16 FT &FLOOR PLAN UPPER LEVEL CODE PLAN A4 caie: 1 16" = 1'-0" Drawing"° CEILING PLAN GENERAL • • A. ALL NEW ACT TO BE 2X2 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. • B. NOTE: SEE ELECT. FOR ADDITIONAL LIGHT INFORMATION C. ALL WALLS EXTEND TO STRUCTURE ABOVE NOTEDAS OTHERWISE. • D. PROVIDE SOUND SEALANT 9 TOP, BOTTOM, END & PENETRATIONS IN WAL E. ELEVATIONS SHOWN INDICATE DIMENSION ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR (AFF) I F. EXISTING LIGHTS TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTEDON • o =■■■■ — �� `■■■ m m Ems LOW m ■ 1 / .. .. .. �� O . .�� ■■■ .. corpomted .. SOUTHEAST. / MINNEAPOLIS,100 PHONE 612)623.1800 AX 1'123.0012 ��■ ■ A •�. 7t ■ ■ MINNESOTA 55414 61, 10,01 ARCHITECT, KNOWN 01.MIN FATE: I&A RIL 20131 Mechanic �• r � ^ ©�t■■ r ■ a ■M■■ © ■__■ 1 ■u ° ° ■�■ . __0 ■ ■I CHURCH EXIST AC ��� _■■■■ ■■■ 1 p � PRIOR MINNESOTA NONNI Elevator MEN X1111 ■-u r� ■■I■■■H■�,p..A ■ l■H ■■■■■■E® ■■IM®■■ ■■Il •�1Ilk ► rpmCONSTRUCTION ■■ ■C. . , . ■■r■ 1■■�[. , . ■■���� ■■■i� DOCUMENTSPh- /? LLEVEL OWER 0 MONITOR BY OTHER--, --------- - ----------P�2- -� ----- BEAM BEYOND ' PT3 " L----J i If L----J \♦ PT1 d ;; PT1 a REUSED DOOR PT 4 ; VB 1 PT 4 COLUMN BEYOND REUSED DOOR 1 SECTION @ YOUTH ASSEMBLY LOOKING EAST 4 8 FT STATION A6 Scale:-118" = -V-0" O N NINETEEN Architects-Incorporated 2001 UNIVERSITY 20" X 4" TRANSFER GRILLE- CENTER ON DOOR 0 AVENSU SOUTHEAST 100 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55414 ————————— PHONE(612)623.1800 I° — --——————————— ——— -- FAX 612 623.0012 �r-------------------n------------- r-� I I heathy certify that this plan, YUI / ♦ - specification,or report was ,/ ♦♦ /� \\ ,/ ♦\ BEAM BEYOND prepared by me orunder my direct su e"os"n and that I am a du Regla%redArchitectunderihelays #' ♦ / ' / - I 0 of the state of: MINNESOTA ♦♦ // ♦ / PT 1 I I VB 1 11 WD 1 \\ /' SIGNATURE \J,/ ♦ / I 1 I 1 \ / ARCHITECT: TOM PETERSON 1/4" TEMPERED GLASS 3 COLUMN BEYOND REGISTRATION NUMBER: 10581 A4 DATE: 18 APflIL2013 DRAWN BY: EJ 2 SECTION @ YOUTH ASSEMBLY LOOKING WEST4 8 FT CHECKED BY: Twp— F-1 A6 Scale: 1/8" = 1'-011 PROJECT TITLE FRIENDSHIP NOTE: SEE STRUCTURAL FOR CHURCH LOCATION OF LVL STUDS 4 6 3/4" PRIOR LAKE, MINNESOTA Project Number 4428 Errors may—in the nnnsma ion of electronic files.Station N eteen Architects,Inc.is- 2X4 WOOD msp�sble fo any<Iaims,d—gesor-penses out ofd nnauthorired use of the 2X6 WOOD STUDS @ info=rioo mnmined in electratic fiks. STUDS @ 16° 16" O.C. W/ BATT. F11—.kfiles may nnta wtely refiectrh fiol O.C. W/ BATT. deslencadnions.fc;s berespoaibllity fthe INSUL. use,Ii !lrifynutayouts dhnen:ions and cher INSUL. d inf_uuon. rn'saame my not be used orcopiduhhout pour consent. ®2013 nll rights resened _ p No. Date Appr Revision Notes 5/8" GWB 5/8" GWB 1 6127113 REQUEST#1 EACH SIDE EACH SIDE No. Date Issue Nates Phase CONSTRUCTION 1O 2x4 WD STUD WALL O 2x6 WD STUD WALL DOCUMENTS Sheet Title BUILDING SECTIONS 4 WALL TYPES o 4 8 IN &WALL TYPES A6 bcale: 1 1/2" = V-0" Draxing No. CENTER NEW WALL ON COLUMNS FQ LUMN = S TAT I O N EXISTING CO o NINETEEN Architects- Incorporated 2001 UNIVERSITY ,A \ AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 M NNEAPO S. MINNESOTA 55414 PHONE(612)623.1800 FAX 612 67.1.0012 'ptp 2 PLAN DETAIL WALL @ COLUMN o 4 s IN preparedly me or A7 — – eugpetvrisaloAidleS<t1al 1 amr6a1edulalyy cae: /� O MINNE EXIST WALL Y� \ - SIGNATURE \\ ARCHITECT- TOM PETERSON REGISTRATION NUMBER: 10661 VINYL SHAKE SIDING x'02 \✓� O/ OPENING. INTEGRATE TO MATCH DATE: +6APallsma O� 2 EXISTING STUD WALL DRAWN BY: EXIST. Pr CHECKED BY. TWP WEATHER BARRIER. TAPE pRaEc 1'-8 1/2" FRIENDSHIP SEAM @ EXIST CHURCH 32/16 (1/2") OSB PRIOR LAKE, SHEATHING MINNESOTA Project Number 4428 2X6 WD STUDS @ &I_ —yamr i do i— dra dm.ie ftVM b1<for r eef eW—6-0- <ye>te< 16tl O.C.W/ d1<c A.d r �.:m «.. BATT INSUL. •' � •• ..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..-..•..•..•..•..•..•..•..•. Elecweic Gla euY ml •raadr rtaw d¢bul w �serjn Tm` h heir d de (Y] Ti"hr�-`aim.ea mu Iet<d idonetion. hi< do<mer euy ea b<ad ar<ePbd rirhor � Prior mxee. .2013 At nd-Rwwd VAPOR BARRIER No.I Date I Appr I Revision Notes 5/W GWB coo EXIST WALL ., No.I Date Isue NOW 11-15/811 Phzze CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet Title WALL SECTIONS 0 4 8 IN &PLAN DETAILS 3 SECTION DETAIL @ REMOVED WINDOW o 4 8 IN 1 PLAN DETAIL - MONITOR RECESS ora.+tlallo- A7 Scale: 1 1/2" = "III A7 Scale: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A7 KEY ENLARGED PLAN NOTES 1. WATER CLOSET 5 2. GRAB BARS 3. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL 0066 0 4 4. TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER ' 5. WATER COOLER- SEE MECH. R CT3 BULLNOSE _ 7 ____ __.______F 6. PLAM COUNTER W/ OVAL SINK-SEE X/AX FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS CT4 005 7. COUNTER MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER ACCENT r Z 8. WALL TILE-SEE 2/A8 FOR ELEVATION. 9 g 9. SURFACE MOUNTED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER , 1. 3 o Men 9. SURFACE MOUNTED PAPER TOWEL- DISPENSER STATION V V Omen 4 CAP WASTE R WATER SUPPLY FOR FUTURE COFFEE CT3 NINE EE N % [��O510. SINK FIELD 006 Architects- Irmrporated 1 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE SOUTHEAST 2 SUITE 100 10 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 5S. - CTI -------- R ±LL BASE P macX s;zt2�z�ooa2°° t I( paparedS�BC6Cation.aFiepgt Mme_ by me or 8 i I su�viaonaMfiatlam adult' _�--�.l Re9�ered AtcFwleci mdxfia Taws of the sFAs at 1 2 TILE ELEVATIONS I o 12 24 IN 2 4 FT ::: C�PLRURE ENLARGED PLAN - 006A A8 Scale: 1/4" = 11-0" qg Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0" ARCHIM� PE1ON RE(aF5rR11T10N NUMBQt 110Ei1 DATE ti APRUM3 DRAVM BY. 151 TOILET PARTITIONS a B` 54" MIN. OR WALLS rrea,ECTTTRE FRIENDSHIP ALL 12" 42" MIN. 36' MIN. 6- CHURCH SANITARY MAX EQUIP. ----------- ---- -------------- PRIOR LAKE, MUST BE ------ ---- MINNESOTA Z WITHIN - 24" MIN. 12" MIN, HATCHED 40° z Project Number 4429 AREA "ao 0 E--y—i.fttam' del.N S (� i.f.rea,i. mau®d dmvJe 6ki J eieevovic 6b vul^moi,edx,Vr 6m1 65 oN Z _ W ..n Maya.ems .a U)LU Q _ T r W Ti, duvmen mrymry—be—d.copied wiuboe U t - ai.r . MIZ T ' I— 0 M13 m tSf.--.d Q _ � W W _ No. Date Appr Revision Nobs Q c� 11'MIN ~ N c0 --- --- 12" MIN. 16"-18" 01 0" MAX. 17"-19" @ AMBULATORY ACCESSIBLE 6'-6"CLEAR 5'-0" CLEAR No.I Dab Issue Notes ELECTRIC WATER COOLER 71Phai. CONSTRUCTION 36" @ AMBULATORY DOCUMENTS SM.t in. ENLARGED PLAN& 0 1'-411 2'-8"_ _ 4 0 1'-411 2'-811 MOUNTING HEIGHTS 3 Scale: 3/8" = 1'-0" -- TOILET ROOM qg MOUNTING HEIGHTS A8 Scale: 3/8" = 1'-0" A8 D.S. WIDTH DOOR SCHEDULE WIDTH D.S. WIDTH, D.S. WIDTH x = C7 1A x F— F- F- T W xx N J w x 1A w X14 W 0 C6 Cio oos o07 0 STATION NINETEEN AmhA WOOD B WOOD C WOOD _ HM-01 �- hRSITY �a 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 MINNEAPOLIS, 1 DOOR ELEVATIONS 0 2 4 PHONE(61MINNESO)W&1TA 18W qg Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0" FAX 612 6230012 ANGLED STOP W/ ' P specification,or�.Pas 3/4" SILL SEALANTa;; d ifg state of - 2 HM FRAME ELEVATION 0 2 4 FT MINNE SIGNATURE A9 scale: = ARCHITECT: mo PETERSON *-3/4"X2" WOOD TRIM REGISTRATION NUMBER: 10se1 DATE: 1•APRIL2013 GI-OII DRAWN BY: Lf - - lJ 1 CHECKED BY: TWP PROJECTTIT E '– FRIENDSHIP CHURCH 4 WINDOW SECTION o 4 $ IN -1 PRIOR LAKE, d MINNESOTA A9 Scale: 1 1/2 It = 1'-011 Project Number 442E - E—Ory ea i m a d demadc 41-Soria°tin® Ate—6,c i.m DOOR SCHEDULE 4 A9 r &1i,° . ° DOOR# DOOR SIZE FRAME EL DOOR EL FIRE RATING HRDW FUNCTION REMARKSN `. : y 005 3'-0" X 6'-811 HM-1 EXIST NONE PRIVACY LEVER RELOCATE EXIST_ HRDWR.& DOOR- NEW HANDLE n 006A 3'-0" X 61-8" N HM-1 EXIST NONE PRIVACY LEVER RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR& DOOR- NEW HANDLE o� No. Date I Appr Revision Notes 007A 6'-011 X 6'-8" HM-1 B NONE PUSH PULL W/DB PROVIDE SIGN PER ICC SECT. 1008.1.8.3.2 WD-01 007B 6'-0" X 6'-811HM-1 B NONE PUSH PULL W/DB PROVIDE SIGN PER ICC SECT. 1008.1.8.3.2 007C 6'-0" X 6'-8" HM-1 B NONE CLASSROOM LEVER EA. 007D 3'-0" X 6'-8" HM-1 A NONE CLASSROOM LEVER EA. 4 0 2 4 FT 007E 3'-0" X 6'-8" HM-1 B NONE EXIST- RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR & DOOR- NEW HANDLE A9 ALT 007E 6'-0" X 6'-8" HM-1 B NONE PR PANIC KEYED ENTRY RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR & DOOR- NEW HANDLE No.I Date I Issue Notes '008A 3'-0" X 6'-8" HM-1 EXIST NONE CLASSROOM LEVER RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR & DOOR- NEW HANDLE Ph.. 008B 31-0" X 61-8" HM-1 EXIST NONE CLASSROOM LEVER RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR& DOOR- NEW HANDLE 3 Scale: 1/4" = 1'-011 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 100A 6'-0" X 6'-8" HM-1 EXIST NONE EXISTING RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR & DOOR A9 WDW FRAME ELEVATI N sh..t ra° 100B 6'-0" X 6'-8" HM-1 EXIST NONE EXIST RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR& DOOR DOOR A FRAME ELEVATIONS 200A 3'-0"X 6'-8" HM-1 EXIST EXIST 20 MIN CLASSROOM LEVER RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR &DOOR- NEW HANDLE 200E 31-0" X 6'-8" HM-1 EXIST EXIST 20 MIN CLASSROOM LEVER RELOCATE EXIST. HRDWR& DOOR-NEW HANDLE A� 2'-0" 3/4" i CLEAR SEALANT �J '-' COUNTER BD. EXIST COLUMN I 1 t " ------------- W/ROUND EDGES FIXED DRAWER FRONT 9 EXIST COLUMN PANEL WITH 3/4"X3/4"HDWD ii IIS----___--_R I I A10 EDGE AT DOOR FRONT -'it I 1 `-- T - PERIMETERS I i 11 11 Ie e I . WIRE PULL FE A ' 1 SINK--SEE MECH. TU A10 A10 I " z \ i \ i" \ � �" \ i" ; I o I Eld 5 EQ. @ 13'-5" (VERIFY IN FIELD) OMIT SHELVES& 2 2 STANDARDS A10 A10 4 MILLWORK ELEVATION o 2 4 FT BASE--SEE ROOM FINISH S TAT I O N SIM ---------------------------------------i A10 Scale: 1/4" = 1'-pll r SCHEDULE ----------------------------------- ----J BASE CABINET W/ SINK o 8 16 IN NINtETEEtN "All8 3 A10 A10 A10Scale: 3/4'r= 1 -O 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 MINNEAPOLISA10 FE / _� \ _� MINNESOTA 55414 PHONE(612)623.1800 1 MILLWORK PLAN - ALT. 0 2 4 FT _ _ _ N NOTE: CONTRACTOR FAX 612 623.0012 Scale: 1/4 = 1 -0' a� y y ai FE VERIFY WHICH CABS inearby certify that this plan, A10 6 7 HAVE LIGHTS W! spedication,orreponovas OWNER prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly A10 1 0 Cfl Regislered A chitect underthe laws ofthe state of: CO T z SHELF SUPPORTS AND MINNESOTA STANDARDS 1 1 FE /• /• /• /I �� � � F O SIGNATURE EXIST COLUMN ' I \ \ \ > 3/4"SHELVES(SEE ARCHITECT: TOM PETERSON �0'I /. CSI U w ELEV.FOR NUMBER) REGISTRATION NUMBER: 10581 1 1 W DATE: 18 APRIL2013 W FINISHED END ' ' In OMIT DOORS @ SIM. DRAWN BY: EJ 10 EQ 913'-5" (VERIFY IN FIELD) CHECKED BY: nyp ' FINISHED WALL 1 — , I O PROJECT TITLE 0 2 4 FT IRE PULLS FRIENDSHIP 5 V LLWORK ELEVATION CHURCH A10 le: 1/4" = 1' 0" SEE ELECT.LIGHT AS OCCURS- V-0" 2'-0" PRIOR LAKE, 0 2 4 FT 2'-0„ BACKSPLASH W—Ic`ale: PICAL UPPER CABINET F-1 8 16 IN MINNESOTA 2 ELEVATION 3 4 1'-0" Project Number 4428 N Errors may rm da rm mi::ion ofdectrwk A10 Bale: 1/4 = 1,:-0, PLAM. COUNTERTOP fik.SmdonNxteenA t s.Inc.i=n� respovs�uk fo ny ci' ,damages pevses 3/4" 2'-0" 1'-0" 3/4" vxf rmarivomal.im ai,noelmu nikofiC,c�:.z (O Elxvonic fiks may cwt xcwatelyreflxt the final designconditiovs.It is the responsihillty ofdre r to verify all kyou[s,dimensions .d.Mr r=nrelated information. This document may vot be used er copied widrout prwr consent. 3/4"X 3/4"STEEL TUBE EXIST COLUMN EXIST COLUMN ' ' NOTE: PROVIDE PULL 1 1 SUPPORTS W!DIAGONAL OUT SHELVES AS WELDED TO LEGS-PAINT TO No. Date Appr Revision Notes 1 1LD NOTED 1 1 F ELEVATIONS ON MATCH PLAM.COLOR 1 smrla REQUEST#1 I I I 1 ELEVATIONS LU ADJUSTABLE SHELVES ;3/8" STAINED 0 ; ; w REVEAL A10 � � w q w to ADJUSTABLE SHELF FE FE W/SUPPORTS AND 1 STANDARDS SHELF SUPPORTS AND STANDARDS I No. Date Issue Noies 1 <r (6"@ KITCHEN) Phase 5 EQ. @ 13'-5" VERIFY IN FIELD I VINYL BASE ALL SIDES--SEE CONSTRUCTION 13'-5" ( ) SCHEDULE BASE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE DOCUMENTS Sheet Ti11e 3 0 2 4 FT BASE CAB W/ DRAWER 0 8 16 IN ISLAND CABINET 0 8 16 IN MILLWORK MILLWORK ELEVATION 6 9 DETAILS A10 Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0" ,q1 p Scale: 3/4" = 1'-01, Alp Scale: 3 4 = 1 -0 D—ingNo CODE REVIEW SUMMARY PLUMBING REVIEW SUMMARY IBC 2006 IBC 2006 T 2902.1 CH.3 DESCRIPTION OF OCCUPANCY P. 23 GROUP A-3 CH.3 MINIMUM NUMBER OF PLUMBING FACILITIES P.521 A-3 BUILIDNG W/O LOBBY FRO PLUMBING= 1,311 OCC AS SHOWN IN PLANS CH.6 TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION 1,311 OCC. /2 = 656 MEN AND 656 WOMEN P. 85 TYPE 5A 5 MENS WATER CLOSETS REQUIRED =8 PROVIDED (5 W. CLOSETS AND 3 URINAL) T 601 FIRE RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS REQUIRED PROVIDED (656/150= 4.37) P. 87 STRUCTURAL FRAME (COLUMNS, GIRDERS, TRUSSES) 1 HR. 1 HR. 4 MENS LAVATORIES REQUIRED = 4 MENS LAVATORIES PROVIDED BEARING WALLS-EXTERIOR 1 HR. 1 HR. (656/200= 3.28) BEARING WALLS-INTERIOR 1 HR. 1 HR. 9 WOMENS WATER CLOSETS REQUIRED =9 WATER CLOSETS PROVIDED c V TAT I O N NON-BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS- EXTERIOR 1 HR. 1 HR. (656/75=8.75) NINETEEN NON-BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS- INTERIOR 0 HR. 0 HR. 4 WOMENS LAVATORIES REQUIRED = 5 WOMENS LAVATORIES PROVIDED Architects- Incorporated FLOOR CONSTRUCTION (INCLUDING SUPPORTING BEAMS AND JOISTS) 1 HR. 1 HR. (656/200= 3.28) 2001 UNIVERSITY ROOF CONSTRUCTION (INCLUDING SUPPORTING BEAMS AND JOISTS) 1 HR. 1 HR. AVE"SUITE 10 EAST DRINKING FOUNTAINS RATIO OF 1:1,000 OCC. MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55414 2 REQUIRED , 2 PROVIDED (WITH 1 ADA HEIGHT) PHONE(012)623.1800 FAX (612 623.0012 503 ALLOWABLE HEIGHT AND BUILDING AREAS 1 hearty Wdity thatthisplan, paredl'F y me or uoderdmy direct 76 A-3 -6,000 SF/1 STORY E- 9,500 SF/ 1 STORY- NON SEPARATED USES rep was 1 SERVICE SINK REQUIRED, 1 PROVIDED sup—is,on and that)am duly Registered Architect under the laws of the state ol: SEC.506 AREA MODIFICATIONS — SPRINKLING USED FOR AREA MINNESOTA SIGNATURE P. 79 ALLOWABLE AREA PER FLOOR (Aa) Aa—{At+[At*If]+rAt*IS11 = 20.12 ARCHITECT: TOM PETERSON At = TABULAR AREA PER STORY IN ACCORDANCE WTH T.503 REGISTRATION NUMBER: 10581 = 1 1,500 5 4„a . ” DATE: 18 APRIL 2013 Is = AREA INCREASE FACTOR DUE TO SPRINKLE PROTECTION IN ACCORDANCE W/S.506.3 o DRAWN BY: EJ MULTI-STORY= XX, ONE-STORY= XXX, NO SPRINKLER =X p �� £ If= AREA INCREASE FACTOR DUE TO FRONTAGE (S.506.2) = 0.75 ,�rayta�a00- t�,r3 gy CHECKED BY: TWP PROJECTTI LE _ [F/P-0.25]W/30 FRIENDSHIP e .F= BUILDING PERIMETER WHICH FRONTS ON A PUBLIC WAY OR OPEN SPACE (20' MIN) 760'0" $ '� amp,: CHURCH P = PERIMETER OF ENTIRE BUILDING 760'0" W= WIDTH OF A PUBLIC WAY OR OPEN SPACE (30' MAX) 30 � ria — PRIOR LAKE, " r ) MINNESOTA a? 7.C Project Number 4428 EXISTING AREAS (NO ADDITIONS PROPOSED) Enayoeerinnlan=missionerelectmnle BASEMENT - upon lbWorany claims.damages orexpenses 5,135 SF - nnngomnrlheunan honsda enf he Inrcmnuonc i.ed inelectmme files 1 Elecvonle filesma t t I fiecl lhefiwl ���, s - -= d igncor�ditwns Ilistherc,onsi'=eoflhe MAIN LEVEL R,r msedry alllaynulsdi_iom Mother 20,113 SF _ rellied rfnnnalinn 3034 ih'adecumenl may not be used oreopiedwithouI I �• pnerconsem. 1 -Vt UPPER LEVEL _-? ` \.. 33 Q2013 allrightsre cl _ 19,926 SF = z — No. Date Appr Revision Notes G J' L��_� -... .�._o._- wsu r- - ..J04D0- L 74�, 40 , w-ya 560.43'55-W Rq ". R+g6iiq t t< No. Date Issue Notes 9✓vJ Phase 0 200 400' CONSTRUCTION 1 SITE PLAN DOCUMENTS S ee Title A 11 1:100 CODE REVIEW raw'q No. A11 SIE EEN ENC;IIVEERING INC . 763-585-6742 763 -585-6757 fax Email: steen(I'Psteeneng.com 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, A4N 55429 rl � 11 11 ' REMOVE PORTION ; i REMOVE PORTION STATION OF EXISTING FIR �I j `-__ OF EXISTING FTR�/ NINETEEN _ \ Architects - Incorporated - - - - - - ---- -- - - - - - � �- - _ _ _ , 2001 UNIVERSITY 4 ; ; 1 i - - -- - --- - - - -1 1 AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 1 1 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55414 1 1 PHONE (612 623.1600 FA XX1223,0012 MenS 5Ti I nearby certify Bat dts wan. II 005 ; 2 RELOCATE DIFFUSER ; ; ' ' preparedn� d* Licensed Pmfessio of SEE M5 FOR NEW ; ' ; ; Maintenance/Storamn lam of the e �r � LOCATION MINNESOTA �09 I Its - ; ; ------ - SIGNATU 7T. 1 MA RK ARK R- B NGMAN 8 Is EXISTING FAN COIL echa ' ' REGISTRATION NUMBER 24713 UNIT ' ' T FC-3 TO DATE AMR. 18 2013 - REMAIN i O !fib ; ; DRAWN BY: SGT _ _ CHECKED BY: MRB , 1 i 1 i PROJECT TFRE I ' FRIENDSHIP l5 ; ; IIs I ; ; CHURCH EXISTING FAN COIL IV I UNIT FC- 1 TO PRIOR LAKE LS1 — _ REMAIN ; MINNESOTA 0 1 " � 1 I lev E Project Number SNA201301 - ' I XEleor; L_ __ __ _ _J 1 Enw OttNmtbe tria®GI000(ekcbOnic 010 ; fie, s1,� N�r� �� b- emo1 1 1 i 1 ,bb far Stor wuf ' d�°� 1 1 , IOfROap® C®ramcd m e;= 5Lt 1 1 i Ekctrodc fib may cot scanty rdka the f®1 i 003A ] f ' 11 f m� mma �- hemer� bayofne � ,u - -- ---- -------- - --- -- - - - - --- toverih hyourlv divas wdoAv alaed -- -- - -- --- - - - - --- ----- - -- ---- - UP --- / -- -- - ---------- -- - --- ---- - �„m --- - - - -- - - -- - ------ - - ------ pri aon,meel mry m x used a oopia .;t6aY Hallway � a Storage R R A Une • �01Da '�m S" No. Date Appr Revision Nolen i 002 _ 7 7 BUILDI G PE T RAN REVIEW MECHANICAL INSPECTOR PER DATE No. Date Issue Notes DEMOLITION PLAN 1 ❑ ACCEP D � AS SUBMITTED P PTED WITH CORRECTIONS AS NOTED CONSTRUCTION » » ❑ DOCUMENTS 1 /8 = 1 - 0 OT ACCEPTED-CORRECT & RESUBMIT Sheet These comments are for your' information. All work shall be done MECHANICAL in full compliance with all applicable building & zoning code . DEMOLITION PLAN requirements including items not specifically noted in this review. ° atigNo KEEP THIS PLAN SET ON SITE. AT ALL TIMES . 1 • • • :H c • :H ' t c • I f a • - 7 • � ! • I • • • • 7 " • • • • 7► I • 7 1 mom moorm • • III m V Xvilli • • 1 • 7 • • 7 i • • • • Architects IncoWrated • • ' I 71 • ( • a I 1 • • • � • 7 1 11 SOUTHEASTAVENUE • • • • • a 1 a' 1 • ' a • 1SUITE 10D • 1 a • ' 1 • I • WA L AN IIIIII& WINIIIIIIWAWA I Ilka • MINNESOTA 55414 PHONE (612)• • 1 • 1 7 • f M `� at ( 1 1 f " : 00 F*Y-fC5i121WJ&1)12 Cared ' • • • ' • 1 ' f • • ' 1 • 1 • • • • • ' • = 1 MINNES • • ' • i 1 N I 71 • l a • • « 11 • ' • f o f 1 1 • • ! • ' � a 1 1 � ' a • 1 N • I I I • 7 I f • 1 71 • TA 1 • i • • ' `+ all • I f 1 • 1 • ' 1 1 • • - 1 ra 7 ' • • ' f • f • �.� 71 7 • • ' ' f 7 la M7 f • • • • ♦ PFXMCTTME h1 " • • IF a VAI 1FRIENDSHIP • q I I Lei • ► • - ! f • f h hf - • 1 • • 7 • • a • 7 ! CHURCH • a • PRIOR LAKE MINNESOTA I • I 7 ' - • - • • • 7 ' / y - • 1 • • - f 1 M 7 • • - • ! 1 - • i 1 • 1 � • M fProject Number SNA2013016 oil • yl • 1 • ! 7 ' f • • - N 1 • ' " • 1 M ' • • • `\� • ! • - • 7► M • 1 ! • a • 1 :111 I tea ' • ! N `� - f • 7 r 7 • ! • 1 1 f ' . • ' • • Cm Phm 1 7 ' CONSTRUCTION • • � 71 DOCUMENTS Shm Too • 1 • • 7 ! MECHANICAL 1 1 • - DEMOLITION NOTES Vi SIEEN ENCiINEEIiNTG INC. 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax Email: steenCa steeneng.com 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, N N 55429 NW M . �11 007B 12 SF i L_a�� �� � I II IL II IL II7 STAT I O N — [ F=/' NE Mech NINETEEN 008A Architects - Incorporated 3 2001\ IVERSITY AVENUE SOUTHEAST _ / \\ / \ / \\ SUITE 100 A 1 6 0 0 0 MINNEAMUS, s EXISTING \ ^// ` ^ � \ jMINNESOTA 55414 FD \ ( ( ( PHONE 612 623.1600 q> 0 ID to We9V*by;a=w 0 FAX n 5n 4 i� / \ / \� / \� au '�1051310 Of supervision and that I am a ddy Licensed Professions Eeaf uMef1M Maintenance/Storage MINNESOTA P� I Presentation o09 S�NA� o..� 0 Lower Lobby �t� 6iR: e u SS bl ® REGISTRATION NFJMBl3t 21713 Mechanical I� � , ►� 7� APRR ,8. 20i3 004 \'X/'/ \'�//'� \'\ /�'i DRAWN CHECKED SGT RB EXISTING WASTE PIPING FIELD VERIFY EXACT I l� ° L D 1) tO 0 °) PROJECT TITLE LOCATION AND SIZE / \� / \� j \� FRIENDSHIP < � < � < CHURCH ^ PRIOR LAKE StOr MINNESOTA 003E STOR Project Number SNA201301 El or lev E . �, m�. e �ee,�i.imofdwbooe SIn. Sham Nialea AR6iesYs• loe. 6 ooe '.. 010 6fa Stor 008C �� ofine�omom�d�aeoh6s p� iofam.tim ombioed ie dxamic fika. FJemode 5ks my ootaamttyee0ea me 6s1 ( � da PID: iom. ft Po¢ ,npwbiiity Thee 0M 1 p mwi b tayma, &mm.ios aed omcceLea 13 UP sam�noo nt, aon,� �y m1 ee..w o<mpea.;a,od � Q Hallway St. • 301 Da righe rtsmd No. Date Appt Revision Noses Storage 012 o—i Une 002 �I AR1i I PLUMBING No. Data - issue Notes NEW CONSTRUCTION PLAN CONSTRUCTION 1 DOCUMENTS 1 /8 PLUMBING NEW CONSTRUCTION PLAN M3 GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES OSPECIFIC PLUMBING NOTES SIEEN A. ICONTRACTORS SHALL FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THE MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING 1 . INSTALL WATER CLOSET PROVIDED BY OWNER AT EXISTING ENC�IIdSEI2INCi INC . DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. NEITHER THE DRAWINGS NOR THE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL WATER CLOSET LOCATION . CONNECT TO EXISTING 3" WASTE, 2" 763 -5855-6757 fax BE COMPLETE WITHOUT THE OTHER. VENT AND V COLD WATER. Email: Steen@steeneng.com Be DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND ARE INTENDED TO SHOW APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS Douglas Drive North 2. INSTALL WATER CLOSET PROVIDED BY OWNER AT THIS Crys crystal, lvllr 55429 ONLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL AND LOCATION. TIE INTO EXISTING WASTE, VENT AND COLD WATER ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ROUGH- INS. 3" WASTE, 2" VENT AND Xt* COLD WATER. Co PLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES SHALL NOT INTERFERE WITH LOCATION NOR 3. INSTALL LAVATORY PROVIDED BY OWNER AT THIS LOCATION . CLEARANCES OF OTHER TRADE'S MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT. EXTEND 1Y4" WASTE PIPING FROM EXISTING WASTE PIPING AS D. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PIPE OFFSETS AND TRANS111ONS AS REQUIRED TO SHOWN IF POSSIBLE. FIELD VERIFY. CONNECT Y HOT AND ACCOMMODATE STRUCTURE AND ARCHITECTURE. COLD WATER, 1Y4" WASTE AND VENT TO LAVATORY FIELD VERIFY STATION EXACT ROUTING. E. COORDINATE LOCATION AND ELEVATION OF ALL EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATIONS WITH 4. INSTALL LAVATORY PROVIDED BY OWNER AT EXISTING NINETEEN ARCHITECT. LAVATORY LOCATION . CONNECT TO EXISTING lY4"WAS1E, Architects - Incorporated 2001 F. ALL BRANCH TAKE— OFFS SHALL HAVE ISOLATION SHUT— OFF VALVES. 1Y4"VENT, VHOT WATER AND VCOLD WATER. AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 MINNG. EXISTING PLUMBING PIPING SHOWN ON THESE PLANS ARE BASED ON LIMITED FIELD 5. CONNECT 1Y WASTE, 1Y4 VENT, )f HOT WATER AND 7¢" COLD MINNESOT�A3u55414 OBSERVATIONS AND ORIGINAL PLUMBING PLANS, CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY AND X— RAY WATER TO NEW FIXTURE P-4. FIELD VERIFY EXACT ROUTING PHONE (612) 623.1800 FLOORS AND WALLS AS REQUIRED TO DETERMINE EXACT LOCATION OF PIPING. OF PIPING. FAX 1 1 hearby certify Ctat Cis plam specification, or roped vvas ed H. PROVIDE CLEANOUT ON SANITARY & STORM PIPING AT ALL NEW CONNECTION POINTS TO 6. CONNECT 1V WASTE, 1Y4" VENT AND Xi COLD WATER TO NEW prepared bymnd Owte or I a tadaW di* Liter Profess«�CEngi�s ur&r me EXISTING PIPING TO FACILITATE REQUIRED TESTING OF NEW INSTALLATION & CLEANING. FIXTURE P- 7. Iaers of the state of MINNESOTA I . ALL EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN IS SHOWN IN LIGHT COLOR. ALL NEW SIGNA ae.Zsss . PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SHOWN IN A DARK COLOR. Ft ENGCdEE MARK R B GMMI J. SAW CUT OR CORE DRILL OPENINGS THRU FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW OR REGtSMTM ND,S®EFL 24713 RELOCATED PIPING CONNECTIONS AND ROUTING. GENERAL FIRE SPRINKLER NOTES DATE APRIL 18F 2013 DRAWN W. SGT K. ALL WORK THAT REQUIRES INTERRUPTION OF THE DOMESTIC SYSTEMS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. A. MODIFY EgS11NG FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM TO INCLUDE FIRE PROTECTION IN NEWLY CHECKED BY: Mn CREATED ROOMS DUE TO REMODELING. EXTEND PIPING AS REQUIRED AND PROVIDE PROJECT WLE L CONTRACTOR. SHALL INSTALL AS MUCH OF THE NEW SYSTEM AS POSSIBLE, PRIOR TO HEADS IN ROOMS 0079, OOSA AND 008C. FRIENDSHIP REMOVING EXISTING SYSTEMS IN ORDER MINIMIZE THE AMOUNT OF DOWN TIME REFER TO CHURCH SPECIFICATION SECTION 15020. Be SUBMIT PRELIMINARY PIPE ROUTING PLAN TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. CONTRACTOR TO RECEIVE APPROVAL OF PIPE ROUTING FROM ARCHITECT PRIOR LAKE Me CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS DURING REQUIRED WORK INDICATED PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF PIPE. MINNESOTA BY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR INNEW l OWNER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY EXISTING OR POTENTIAL DEFICIENCIES THAT MAY REQUIRE Co REMOVE MANUFACTURERS LABELS, UNION LABELS AND RESIDE GLUE FROM PIPING IN Project Number CORRECTION. EXPOSED AREAS. Era' m" °"� " '� m� - isw °i` filr,. saL� rr=y choeteen Ar damagpr o is pe raaoeate r a°y rt,� � "� 'do, c+! of ex wrnnoriad rs die D. VERIFY NEED TO PROVIDE FIRE SPRINKLER PROTECTION IN WOOD CONSTRUCTION �° � CEILING SPACE WITH LOCAL INSPECTOR. Ek� stiow. d %T6ry &U lsyo . h iroensio snedok dined to reify all Iryow, dmemioea ad a6nrrlated TNcoo prird� memmy °ax � amaid . �, aria comer_ mugl rig6h served No. Date Appr Revision Notes Mosses Mosses women No. I Date I Issue was Phase CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS sneer rroe PLUMBING NEW CONSTRUCTION NOTES MIN Drm*q No. M4nomwoommon EEN ENGINEERING INC . S, 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax 16x12 Email: steenCa steeneng.com 5430 Douglas Drive North BARAMETRIC � Crystal, MIv 55429 NW M . RELIEF DAMPER M7 3 - 6 W x 4 - 3 H x 1 ( ' ' " ' " '- 0"D 3 j 007B EXISTING FTR EXISTING FTR 9 2 INSULATED O. A. PLENUM II , I sr 8 20x12 TO REMAIN TO REMAIN v : - - t . j I — , i I , , I 1 H . � 1 =Piz 0� On - - Jill It =_4 _ — >tu _ _ � M 36x15 0 �- E- 3D/, 2 s STATION 4 E 2 /12 I 2 1880 I -4 � 1 10 I NINETEEN 12 " —►O "A. F. F. 13 C� 8/10 0 Architects - Incorporated 1 1 11 QFC- 4 s s TR - - - ; , r; = i 2001 UNIVERSITY ® ° Q I AVENUE SOUT HE ASTt C— j8 10 r— SUITE 100 rF r < ` < ` < 150, I 1 I 1 1 MINNEAPOLIS,6O ^v� ^v ^v� I r- MINNESOTA 55414_ � 18X12(! ` < 1 PHONE (612) 623,1800 Q. 1 L I — FAX (6121623.0012 ,� �� � t 1 M — IC 12/10 ° `- - - p 1 it I 1 ' I 1 ' I 1 ' , FC- 5s ° I specification, report t this es Men e n � �� '�� '�� '��' prepared by me or under my direct t men - - � 1 12 0 ^ ^ — r— r= a r= r= a i supervision visionandthatIamaduly r= I -+-► , I I , I I E- 12/30 ! Licensed wises and tatI a Engineer undeduly he 005 5 ( OF 4 ' '> ` ' '>`` ' '> ` I I 1 I , I frovs of the state of. os , v> 1 I 1 �y �� � � � � 1280 p r " Maintenance/Storage MINNESOTA # �>�, / , 7\ >�/ / , c ` \></ / , I 1 ' 1 f= = 1= 'mod 'mod 'mod I�.d 12 A. F. F. SIGNAN p.uL �y ' I Presentation ENGINEER: MARKR. B NGMAN ;. 4 � I 0040 U) REGISTRATION NUMBER: 24713 I ' ; Lower Lobby i r L y , YqutwAsSrC- r llbly 008g 1V4" EXIS NG FAN COIL I 1 1 - 1 — / ^ / .007 / / � � / / � � I �� r1 —L` I —L`a 08 1d C`� /'' DATE: APRIL 18, 2013 ' Mechanical ' f' r= ' ' r- / UNI TO REMAIN "1 . ��� < ���� < ��� < I I I , �� ' 11 OruwN BY: scT 004 1 1 i \ </ , I 1 I , �� I I , I 1 I 1 I CHECKED BY: MRB ' I - I it I II d ° 1 rl rI rl I PROJECT TITLE 1 , 1 , 1 1 1 FRIENDSHIP �� �� it 1 I i1 i � 1 i i1 i i1 i CHURCH �� — L— L�� L � Lid ^,: `\�' ^,: 11 I , ' I I 11 1 11 1 1 ' , I1 , - — \ y ( / , r\ i<y , c\ /><y / , r— it 0 � � � � PRIOR LAKE SIC`) r EXISTING FAN 1rC91L 11 1150 , 1 1 1 11 1 11 1 11 1 1 , 1 -- MINNESOTA t UNIT TO REMAIN �� �� �� �� �y �� Project Number SNA201301 'o3E° STOR lev E y Errors tnyaNrit netrclrtec� Im. isninn of ,n< eh. Sd6on HimteennrcniR-nage ten« 008C Ele for nspotu out ftheur Clatms, dvnago the 2 010 rig om of one contained in rrzctr u i of files. iN'wtvtiat canhinCd in electronic file. StO r Ekclmmc files troy not accurately reflect the Fnal �i � �it design conditions It is the responsibility ofthe user tllmnIRnllr n.II to verify layouts, dim nsions and other related 003A 11 _� 11 _� IL_� IL_� II _� IL_-y 11 _� II _-p IL_ { IL--p Thisdarion ° ° This docvrn<ntrvy nor be used or capi.� nithout prim consent. UP 1 " v 2e13allrightsreserved Hallway St No. Date Appr Revision Notes Storage --____- - R R Une 1 . 5-22-13 Addendum No. I S S 011 1. 6-27-13 Request No. 1 002 1 , AIR HOCKEY 1 1 ' I I ' MECHANICAL No. Date Issue Notes Phase CONSTRUCTION NEW CONSTRUCTION PLAN DOCUMENTS 1 Sheet Title 1 / » » MECHANICAL NEW 8 = 1j - 0 CONSTRUCTION PLAN Craving No. M5 GENERAL HVAC NOTES OSPECIFIC MECHANICAL NOTES SIEEN ENGINEERING INC . A . DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND ARE INTENDED TO SHOW APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS ONLY, 1 . 16 " x16 " RELIEF GRILLE ON UNDERSIDE OF SOFFIT, INSTALL A 763-585-6742 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MINIMUM OF 10 ' FROM OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE LOUVER , FIELD 763111,585-6757fax ELECTRICAL AND SPECIFICATIONS , PLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES SHALL NOT COORDINATE , PROVIDE ACCESS PANEL IN SOFFIT AS REQUIRED Emali . 8tcen@ems&ng.com INTERFERE WITH LOCATIONS OR CLEARANCES OF OTHER TRADE ' S MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT, FOR MOTORIZED DAMPER . 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, NIN 55429 B . SYSTEMS , MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION SHALL MEET STATE AND LOCAL CODES , 2 . OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE LOUVER SIZE TO MATCH EXISTING WINDOW SIZE . LOUVER TO BE PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL, INSTALLED BY C . CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PIPE AND DUCT OFFSETS AND TRANSITIONS AS REQUIRED TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR , COORDINATE WITH GENERAL ACCOMMODATE STRUCTURE AND ARCHITECTURE . CONTRACTOR . D . RETURN GRILLES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH LINED BOOT AND ELBOW FITTINGS , 3 . 12 " x12 " OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE LOUVER TO BE PROVIDED BY " MECHANICAL, INSTALLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR . STATION E . FLOOR MOUNTED HVAC EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A 4 HIGH CONCRETE PAD , COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR . I EXTEND A MINIMUM 2" BEYOND EDGE OF EQUIPMENT, PADS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY GENERAL NINETEEN CONTRACTOR , COORDINATE EXACT DIMENSIONS AND LOCATIONS WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER 4. RELOCATE EXISTING DIFFUSER TO THIS LOCATION . BALANCE AND ARCHITECT, SUPPLY CFM TO 1204 Architects - Incorporated 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE SOUTHEAST F. DUCT SIZES SHOWN ARE FREE AREA , INCREASE DUCT SIZE AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE 5 . EXISTING EXHAUST FAN TO REMAIN , SUITE100 INTERNAL INSULATION . MINNEAPOLIS, 6 . EXISTING SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER TO REMAIN . MINNESOTA 55414 G . PLASTIC PIPING SHALL NOT PENETRATE FIRE RATED WALLS PER CODE , COORDINATE WITH PHONE (612) 623. 1800 FAX 612 623,0012 ARCHITECT AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR LOCATION AND TYPE OF WALL PRIOR TO 7 . EXISTING FTR TO BE FED FROM NEW PIPING , RETURN PIPING Ihearby °ertify that this aan, ed cafior INSTALLING PIPING. TO BE RUN UNDER COVER , PROVIDE NEW CONTROL VALVE AS preparedbymeo under myrired REQUIRED . FIELD VERIFY, U°ensea supervision onalhEngiat I aneerunder the H . PROVIDE 3/4' CONDENSATE RUNOUT FROM EACH FAN COIL UNIT, PITCH PIPING X15" PER FOOT, lam of the state of: 8 . 30 " x12 " x12 " RELIEF AIR PLENUM . MINNESOTASIGNATU ae� I . COORDINATE SPACE SENSOR /THERMOSTATLOCATION WITH OTHER TRADE ' S AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH — IN AND INSTALLATION , 9 . EXTERNALLY INSULATE DUCTWORK AND PLENUM WITH A MINIMUM ENGINEER: MARKR. B NGMAN OF 2 " FOIL FACED RIGID FIBERGLASS BOARD , REGISTRATION NUMBER: 24713 J . TAKE — OFFS TO ALL SUPPLY DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES SHALL HAVE MANUAL BALANCING DATE: APRIL 18, 2013 DAMPERS . 10 . PROVIDE CONDENSATE PUMP EQUAL TO LITTLE GIANT 80GPH DRAWN BY: SGT AND ASSOCIATED PIPING TO PUMP CONDENSATE FROM FC- 5 TO K . DUCT RUNOUTS ARE EQUAL TO GRILLE AND DIFFUSER NECK SIZES SHOWN UNLESS INDICATED OUTDOOR LANDSCAPE AREA , FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION CHECKED BY: MRB OTHERWISE , AND COORDINATE WITH OWNER , PRDdECTTITLE FRIENDSHIP L. PROVIDE ISOLATION VALVES AT EACH TAKE- OFF TO EQUIPMENT AND AT BRANCH LINE FROM 11 . PROVIDE CONDENSATE PUMP EQUAL TO LITTLE GIANT 80GPH CHURCH PIPE MAIN , AND ASSOCIATED PIPING TO PUMP CONDENSATE FROM FC- 4 TO FLOOR DRAIN IN MECH ROOM 004. FIELD VERIFY EXACT PRIOR LAKE MECHANICAL ALTERNATE ROUTING , MINNESOTA 12 . INSTALL DIFFUSER AT AN ANGLE SUCH THAT THE AIR DOES Project Number SNA201301 NOT BLOW DIRECTLY INTO THE BEAM , FIELD VERIFY, pnvs may occur In the tnnmdskn ofduUmdc files. Station N elan Architects, Inc. is not A . MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE PRICING AS AN ALTERNATE TO PROVIDE 2 FURNACES rag8 kr anyc'u1Mdceof0e g out oCNe unauthaird um damages or e WITH MODULATING GAS HEATING AND DX COOLING. THIS WILL BE IN LIEU OF FAN COIL UNITS 13 . EXISTING RELOCATED TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONTROLLING2 timcontained in electronic files FC - 4 AND FC- 5 . ALTERNATE PRICE SHALL INCLUDE A 5 TON CONDENSING UNIT AND A 3 EXISTING FINNED TUBE RADIATION . Naw°'° files p1Y not accurately reflect the user � designcoM layou It is n io san tithe related TON CONDENSING UNIT INCLUDING INSTALLATION AND INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT AND I° c`"Cyallayou4dmnsi°°' other related tr� This document my not be used or copied widwut LIQUID SUCTION LINES . FURNACES SHALL BE SIMILAR TO CARRIER MODELS 59MN7AO4512 14. 20x4 TRANSFER OPENING WITH 2 GRILLES ABOVE DOOR . pdQemr",n AND 59MN7AO9020. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCH . 2 ♦ pllall rights resrved No. Dale Appr Revision Notes B . MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE PRICING AS AN ALTERNATE TO PROVIDE A DUCT HOT 1 !! ( w +. � zz-,3 AddendumNo. t WATER HEATING COIL FOR THE OUTSIDE AIR DUCT SERVING THE 5 TON FURNACE , PRICING TG gb " (Ne� fZoM 'FG z. szy-,3 RequeslNo. t SHALL INCLUDE ALL PIPING, FITTINGS, VALVES, DUCTWORK , DUCTWORK FITTINGS REQUIRED , HEATING COIL SHALL BE BASED ON 600 CFM WITH FACE VELOCITY OF 600 FPM OR LESS AND PRODUCING A MINIMUM OF 46 , 000 BTUH OF HEAT. OUTSIDE AIR LOUVERS SERVINGS BOTH FURNACES SHALL ALSO BE PART OF ALTERNATE BID , No. Date Issue Notes Phase CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet Title MECHANICAL NEW CONSTRUCTION NOTES Dressing No. M6 SIEEN 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax Email: steen@steenengxom 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, MIV 55429 echL NINETEEN a — Architects - Incorporated t 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE SOUTHEAST K41 4401 SUITE 100 11�2 MINNESOTA 554�14 PHONE 612 623.1800 FAX 2I hea c"* Oat of pn,a ''. OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE. rty apedfirahoq or repatx�s Prepared by me ar my diced supervision and that I am a dy E' Licensed oessionai = under the Of ft MINNESOTA SMNATU i ENB@aEER MARX R. S NGMAN MINIM REGISTRATION NUMBER 24713 LINED SHEETMETAL BAFFLE. DATE: APRIL 13, 2013 MINIMUM HEIGHT = 6" ABOVE rt DRAWN BY: SGT TOP OF RETURN AIR GRILLE. : MECHANICAL ROOM 004 PLAN PROJECT BY. MRa LINED RETURN AIR PLENUM. 1 1 /4" = 1 ' - 0 " FRIENDSHIP11 SIZED AS INDICATED. CHURCH 1 % SUPPLY dt RETURN PIPING PRIOR LAKE MINNESOTA Project Number SNA2omi 14x20 �& Sbdm inm Ar °®°' d' ` Sin %Sm Nmeern Archiee4 tee. Ltnr RETURN GRILLE LINED RETURN k ,a� a iim wodmed i. d �5lan MOUNTED Ir A.F.F. AIR PLENUM Bacbmic film my ea scaly rshamefnd LOUVER TO MATCH EXISTING 15x36 FLEX. " Ir . WINDOW BY GEN. CONTR. CONN. °D � m.yaa, t. m, « -•� . 2013dId8N+ramed RETURN AIR No. Date Appr Revision Notes GRILLE I ` M ►r) rx FCrS 3'-6"W x 4'-3"H x 1 '-0"D •- E`t'' ` = INSULATED O.A. PLENUM FLOOR FLEXIBLE CONNECTION (TYP). FILTER SECTION. No. Date Issue Notes \�MIXING Phm BOX CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS & SEC PLAN ECTOM IONS Shed TMe RETURN DETAIL SECTION ROOM 008A MECHANICAL O 3 � Drm*V No. NO SCALE 1 /4" = 1 ' - 0 " IV17 SIEEN 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax Email: Steen@steeneng.com 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, 1vIN 55429 TO FAN ROOM STATION NINETEEN 4* TO 1ST FLOOR Architects - Incorporated 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 CHANGEOVER VALVES MINNESOTA PHONE (612 623.1800 IMI21 I hearby certify N�aet eft plan, prepared try of(under 43dtrrdeyct Y Uce�upa"rsiPmfeess&;on l and �Enig'a�uder Ne T Iaws of the state aE MINNESOTA 1 Lti" 11'i" SIGM u a„c ENGWEER: MARK R. B NGMAN CHANGEOVER VALVES DAWI 'RATKNJ fdUL®ESL , 20 3 TO FAN COIL UNITS D"� APRIL 38, 2013 FC-4, FC-5 AND DRAWN BY: SGT 3 BSMT. FTR. ctEav D BY: MRB PROJE� x CT TITLE EXTERIOR WALL FRIENDSHIP CHURCH 2W Zia` PRIOR LAKE MINNESOTA Project Number SNA201301 . � T � Faas may oa+rmr6e baormzsion ddera®e reWom tdw. ble ft my c NArrheab, m we h l.mtt�,«., a � aaauq aat of Poe mu6uimd me date - id m.riao eaonioN iaelectrmie 8ka ,(`� Deceooic 5ks mry mt aea�ately eeazt arc final u } �^' deiye wodkiom. u6an rmpom�bitirydAem ,Z .= brenya0 layatn f, di®eion mdod mbkd Thisd m rommr prkr tmym4med « espied rvirhaf Ri« wmmt • 2013a11 ri8baromad No. Date APPr Revision Notes 4" P1 n n FLOOR 4a TO CHILLERS AND ICE TANKS No, Date Issue Notes Phaea CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet TtUe MECHANICAL 2 PIPE CHANGE OVER PIPING SCHEMATIC 1 DETAILS j NO SCALE �"` ° "� . M8 SIEEN ENGLINS�RSNGt: INC. 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax 3—WAY DIVERTING CONTROL VALVE Email: steen@steeneng.com Ts < 80• F CLG B OPEN 55430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, NM 55429 Ts > 100' F => HTG A OPEN DUAL TEMP. AUTO CHANGE OVER PIPING MAINS R Q SOF SHUTOFF VAL BALANCING VALVE (TYP) S TAT I O N (TYP)) TEST PLUG (TYP) ET E E N UNION (TYP) Architects - Incorporated \ \ PRESSURE EN E IVERSITY SOUTHER AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 FLOW MEASURING A GAUGE(TYP) BALANCING MINNEAPOUS, DEVICE VAL�.m') CHECK MINNESOTA 55414 B VALVE(TYP) PHONE (61FAX (61212 623.7 HEATING WATER SHUTOFF I hearby cerMy But Ws pfarf, COILVALVE(TYP) spedf m'10 . arnedpeprrt REDUCING VALVE TYP °s pewiislloon and Bmt l am e d* Y4 Licensed Professiatal Engineer u dw ft lEE(TYP) THERMOMETER MINNESOTA A THERMOMETER (TYP) 71. 7 DRAIN VALVE SIGNATU °"� ENGINEER: MARK R. B NGMAN - PRIMARY REGISTRATION NUMBER: 24713 3—WAY CONTROL VALVET STRAINER TYP� PUMP DATE: APRIL 18, 2D13 (TYP)) rCHILLED ( ) DRAWN BY: SGT WATER UNION(TYP) CHECKED BY:DRAIN VALVE (EACH COIL) PROJECT TITLE EXTEND OUTSIDE FAN I COIL IN—UNE CIRCULATING UNIT HOUSING / PUMP AS SCHEDULED. F CIHURCHIP NOTE : DRAIN VALVE PROVIDE SPRING ISOLATORS WHEN MOUNTING PIPING PRIOR LAKE AND PUMPS TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. MINNESOTA 1 COILS AND PIPING SHALL BE ARRANGED TO BE FULLY DRAINABLE. Project NUmtler SNA201301 2 VERTICAL PIPING SHALL BE OFFSET SUCH THAT COILS CAN BE REMOVED WITHOUT INTERFERENCE 6iaimmryay . mdr �f. e. efek�k flies Sratloo Nmefeen M<hBecq ise. keor +npom,bk for any c>®. dmge arymse IN — LINE aawwf6K �d � �� � eo eek FAN COIL UNIT DETAIL PARALLEL . PUMP DETAIL , � � � . ytlx � 1 2 =I� L kdn re°oos@8 ryef ds ov �Q mys bemul < o*ed � NO SCALE NO SCALE • mD,n , , No. Dale Appr Revision Notes No, Date Issue Notes Phase CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet Title MECHANICAL DETAILS Drerfng No. M9 VV _ r PUMP SCHEDULE N#FIEEN ENGINEERING INC MOTOR DATA PANEL NOTES 763-585-6742 v' UNIT MANUFACTURER HEAD dT 'I / E, L 763 il: ste nC fax / WIRE Email: steenQa steeneng.com LOCATION SERVICE GPM o HP RPM V PH CONDUIT BREAKER MECH ELEC 5430 Douglas Drive North - NO * & MODEL NO . (FT. WC ) ( F) / CIRCUIT SIZE Crystal, MIQ 55429 - P- 1 BELL & GOSSETT MECH . RM. BSMT 25. 0 40. 0 20 1 .5 1750 208/1 - - 3 20/2 1 ,2, 1 IN SERIES 60 004 ZONE WIRE, . , MECHANICAL NOTES ELECTRICAL NOTES sr 1 . 30% PROPYLENE GLYCOL. 1 . RECONNECT TO EXISTING 20/2 CIRCUIT. ' r 2. GPM BASED ON 100% FLOW. 3. GPM BASED ON 20'F DELTA T. STATION FAN COIL UNIT SCHEDULE NINETEEN Architects -, Incorporated 2001 UNIVERSITY FAN DATA HEATING COIL DATA AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 UNIT MANUFACTURER AREA O .A. ESP TSP PD APD GLYCOL EWT LWT EAT LA'j' MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55414 DESCRIPT. SERVED CFM CFM ( IN. WC ) (IN 1PC ) GPM ROWS (FT) ( IN. 1PC ) MBH (% ) ("F) ("F ) ("F) ("F) PHONE (612) 623.1800 N0 . & MODEL N0 . F , 2 23.0612 I hearby certify that this plan, specification, or mport Was MAGIC AIRS prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly FC- 4 BVE- 12 _ RM 007 1000 200 0. 5 1 . 02 2. 5 4 1 . 9 - 39. 5 30 180 160 55. 0 90. 5 Licensed Professional of the Engineer n inete runderthe MAGIC AIRE _ MINNESOTA FC-5 BMB- 20 _ RM 008 1880 690 2 1 . 0 1 . 6 2. 6 6 0. 6 1 - 129. 8 30 180 160 40. 0 100. 2 Q SIGNATU ENGINEER: MARK R. B NGMAN REGISTRATION NUMBER: 24713 DATE: APRIL 18, M3 FAN COIL UNIT SCHEDULE ( CONTINUED ) DRAWN BY: SGT CHECKED BY: MRB COOLING COIL DATA MOTOR DATA PANEL NOTES PROJECT TITLE FRIENDSHIP PD GPM ROWS (FT) ( IN . MBH GLYCOL(% ) (�� ("� ((�) (F) HP AMPS EVA RPM V/PH T LATPANE T CONDUIT IRE BREAKER MECH ELEC CHURCH k PRIOR LAKE 2. 5 4 0. 9 - 19.5 30 44. 0 59. 6 78. 0 63. 7 0. 5 8. 8 - - 120/1 PANEL 7 1 /2» #12 15/1 - 1 M 4 17 Project Numm berber SNA201301 FFors may occur in the transmission of electronic 10.5 6 5. 4 - sort 62. 4 30 44 56. 4 81 . 9 67. 0 1 . 5 - - - 208/1 PANEL 7 1 /2" #12 20/2 - 1 files. Station ranc0.en ns,Arcdarn Inc. extin responsible for any ehvns, damages or expatces 16, 18 gout of the inand edroeoft,� NINE information contained in electronic files. Electronic Files may art acavmtely retkct the final ELECTRICAL NOTES MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL design conditionslayouts, istensio ; and ilicriclaeus to .cary all layouts, dimensions and other reland infor EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES "'`_ �� °' °'ay nor b w" ° copied " �°°` �;� corxnt 1 . PROVIDE NEW BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL. v 2e13alIrihtireserved A. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL EQUIPMENT No. Date Appr Revision Notes SCHEDULED. 1 , 5-22-13 Addendum No. 1 2. 6-27-13 Request No. 1 Be THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE POWER WIRING AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION TO EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT SCHEDULED. Co THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS, D. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL CONTROL DEVICES AS No. I Date Issue Noses WELL AS ALL 120/208/240 VOLT POWER REQUIREMENTS AND LOW Phase VOLTAGE WIRING NECESSARY TO INSTALL AND MAKE FULLY OPERATIONAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFIED CONTROL SYSTEMS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. DOCUMENTS Sheet This E. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL SINGLE PHASE LINE MECHANICAL SCHEDULES VOLTAGE CONTROL DEVICES, SUCH AS 120/208/240 VOLT THERMOSTATS, Drawing No. SWITCHES, INCLUDING ALL ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND FINAL M 10 CONNECTIONS. SIEEN EN(}INEERIN(� INC . 763 -585-6742 763 -585-6757 fax Email: steenCa steeneng. com 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, AtrN 55429 Nil 2 � a � � b b � p �� � a �� STATION NINETEEN Architects - Incorporated 2001 UNIVERSITY Q AVENUE SOUTHEAST b 1 't SUITE 100 J MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55414 L(s]) PHONE (612 623.1800 Mens I hsa" cerbfy that tNs plane 00 5 - Mract 44 48 - specification, or under rt rjf d Maintenance/Stora a prepared by me orria I = a dy supl Prof and that I lr a AOM Licensed Professional Enprof. the '►C7 t I I 1 of the o(: 009 MI NES A o » 2 I I SIGNATURE 3Q/2 3 al I I ENGINEER STEVEN M. GS Mechanical I I REGISTRATION NUMBER G544 ' 004 P G C C C {� C is �' C DATE APRIL 18. 2f113 ----- L— DRAWN BY: SMY PANEL 7 CHECKED BY: SMY TELEPHONE PROJECT TRI.E BACKBOARD . I I I I I aglf FRIENDSHIP L � CHURCH I " » PRIOR LAKE 0 1 003 I -j 48 I 148 IeV E MINNESOTA � II II ( n; II Li UW 60M Ele Or 010 ErzProjectNumt�er SNA1 I I a (/ 1 m my aaam theh.mmiowoisd c files Station Nioda Archirecq lnc. 0 "eal too pomrble for any chin cl wllm a cxmsea p Stor raarising out of the unauthwaed = of do inf can c iotd in el tonic file. a 003 C I C Ekmoo fika ®y roi as na ey , me ml --- design cooditiom. 11 u the respombtiry of ibe m UP ��� �� �+ inf���ow,. mrnen,i� aoa od� n�d f 60" @ Lu, J t t(J t Hallway ® Jt. prio � �y ea be wed o mpg . mw �J prior Storm@ 012 Une . 3017a dpph med 0 t 011 ' ----- - No. Date Appr Revision Notes 002 No. Date Issue Notes ELECTRICAL Phaw CONSTRUCTION DEMOLITION PLAN DOCUMENTS 1 Shoal Tr�e ELECTRICAL 1 /8 » = 1 ' - O " DEMOLITION PLAN Drawing No. REFER TO SHEET E2 FOR NOTES. E 1 SIEEN �xc�nv� No INC. 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax Email: steen@steeneng.com 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, NIN 55429 ELE CTRICAL SYMBOL SCHEDULE GENERAL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES A. ELECTRICAL ITEMS SHOWN LIGHT COLORED ARE EXISTING TO S TAT I O N SYMBOLSYMBOLo� REMAIN. NINE T E E N LK7}tTNO POW B. ELECTRICAL ITEMS SHOWN DARK SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AND Architects UNIVERSITY Incorporated AVENUE SOUTHEAST ® �T RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX REMOVED, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SUITE 100 �IANYt T SZOL ARE 0 MfMINNEA A LI 14 a71Vim C. DEMOUSHED BRANCH CIRCUITS MAY BE REUSED IN NEW O Q TtIEJiMosTAT CONSTRUCTION: IF BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE NOT REUSED IN PHONE tz szMANO 2— j NEW CONSTRUCTION, REMOVE CONDUIT BACK TO DEMOLITION , hearbyeertrytfiattisplaN THERMOSTAT, RJR A� LIMITS AND REMOVE CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE. PROVIDE me°"o`un*w West dmd J—BOX AT CONDUIT END AND LABEL "SPARE'. PS Pa" �aoiaid �`-�=�ly GANGED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE licensed Pmms� 6g�urdx8te EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK SPACE D. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT SITE TO VERIFY EXISTING MI NES A BUNMG MOUNT UGHT G CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. SKNxrUw 120/90W PANELBOARD e MEFJt Su et fts E. DOWNTIME OF PANELS SHALL BE KEPT TO A MINIMUM. TpNNlri6Ht ssu ED TRANSFORMER COORDINATE WITH OWNER. OWNER SHALL APPROVE PANEL DATE: APRIL 19, 2D13 WORK PRIOR TO START. COMM11INICAI)ONS 0*� � CONWT, CONCEALED DRAWN BY: SMY CiEqKM BY: SWY i OUTI.ETv 7ELEPHONE C0ND1ff' BUO1M `ODE <>SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES CtT"`E FRIENDSHIP LO DISCONNECT CHURCH S CFES N01M 1 . DISCONNECT, REMOVE AND STORE FOR REUSE IN NEW CONSTRUCTION. PRIOR LAKE SWITCH SORU POLE DRAVMG CHANGE 2 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE. CIRCUIT SHALL REMAIN FOR REUSE MINNESOTA IN NEW CONSTRUCTION. Project Number sNA201301 GANGED SWITCH• SPACE O SPECFIC ELECTRICAL NOW respomibkfamyekms"damesesaezpea>v 3. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE. REMOVE CIRCUIT BACK TO SOURCE , E)ztrwic 8ks my sot swohoey refteame rd PHOTO CONTROL O EQUIPMENT TAG dewaa.ke." Irbrhermpooma8eyofmms bvmy •a iyoue, ammakn sod odmredred mr m.6m pr k doavmme mry nath med awpiedvidtaa peior y 2013NIrighbrmaved No, Date APPr RevWm Noma No. I Dam issue Notes now CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet Time ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES OravAng No. E2 SIEEN 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax Email : steenC steeneng.com N1 fl � A 5430 Douglas Drive North V Y M Crystal, NIN 55429 �¶ 007B ' WI 12 S D 2 � El� ' 30 5 A GFI i E 14 le L b �� d B e6h STATION to s e e 17 3b � 12 008A NINETEEN I C \ \ I __ 0 Architects - Incorporated \ ` \ I 2001 UNIVERSITY .EWWC //�� 4 14 FCrS AVENSU � 1T EAST MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55414 4 I 9 b p PHONE (612 623.1600 O F en s e F 10012 W j 14 I hearty afionfY mat report plan, 006 - - sped fi y me , or wav 5 I� apart � prepared fe me a ssionai EWnunder my direct GFl Maintenance/Storage supervision and than am a duty ID �� �� 4\N� xe 0 1 11 1 of the of 009 Lcen=edMI NES A D Presentation 4 3 e ID Lower Lobby _ t� Ut Ss bl 0o8B -1 SH NATURE ' � / \ 07 / \\ / \\ I � 8 � ENGINEER STEVEN M. GS Mechanical 1 ID 0 REGISTRATION NUMBER 6544 °°4 P—� C � ` b 14 DRAWN BY: APRIL 18. SMY TELEPHONE PANEL 7 J I� p pl CHECKED BY: SMY i I�LEPrIVNE 1 \ \ \ 10 PROJECT TITLE BACKBOARD 6 < < 14 4S" FRIENDSHIP CHURCH 0 to IO 10 B PRIOR LAKE 003 FC- b a c 12 R lev E . . MINNESOTA ( b sss� 3 d de 54" 60� El e or ono Project Number SNA201301 e Ermn may occur in s tranmmim of is no mk StOr Q G! l l film Satin N ne em M dwrat. l r is not 14 response fu any cr, m davaao apma errmgwof lhemdinel tt>< ot the s- 003A �ann cm� s aero-a:� file,_ D daft cononic di�om it not the mosbiS� fthe�c 5n w respoev N o im U P to wriffbrorat all layouts, d:®siors and Mc related infv � d O � d s H w 3 @ b St . This ntm� �then=maW�� � � Storage - • ml3tdlrighbrmwnd ° _ J e d _ 10 E a 1 0� z a ° b o> > U ne No. Date AM Revision Notes d� It3 d I AIR xoc Ev d 3 s lr—J ELECTRICAL hallo. Date Issue Notes P� CONSTRUCTION NEW CONSTRUCTION PLAN DOCUMENTS 1 � T� 1 / if ELECTRICAL NEW 8 = _ 1 - O CONSTRUCTION PLAN paw ng No. REFER TO SHEET E4 FOR NOTES. E 3 ESIEN 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax Email: steen(g steenengxom 5430 Douglas Drive North Crystal, N4N 55429 STATION NINETEEN GENERAL ELECTRICAL NEW CONSTRUCTION NOTES UNIVE SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL NEW CONSTRUCTION NOTES Arcnitects raga 2001 NNERSrrY AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 A. ELECTRICAL ITEMS SHOWN LIGHT COLORED ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. 1 . NEW LOCATION FOR EXISTING FIXTURE OR DEVICE. MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 5M14 B. CLEAN AND REPAIR EXISTING FIXTURES REUSED IN NEW CONSTRUCTION. 2. CONNECT TO EXISTING LIGHTING . CIRCUIT. PHONE (s12 s29.1800 FAX a1 hearby certify mreat pMpt plan, RELAMP PRIOR TO TURN OVER. spec fication or rder rrry�drect 3. CONNECT TO EXISTING ROOM RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. prepared by meoru Co OBTAIN POWER FROM EXISTING PANEL 7, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. supervisbn and thatl amadduulIyy Ucensed Professlore he l Engineer trKler t CIRCUIT NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 4. CONNECT TO EXISTING ROOM LIGHTING CIRCUIT. la MI NEof the NES A D. PROVIDE CIRCUIT BREAKERS OR FUSED SWITCHES AS REQUIRED WHERE 5. INSTALL DEVICE IN EXISTING J—BOX AND CONNECT TO EXISTING BRANCH wo s�NAT�RE NEW CIRCUITS ARE TO BE ADDED TO EXISTING PANELBOARDS. CIRCUIT CIRCUIT EtlGWEER " M. BREAKERS AND SWITCHES SHALL BE SAME MANUFACTURER AND SAME TION NUMBER BSM TYPE AS EXISTING. PROVIDE PROPER CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSED 6. CONNECT TO UNSWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT. DATE APRIL 10, 2013 SWITCH. WHEN A PANELBOARD DOES NOT HAVE SPACE TO ACCOMMODATE ADDITIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES, PROVIDE 7. , RECONNECT FIXTURE TO EXISTING STAIR LIGHTING CIRCUIT. DRAWN BY: Sw A FUSED SWITCH NEAR THE PANEL AND TAP THE CIRCUIT INTO THE CHECKM BY: SMY PANELBOARD BUSSING. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY CONDITIONS 8. REPLACE OR PROVIDE BATTERY FOR PROPER OPERATION. PROXCTTME OF EXISTING PANELBOARDS PRIOR TO BID. FRIENDSHIP 9. RECONNECT EXISTING FIXTURES AS REQUIRED FOR NEW SWITCHING. CHURCH E. FIXTURE TYPES TYPICAL A. 1X4 LENSED, 2—LAMP, 2-32W T8 LAMPS, PROGRESS OP7279-60EB OR 10. DEDICATED FOR OWNER'S SYSTEM CABUNG. PROVIDE DOUBLE GANG BOX PRIOR LAKE EQUAL WITH 3/4" CONDUIT STUBBED INTO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE ABOVEMINNESOTA B. TRACK, 1 -75W PAR 16, WHITE FINISH, BLACK BAFFLE. PROGRESS Project Number SNA201301 #9205-28—TRACK-1 OR EQUAL PROVIDE TRACK LENGTHS SHOWN ON 11 . ROUTE CONDUIT IN NEW SHEETROCK OVER EXISTING COLUMN. PLAN AND ALL REQUIRED ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM. Co 3W RIBBED LENSED, 2—LAMP, 2-17W T8 LAMPS, SEAGULL #49011100015 12. DEDICATED FOR OWNER'S LED DISPLAY LIGHTING. OR EQUAL MOUNT ABOVE MIRROR, Irrm�emo'm�iodoffia rcredQ E. SELF POWERED EXIT FIXTURE. MATCH EXISTING UTHONIA. 13. CONNECT TAD EXISTING RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. TI& nWmt< wed a �� F. SELF POWERED EMERGENCY EGRESS FIXTURE. MATCH EXISTING UTHONIA. • 2013a1i ri,Eta rwmd 14. CONNECT TO SWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT, No, Dale Ava Revision Notes 15. DEDICATED FOR CONDENSATE DRAIN PUMP. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL No, Data Issue Notes K ee CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS sneetrme ELECTRICAL NEW CONSTRUCTION NOTES - tlraWilg No. E4 MOTOR DATAI of Y ®. 121 & MODELi 1h, ills 1 1 • 1 , 1 1 VA " ,IY , IY Y Y � . , _ . _ arlrr�rrl 06 10 via i •'� • • • y 1 � . 1 2001 UNIVERSITY AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 1 1 1 1 1 0 ifL it , 1 1 1 � ' � 1 I I 1 I . • ill .. i1* MAGIC elf - 11 111 11 • 1 ► 1 1 • - MAGIC AIRE 1ze 1 • ' : �i Imm®rm FRIENDSHIP CHURCH PRIOR LAKE MINNESOTA Jim == MIME x!IIIJO is ► • li. u � i � - - - • , l iI • ' III M 11 1 1 • 1 M • • ' • ' • 1 • • 1 C3 '® a 1 1 1 • • 1 • CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sbeet The MECHANICAL SCHEDULES • r • • 1 `� M 1 1 : 1 • 7 ' • 1 I ell ell 0 , • • ell oil k �\: . ik VITA IT, 4 - 11 a1 • \ AA r =01g I NIFA ■ MA111111 All AAA All AAAA, A, All a ______ - [�„ n _. ,� �/ I� \ cell r WE El I AAA O : I , `Aw,At� AAWI,,I AAA It W4 ■ � ! m e2001 UNIVERSITY 39b AVENUE SOUTHEAST SUITE 100 tM �_ • ( l . : DO III ww, =16 AAA I • A,AAAAAAAA / IL specification, otA report was prepared by me or under my dract OIL � : f I = .. Presentation ' • � • • • • "Aw" • • 1 1 : : VIA Attfr % EASTING FAN COIL 11007 908 UNIT TO REMAIN ANA Az NZ > tr�� ��> A== A! I f ■■ � . . � ., ® 'ALt=e FRIENDSHIP - i AMA Atom= 1 , REMAIN loll 11 1 " " • if - � . _. . . _ , , _ Stori - _ At Phase All1 1 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SheetTille MECHANICAL NEW CONSTRUCTION i STEEN 763-585-6742 763-585-6757 fax Email: Steen( steeneng.com 5430 Douglas Drive North DUAL TEMP. AUTO CHANGE OVER 1 crystal, lvIZ.T 55429 PIPING MAINS R S BALANC ( ING VALVE M) ' S TAT I O N SHUTOFF VALVE - . O TEST PLUG ) NINE E E N FLOW MEASURING ' UNION (TYP) Architects 2001 UNIVEER ITY fed DEICE PRESSURE AVENUE SOUTHEAST GAUGE(TYP) SUITE 1OO BALANCING MINNEAPOUS, VALVE(TYP) CHECK MINNESOTA 55414 VALVE(TYP) P40012 HONE 612 62341800 21 fHEATING/COOLING SHUTOFF i heafycefffyffw ff" iw. I o speaSca6an, arrepod was - pmpared by me or undermy &ai C II— REDUCING W VALVE(TYP) ucens = the a am state at / (rn') taws THERMOMETER MINNESOTA DRAIN VALVE \ StcNATu I \ ^ ET((i1NEER tNAtiK R DUCT SENSOR PRIMARY REGISTRATIOINIMMSElt 24713 MODULATING OVERRIDE STRAINER(TYP) PUMP 1E ArRataauts 3—WAY VALVE — AIR TEMPERATURE > 105 CRAVOIBY: saT HIGH UMR UNION(TYP) CWCVEDMPFKMCTTIRE tsta IN—UNE CIRCULATING PUMP AS SCHEDULED, FRIENDSHIP SCHEDULED, CHURCH SPACE SENSOR NOTE ' PROVIDE SPRING ISOLATORS WHEN MOUNTING PIPING PRIOR LAKE AND PUMPS TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. MINNESOTA COILS AND PIPING SHALL BE ARRANGED TO BE FULLY DRAINABLE. Project Number sr,A201301 2 VERTICAL PIPING SHALL BE OFFSET SUCH THAT COILS CAN BE REMOVED WITHOUT INTERFERENCE. r=e, my e : dce,®. ee .r fife. oble N'mef laWk &m 1 cxp1 IN - LINE nspoxbk rormYckor. d� erep®n ariatn8 eet ofuK ,m.� ueea< 6e mfemaem cmn:ed m dxamk files FAN COIL UNIT DETAIL PARALLEL 2 PUMP DETAILmfi � � � ��ro.airy afi kyan. Ameoam .od amelrd prie cmYa1. NO SCALE NO SCALE • 20t3vt ��b No, Date Appr Revision Nolte s 1. 5-22-13 Addendum No. 1 No, Date Issue Notes Phase CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet rile MECHANICAL DETAILS Drarnng Na M9